First Author
This is the abstract. This is the abstract. This is the abstract. This is the abstract. This is the abstract. This is the abstract. This is the abstract. This is the abstract. This is the abstract. This is the abstract.
procchap.tex
%% Version 3/21/02

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%% Kluwer Proceedings Sample, ProcSamp.tex
%%
%% Kluwer Academic Press
%%
%% Prepared by Amy Hendrickson, TeXnology Inc., July 1999.
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

%%%%%
%% LaTeX2e 
%% Uncomment documentclass, 
\documentclass{kapproc} % Computer Modern font calls

%% and, optionally, one or more 
%%   of the \usepackage commands below:

%%%%%
%% If you use a font encoding package, please enter it here, i.e.,
%  \usepackage{T1enc}

%%%%%
%  If you have MathTimes and MathTimesPlus fonts, you
%  may uncomment the line below and use them, but you are
%  not obligated to do so, and most authors do not have
%  these fonts. (You may need to edit m-times.sty to make the
%  font names match those on your system)

%  You must have the MathTimes fonts for this to work. They may be
%  purchased from the Y&Y company, http://www.YandY.com.

% \usepackage[mtbold,noTS1]{m-times}

%%%%%
% PostScript font calls
%
% If you use the procps PS font file, you may need to edit it
% to make sure the font names match those on your system. See
% the top of the procps.sty file for more info.

\usepackage{procps} 

%%%%%
% Style for inserting .eps files and rotating illustrations or tables

% possible options for graphicx:
% [dvips], [xdvi], [dvipdf], [dvipsone], [dviwindo], [emtex], [dviwin],
% [pctexps],  [pctexwin],  [pctexhp],  [pctex32], [truetex], [tcidvi],
% [oztex], [textures]

\usepackage[dvips]{graphicx}

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%% LaTeX209, 
%  Uncomment only one below, comment out similar commands above
%  \documentstyle{kapproc} % Computer Modern fonts
%  \documentstyle[procps]{kapproc} %For PostScript fonts
%  (The m-times.sty works only with LaTeX2e)

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%% Commands You Can Set or Change to Customize Your Book Format: ===>>>

% Running heads:
% ==============

%  Uncomment to make chapter title on left hand page
%  and section title on right hand page
%  \chapsectrunningheads


% Section heads:
% ==============

%%%
% \chaptersection % will use chapter.section form for section heads.

%%%
% Uncomment to make section heads appear in
%                    both upper and lower case.
\upperandlowercase

% \useuppercase % Uncomment to make section and subsection heads 
                %  appear in uppercase.

%%%
% How many levels of section head would you like numbered?
% 0= no section numbers, 1= section, 2= subsection, 3= subsubsection
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{1}

% Table of Contents:
% ==================
% How many levels of section head would you like to appear in the
%  Table of Contents?
%  0= chapter titles, 1= section titles, 2= subsection titles, 
%  3= subsubsection titles.

\setcounter{tocdepth}{1}

% Equation numbering:
% ===================

%%%
% \nochapequationnumber % will result in equation numbers that are (1)

%%%
% \sectionequationnumber % will result in equation numbers that are (1.1)
                         % and renumber for each section

% Default for kapproc is (equation number)

% Theorem numbering:
% ==================
% \nochaptheoremnumber % will make the theorem type environments number
       % only with the theorem number. 
       % Default is only theorem number for kapproc.

% Footnotes/Endnotes:
% ===================

% Default is endnotes that appear at the end of the chapter, above
% the references, or whereever \notes is written.

%%%
% To change footnotes to appear at bottom of page uncomment:
% \let\footnote\savefootnote

%%%
% Uncomment if you want footnotetext to appear at the bottom of the page:
%\let\footnotetext\savefootnotetext

%%%
% Uncomment if you want a ruled line above the footnote.
%\let\footnoterule\savefootnoterule

% Bibliography Style Settings:
% ============================
% Choose either kluwerbib or normallatexbib:

%%%
\kluwerbib % will produce this kind of bibliography entry:

%  Anderson, Terry L.,...
%    continuing bib entry here

%  \cite{xxx} will print without brackets around the citation.
% \bibliographystyle{kapalike} % should be used when you use \verb+\kluwerbib+.

%%%
%\normallatexbib %will produce bibliography entries as shown in the
                % LaTeX book

% [1] Anderson, Terry L.,
%     continuing bib entry

% \cite{xxx} will print with square brackets around the citation, i.e., [1].

% Any \verb+\bibliographystyle{}+ may be used with \verb+\normallatexbib+, but
% you should check with your editor to find the style preferred for
% your book.

% Change Brackets around Citation:
% ================================

%% Default with \kluwerbib is no brackets around citation. 
%% Default with \normallatexbib is square brackets around citation. 

% For parens around citation uncomment these:

%\let\lcitebracket(
%\let\rcitebracket)

% For square brackets around citation uncomment these:

%\let\lcitebracket[
%\let\rcitebracket]

% Draft Line:
% ===========
%  Optional, uncomment to make current time and `draft' appear at
%  bottom of page.

% \draft

%%%% <<== End Formatting Commands You Can Set or Change %%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

\begin{document}

\articletitle{Sample Article Title}

\articlesubtitle{This is an Article Subtitle}

\author{First Author}
\affil{Author Affiliation\\
Second Line of Affiliation}
\email{firstauthor@myuniv.edu}

\author{Second Author}
\affil{Author Affiliation\\
Second Line of Affiliation}
\email{secondauthor@anotheruniv.edu}



\begin{abstract}
This is the abstract. This is the abstract.
This is the abstract. This is the abstract.
This is the abstract. This is the abstract.
This is the abstract. This is the abstract.
This is the abstract. This is the abstract.
\end{abstract}

\begin{keywords}
Sample, proceedings
\end{keywords}

\section*{Introduction}
Here is an introduction.
Here is an introduction.
Here is an introduction.
Here is an introduction.
Here is an introduction.

\section{First Section}
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.

\subsection{First SubSection}
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.

\subsubsection{First SubSubSection}
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.

\paragraph{First Paragraph}
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.


\articletitle[Communism, Sparta, and Plato]
{Communism, Sparta,\\ and Plato\thanks{Thanks will work in
articletitle.}}

\author{The Author}

\affil{Author Affiliation}

%% optional, to supply a shorter version of the title for the running head:
%%\chaptitlerunninghead{}

%%\inxx{} seen below, is an indexing command, for `silent' index
%% entries. \inx{} will print on page AND send term to .inx file.


\prologue{The organization of our forces is a thing calling in its
nature for much advice and the framing of many rules, but the principal
[first] is this---that no man, and no woman, be ever suffered
to live without an officer set over them, and no soul of man
to learn the trick of doing one single thing of its own sole
\inx{motion}, in play or in earnest, but in peace as in war...\footnote{This
prologue represents thought developed and written more than two
thousand years ago. That is quite a few years!}\inxx{Plato}\inxx{Plato,Laws}}
{Plato, {\it Laws}, 942a--c}
\anxx{Plato}

\section{Introduction}
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.\footnote{A further, but subsidiary thought
on this subject will find itself in the endnote section which
appears above the references at the end of this article.}
\newpage
\notes
\articletitle[Audio Quality Determination]
{Audio Quality Determination\\
Based on Perceptual \\
Measurement Techniques
}

\author{John G. Beerends,\altaffilmark{1} James Joyce,\altaffilmark{2}
and Arthur Miller\altaffilmark{1,3}}

\altaffiltext{1}{Royal PTT Netherlands N.V.\\
KRN Research, P. Box 421, AK Leidenham\\
The Netherlands}
\email{beerends@ptt.com.nl}

\altaffiltext{2}{Trinity University\\
Dublin, Ireland}
\email{jjoyce@dublin.ir}

\altaffiltext{3}{Syracuse University,\\
Syracuse, NY}
\email{arthurm@math.syracuse.edu}

\begin{abstract}
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract....
\end{abstract}

\begin{keywords}
Sample keywords, sample keywords.
\end{keywords}

\articletitle[Audio Quality Determination]
{Audio Quality Determination\\
Based on Perceptual \\
Measurement Techniques
}
\author{John G. Beerends,\altaffilmark{1} James Joyce,\altaffilmark{2}
and Arthur Miller\altaffilmark{1,3}}

\affil{\altaffilmark{1}Royal PTT Netherlands N.V., \ 
\altaffilmark{2}Trinity University, \ \altaffilmark{3}Syracuse
University}

\begin{abstract}
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
\end{abstract}

\begin{keywords}
Audio quality measurements, perceptual measurement techniques
\end{keywords}

\section{Introduction}
Here is the beginning of the article.

\articletitle[Audio Quality Determination]
{Audio Quality Determination\\
Based on Perceptual \\
Measurement Techniques}

\author{John G. Beerends}

%% affil, email, and abstract are optional
\affil{Royal PTT Netherlands N.V.\\
KRN Research, P. Box 421, AK Leidenham\\
The Netherlands\footnote{Partial funding provided by grant NL-213-456.}}
\email{beerends@ptt.com.nl}

%% optional, to supply a shorter version of the title for the running head:
%%\chaptitlerunninghead{}

\anxx{Beerends\, John G.}

\begin{abstract}
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
\end{abstract}

\begin{keywords}
Audio quality measurements, perceptual measurement techniques
\end{keywords}

\section{Introduction}
Here is the beginning of the article.\footnote{Here is a sample footnote
which will normally format as an endnote at the end of the article.}
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.


\section[All the Things that can be Done with Figure Captions]
{All the Things that can be Done\\ with Figure Captions}

Here are some examples of various kinds of figure captions
that can be use with this Kluwer style. They include the
normal \LaTeX\ \verb+\caption{}+ as well as many more possibilities
which you will see illustrated here.

\begin{figure}[ht]
\vskip.2in
\caption{Short caption.}
\end{figure}

\noindent
The following example shows a caption which includes an indexing command.
Notice that there is a \verb+\protect+ command before the \verb+\inx+.
This keeps \LaTeX\ from expanding the \verb+\inx+ command at
the wrong time.

\begin{figure}[ht]
\caption{\protect\inx{Oscillograph} for memory address access operations, showing 500 ps
address access time and $\alpha\beta\Gamma\Delta\sum_{123}^{345}$
\protect\inx{superimposed signals}%
\protect\inxx{address,superimposed
signals} of address access in 1 kbit
memory plane.}
\end{figure}

\noindent
Here is an example of a double caption; one figure with two
captions appearing side by side:

%% Double captions:
\begin{figure}[ht]
\sidebyside
{\caption{This caption will go on the left side of
the page. It is the initial caption of two side-by-side captions.}}
{\caption{This caption will go on the right side of
the page. It is the second of two side-by-side captions.}}
\end{figure}

\noindent
When you need a continued caption for a second figure that
uses the same number as the preceding one as a continuation
of the previous figure:

%% For continued caption. Same figure number used as for last caption.
\begin{figure}[ht]
\contcaption{This is a continued caption.}
\end{figure}
\inxx{captions,figure}

\noindent
When you want to make a narrow caption, you can use the
\verb=\narrowcaption= command.

%% To make narrow caption:
\begin{figure}[ht]
\narrowcaption{This is a narrow caption so that it can
be at the side of the illustration. This is a narrow caption.
This is a narrow caption. This is a narrow caption.}
\end{figure}

\noindent
You may also make a narrow continued caption as you see in
the following example.

%% To make narrow continued caption:
\begin{figure}[ht]
\narrowcontcaption{This is a narrow continued caption.
This is a narrow continued caption. This is a narrow continued caption.}
\end{figure}

\noindent
When you need to make a lettered caption, you may use the command\newline
\verb+\letteredcaption{}{}+. The first argument is
for the letter.

\begin{figure}[ht]
\letteredcaption{a}{Lettered caption.}
\end{figure}
\inxx{captions,lettered}


Notice that you can have lettered captions in the side by side
environment, which is one of the places that lettered captions
may be most useful. 


\begin{figure}[ht]
\sidebyside
{
\letteredcaption{b}{One caption.}}
{
\letteredcaption{c}{Two captions.}}
\end{figure}

\section{Making Tables}\inxx{Making tables}
Notice that the caption should be at the top of the table. Use
a line above the table, under the column heads, and at the
end of the table. If you use the Kluwer command, \verb+\sphline+
instead of the \LaTeX\ command \verb+\hline+, you will get
a little space added above and below the line, which will
make your table look more elegant.

This form of the tabular command makes the
table spread out to the width of the page.
This example also shows using \verb+\caption[]{}+ with the
first argument, in square brackets, used to send information
to the List of Tables. 


\begin{table}[ht]
\caption[Effects of the Two Types of Scaling Proposed by Dennard 
and Co-Workers.]%<-- this version will appear in List of Tables
{Effects of the Two Types of Scaling Proposed by \protect\inx{Dennard} 
and\newline
Co-Workers.$^{a,b}$}%<-- this version will appear on page
\begin{tabular*}{\textwidth}{@{\extracolsep{\fill}}lcc}
\sphline
\it Parameter&\it $\kappa$ Scaling &\it $\kappa$, $\lambda$ Scaling\cr
\sphline
Dimension&$\kappa^{-1}$&$\lambda^{-1}$\cr
Voltage&$\kappa^{-1}$&$\kappa^{-1}$\cr
Currant&$\kappa^{-1}$&$\lambda/\kappa^{2}$\cr
\inx{Dopant Concentration}&$\kappa$&$\lambda^2/\kappa$\cr
\sphline
\end{tabular*}
\begin{tablenotes}
$^a$Refs.~19 and 20.

$^b\kappa, \lambda>1$.
\end{tablenotes}
\end{table}
\inxx{captions,table}

\noindent
Tables may use both the\verb+\sidebyside+ and the 
\verb+\letteredcaption+ command to position the tables
side by side and letter the captions.

\begin{table}[ht]
\sidebyside
{\letteredcaption{a}{A small table with a lettered table caption.}
\centering
\begin{tabular}{lcr}\sphline
\it $\alpha\beta\Gamma\Delta$ One&\it Two&\it Three\cr\sphline
one&two&three\cr\sphline
\end{tabular}
\label{table2a}}
{\letteredcaption{b}{A small table with a second lettered table caption.}
\centering
\begin{tabular}{lcr}\sphline
\it $\alpha\beta\Gamma\Delta$ One&\it Two&\it Three\cr\sphline
one&two&three\cr
one&two&three\cr\sphline
\end{tabular}
\label{table2b}}
\end{table}

\newpage
The following table shows  how you might increase vertical space between
particular lines with the use of a `strut', a vertical line with no width
so that it doesn't print, but which does have a height and/or
depth.

It also shows how to make a table with vertical lines, if you
find them absolutely necessary, by supplying and extra column
entry in the preamble, which you never use in the body of the
table. This makes the vertical line position itself correctly.


\begin{table}[ht]
\caption{Here is a table caption.}
\begin{center}
\begin{tabular}{||c||c||l}
\hline
  %% On the next line is an example of how to get extra vertical space in
  %% a line: Use a \vrule with width 0pt and the height or depth that you
  %% want.
\it Cell\vrule height 14pt width 0pt depth 4pt
&\it Time (sec.)&\cr
\hline
\hline
1&432.22\vrule height 12pt width0pt&\cr
%%
%% On the next line, see how to line up numbers aligned on their decimal point
2&\phantom{3}32.32&\cr
3&\phantom{33}2.32&\cr
\hline
\end{tabular}
\end{center}
\end{table}

The following table uses a continued caption, made with the command
\verb+\contcaption{}+.


\begin{table}[ht]
\contcaption{This is a continued caption.}
\begin{center}
\begin{tabular}{||c||c||l}
\hline
  %% On the next line is an example of how to get extra vertical space in
  %% a line: Use a \vrule with width 0pt and the height or depth that you
  %% want.
\it Cell\vrule height 14pt width 0pt depth 4pt
&\it \inx{Time} (sec.)&\cr
\hline
\hline
4&532.22\vrule height 12pt width0pt&\cr
%%
%% On the next line, see how to line up numbers aligned on their decimal point
5&\phantom{3}12.02&\cr
6&\phantom{33}4.44&\cr
\hline
\end{tabular}
\end{center}
\end{table}

\subsection{Figure, Table and Appendices in Landscape Mode}
These commands should be used for landscape figures, tables,
and appendices. In order for them to actually print in
landscape mode you will need to use the appropriate command
with your printer driver, a command which differs according
to which printer driver you are using. You can print
examples of these commands by uncommenting {\tt \string\end{document}}
at the end of this sample.

This is how to make a figure caption to be turned sideways on page:

{\small
\begin{verbatim}
\begin{widefigure}
\caption{This is a wide figure caption.  It is meant to be 
printed in landscape mode (sideways).  This page should be 
turned sideways when the driver program is used to translate 
the .dvi file to the file that is sent to the printer.}
\end{widefigure}
\end{verbatim}}

This is how to make a sideways table caption:

{\small
\begin{verbatim}
\begin{widetable}
\caption{This is a wide table caption.  It is meant to be 
printed in landscape mode (sideways).  This page should be 
turned sideways when the driver program is used to translate 
the .dvi file to the file that is sent to the printer.} 
\end{widetable} 
\end{verbatim}}

This is how to do an appendix printed sideways:

{\small
\begin{verbatim}
\begin{landscapemode}
\appendix{Interest Rate Liberalization Through 1988}
This is the text of the appendix.
This is the text of the appendix.
\end{landscapemode}
\end{verbatim}}


\section{Other environments}
\begin{quote}
This is a sample of extract or quotation.\inxx{quotation}%
\inxx{quotation,extract}
This is a sample of extract or quotation.
This is a sample of extract or quotation.
\end{quote}

\begin{enumerate}
\item
This is the first item in the numbered list.

\item
This is the second item in the numbered list.
This is the second item in the numbered list.
This is the second item in the numbered list.
\end{enumerate}

\begin{itemize}
\item
This is the first item in the itemized list.

\item
This is the first item in the itemized list.
This is the first item in the itemized list.
This is the first item in the itemized list.
\end{itemize}

\begin{itemize}
\item[]
This is how to get an indented paragraph without
an item marker.

\item[]
This is how to get an indented paragraph without
an item marker.
\end{itemize}


\section[Small Running Head]{Some Sample Algorithms}
When you want to demonstrate some programming code, these are
the commands to use. Lines will be preserved as you see them
on the screen, as will spaces at the beginning of the line.%
\inxx{algorithm,State transition}\inxx{algorithm}
A backslash followed with a space will indent the line. 
Blank lines will be preserved.
Math and font changes may be used. 

\begin{algorithm}
{\bf state\_transition algorithm} $\{$
\        for each neuron $j\in\{0,1,\ldots,M-1\}$
\        $\{$   
\            calculate the weighted sum $S_j$ using Eq. (6);
\            if ($S_j>t_j$)
\                    $\{$turn ON neuron; $Y_1=+1\}$   
\            else if ($S_j<t_j$)
\                    $\{$turn OFF neuron; $Y_1=-1\}$   
\            else
\                    $\{$no change in neuron state; $y_j$ remains %
unchanged;$\}$.
\        $\}$   
$\}$   
\end{algorithm}

Here is another sample algorithm:

%% \bit will produce bold italics if you are using PostScript fonts, 
%% boldface in Computer Modern.

\begin{algorithm}
{\bit Evaluate-Single-FOE} ({\bf x$_f$, I$_0$, I$_1$}):
\ {\bf I}+ := {\bf I}$_1$;
\ ($\phi,\theta$) := (0,0);
\ {\it repeat}\note{/*usually only 1 interation required*/}
\ \ (s$_{opt}${\bf E}$_\eta$) := {\bit Optimal-Shift} ({\bf I$_0$,I$^+$,I$_0$,x$_f$});
\ \ ($\phi^+$, $\theta^+$) := {\bit Equivalent-Rotation} ({\bf s}$_{opt}$);
\ \ ($\phi$, $\theta$) := ($\phi$, $\theta$) + ($\phi^+$, $\theta^+$);
\ \ {\bf I}$^+$:= {\bit Derotate-Image} ({\bf I}$_1$, $\phi$, $\theta$);
\ \ {\it until} ($\|\phi^+\|\leq\phi_{max}$ \& $\|\theta^+\|\leq\theta_{max}$);
\ {\it return} ({\bf I}$^+$, $\phi$, $\theta$, E$_\eta$).

End pseudo-code.
\end{algorithm}
\inxx{code,Pseudo}

% Notice that to produce printed `{' brackets, precede them with \string

% Notice that \begin{codebox}...\end{codebox} can be inserted within
%   codesamp, and will be positioned at the same distance from right
%   margin as text. codebox needs an argument for the width of the box,
%   as in  \begin{codebox}{2.5in} below.

This is an example of `codesamp' with a `codebox' included. Notice
that `underline' will still work even though this is basically
a verbatim environment.\inxx{code,Sample}

\begin{codesamp}
sqrdc(a, n)(a, qraux)\string{
  \underline{DARRAY float[180] a[180];}
  float qraux[180], col[180], nrmxl,t;
  DO(1=0, n)\string{
         \underline{ALIGN*(i=1, n) col[i]=a[l][i];}
         \begin{codebox}{2.3in}
         init*\string{ nrmxl=0.0;\string}
         DO*(i=l, n)\string{
           nrmxl += col[i]*col[i];\string}
         combine*\string{nrmxl;\string}
         \end{codebox}
         nmxl=sqrt(nrmxl);
         if (nrmxl != 0.00)\string{
            if (col[1]=1.0+col[1];
\end{codesamp}


\begin{glossary}
\term{GaAs}Gallium Arsinide. For similar device sizes GaAs transistors 
have three to\inxx{GaAs,Gallium Arsinide}
five times greater transconductance than those of of silicon bipolar
and MOS transistors.

\term{VLSI}Very Large Scale Integration. Since the mid-1970's 
VLSI technology has been successfully used in many areas, but its effect on
computers of all shapes and sizes has been the most dramatic. Some of the
application areas got boosts in performance while others became
feasible.
\end{glossary}


\section{Summary}
This is a \inx{summary} of this article.

\begin{acknowledgments}
The authors wish to thank Drs.~T. Misugi, M. Kobayashi, and M. Fukuta for%
\inxx{Misugi\, Dr. T.}\inxx{Kobayashi\, Dr. M.}%
\inxx{Fukuta\, Dr. M.}
their encouragement and support. Their authors also wish to thank their
colleagues...
\end{acknowledgments}

\chapappendix{}
This is a chapter appendix without a title 
meant to appear in individual chapters
of the proceedings book, not at the end of the book.

\chapappendix{This is a Chapter Appendix}
This is a chapter appendix with a title.


\begin{figure}[ht]
\caption{This is an appendix figure caption.}
\end{figure}

\begin{table}[ht]
\caption{This is an appendix table caption.}
\centering
\begin{tabular}{ccc}
\hline
one&two&three\\
\hline
C&D&E\\
\hline
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

\begin{equation}
\alpha\beta\Gamma\Delta
\end{equation}

\chapappendix{}
This is a chapter appendix without a title 
that is lettered because it is not the first
appendix.

\begin{equation}
e=mc^2
\end{equation}

\begin{chapthebibliography}{1}
\bibitem{ander}
Anderson, Terry L., and Fred S. McChesney. (n.d.). ``Raid or Trade?
An Economic Model of Indian-WhiteRelations,'' Political Economy Research
Center Working Paper 93--1.

\bibitem{lacey}
Lacey, W.K. (1968). {\it History of Socialism}. Ithaca, NY: Cornell
University Press.

\bibitem{oliva}
Oliva, Pavel. (1971). {\it Sparta and Her Social Problems.} Amsterdam: Adolf
M. Hakkert.

\bibitem{zimmern}
Zimmern, Alfred. (1961). {\it The Greek Commonwealth: Politics and Economics
in Fifth-Century Athens,}\/ 5th ed. New York: Galaxy Book, Oxford University
Press.
\end{chapthebibliography}

\articletitle{Using BibTeX for a bibliography}
\vskip48pt
\vskip1sp
\section{Sample Chapter Bibliography Using BibTeX}
If you would rather make a bibliography using Bib\TeX\ write, 
\begin{verbatim}
\bibliographystyle{apalike}
\chapbblname{chapbib}
\chapbibliography{logic}
\end{verbatim}
Substitute the name of your .bbl file for {\tt chapbib}
above;
substitute
the name of your .bib file for {\tt logic} above.
If you don't
have apalike.bst on your system, you can get it from Kluwer at
the same .ftp site where you can find the book style files.

This will allow many Bib\TeX\ bibliographies in one book.
This example shows the chapter bibliography using
\verb+\normallatexbib+.
See the documentation, KapProc.doc, for more information.


{%\normallatexbib


\bibliographystyle{apalike}
\chapbblname{chapbib}
\chapbibliography{logic}

}




\end{document}

procdocs.tex
%% March 21, 2002 version

%%  This file is called procdocs.tex
%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%
%% LaTeX Documentation file for Articles in
%% Proceedings Style Published by 
%% Kluwer Academic Press
%%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%
%% 
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%
%% Macros written by
%% Amy Hendrickson
%% TeXnology, Inc.
%% 57 Longwood Avenue
%% Brookline, Massachusetts  02446
%% 617 / 738-8029
%%
%% Technical help: dthelp@wkap.com
%%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%

\def\thisdoc{Kluwer Proceedings Documentation}
\def\currstyle{Proceedings}

%% LaTeX2e 
%% Uncomment documentclass, and, optionally, 
%%                            the \usepackage command:
 \documentclass{kapproc} % Computer Modern font calls
 \usepackage{procps}% PostScript font calls
\usepackage[dvipsone]{graphicx}

\let\savenewpage\newpage

\pagenumbering{arabic}
\newdimen\abovetitleskip
\abovetitleskip=24pt

\voffset-1in
\newif\ifdotoc
\dotoctrue

\makeatletter
\ifdotoc
{\def\numberline#1{}
\def\contentsline#1#2#3{}\@starttoc{toc}}\fi
\def\l@section{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}
\def\@dottedtocline#1#2#3#4#5{\ifnum #1>\c@tocdepth \else
\item #4 \qquad{\it #5}\fi}
\setcounter{tocdepth}{1}
\def\numberline#1{}

\def\l@section{\vfill\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}
\makeatother

%% fake versions of commands to make them work in documentation:

\let\openright\relax

%% <== end fake versions
\newdimen\savetopskip
\savetopskip=\topskip
\topskip=36pt

\let\savechapter\chapter
\let\savesection\section
\let\savesubsection\subsection

\let\StartOnNewPage\relax

\textwidth=6in
\hsize=6in
\linewidth=6in

\newdimen\savehsize
\newdimen\savetextwidth
\savehsize=\textwidth
\savetextwidth=\textwidth

\textheight=9in
\newdimen\saveparindent
\newdimen\saveparskip
\saveparindent=\parindent
\saveparskip=\parskip
\parindent=0pt
\parskip=6pt

\makeatletter

\newif\ifdoctitle
\global\doctitletrue
\def\ps@headings{\def\@oddfoot{\hfill}%
\def\@evenfoot{\hfill}%
%
\def\@evenhead{\ifdoctitle\global\doctitlefalse\hfill\else
\hbox to0pt{\hbox to\savetextwidth{%
\hskip-24pt\Large\bf\thepage\hskip 24pt%
\sqbullet\hskip10pt\sqbullet\hskip10pt
\Large\bf Using the Kluwer Macros
\hskip10pt\sqbullet\hskip10pt\sqbullet\hskip10pt\sqbullet\hfill}% 
\hss}\hfill\fi}
%                                    % left heading.
\def\@oddhead{\hbox to0pt{\hbox to\savetextwidth{%
\hfill\hbox{}\ifdoctitle\global\doctitlefalse\hfill\else
\hfill\sqbullet\hskip10pt\sqbullet\hskip 10pt\sqbullet\hskip10pt
\Large\bf Proceedings Style\hskip10pt%
\sqbullet\hskip10pt\sqbullet\hskip24pt\thepage\fi\hbox to-24pt{}}\hss}\hss}
% right heading.
}

\ps@headings

\oddsidemargin 12pt \evensidemargin  -12pt

\leftmargini=18pt
\labelsep=6pt

\def\sqbullet{\raise.2ex\hbox{\vrule width 4pt height4pt}}

\let\savelabelitemi\labelitemi

\def\labelitemi{%\llap
{\hbox to6pt{\sqbullet\hfill}}}



\def\ysection#1{\ifdotoc
\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{x}#1}\fi
{\let\uppercase\relax
\@startsection {section}{3}{-24pt}{-36pt plus -1pt minus 
 -1pt}{1sp}{\Large\bf}*{#1}}}

\def\section{\ysection}

\def\ysubsection#1#2{{\let\uppercase\relax%
\@startsection {subsection}{2}{-12pt}{-24pt plus -1pt minus 
 -1pt}{1sp}{\large\sc}#1{#2}}}

\def\subsection{\ysubsection*}

\let\savesubsubsection\subsubsection
\def\subsubsection{\savesubsubsection*}

\def\chapter#1{\global\doctitletrue
\vbox to  9.5pc{
\hyphenpenalty=10000 % No hyphenation in chapter heads
\parindent=-36pt
\vskip12pt\vskip-\parskip
\def\\ {\vskip-\parskip}
\booktitlefont\baselineskip=30pt
#1
\vskip1sp %8pt
\moveright-36pt\vbox{\advance\hsize by 36pt
\hrule height 1.5pt  width \hsize
}\vfill}}

\let\save@listI\@listI
\let\save@listi\@listi

\def\code{\vskip3pt
\hbox to\textwidth{\vrule width \textwidth height .6pt}
\normalsize\vskip1sp}

\def\endcode{\vskip6pt}
\let\xcode\code

\def\results{\bgroup
\let\pagestyle\eatone
\let\thispagestyle\eatone
\let\newpage\relax
\hbox to\hsize{.\dotfill.}
\vskip15pt
\bgroup
\def\contentsline##1##2##3{}
\def\addcontentsline##1##2##3{}
\def\addtocontents##1##2{}
\let\@listI\save@listI
\let\@listi\save@listi \@listi
\linewidth=\savehsize
\hsize=\savehsize
\textwidth=\savetextwidth
\parindent=\saveparindent
\parskip=\saveparskip
\let\chapter\savechapter
\let\section\savesection
\let\subsection\savesubsection
\let\subsubsection\savesubsubsection
\let\labelitemi\savelabelitemi
\normalsize\par}


\def\endresults{\vskip1sp
\egroup\vskip1sp\egroup
\hbox to\textwidth{\vrule width \textwidth height .6pt}
\xmedium\vskip18pt}

\def\nolineendresults{\vskip1sp
\egroup\vskip1sp\egroup
\xmedium\vskip18pt}

\def\xresults{\bgroup
\bgroup
\topskip\savetopskip
\def\contentsline##1##2##3{}
\let\@listI\save@listI
\let\@listi\save@listi \@listi
\linewidth=\savehsize
\hsize=\savehsize
\textwidth=\savetextwidth
\parindent=\saveparindent
\parskip=\saveparskip
\let\section\savesection
\let\subsection\savesubsection
\let\labelitemi\savelabelitemi
\normalsize\par}


\def\xendresults{\vskip1sp
\egroup\vskip1sp\egroup
\xmedium\vskip18pt}


\def\spresults{\hbox to\savehsize{\dotfill}
\vskip3pt\bgroup
\let\@listI\save@listI
\let\@listi\save@listi \@listi
\linewidth=\savehsize
\hsize=\savehsize
\textwidth=\savetextwidth
\parindent=\saveparindent
\parskip=\saveparskip
\normalsize}


\def\endspresults{\vskip3pt\egroup
\hbox to\textwidth{\vrule width \textwidth height .6pt}
\vskip18pt\xmedium}


\def\@listI{\leftmargin\leftmargini \parsep 4\p@ plus2\p@ minus\p@
\topsep 4\p@ plus2\p@ minus4\p@
\itemsep -3pt %4\p@ plus2\p@ minus\p@
}

\let\@listi\@listI
\@listi

\def\xmedium{\@setsize\xmedium{12pt}\xipt\@xipt}

\makeatother

\def\btt#1{{\tt\string\ \unskip#1}}
\def\lc{$\{$}\def\rc{$\}$}

\makeatletter
\let\save@makeschapterhead\@makeschapterhead
\def\@makeschapterhead#1{%
\global\titletrue
  \vspace*{-12pt}%
  {\parindent \z@ \raggedright
    \reset@font
    \interlinepenalty\@M
    \Large \bfseries\schaptertitlefont #1\par\nobreak
\vskip3pc
}}
\makeatother
\begin{document}
\makeatletter
\def\hb@xt@ {\hbox to}
\makeatother


\xmedium
\textwidth=6in
\hsize=6in
\linewidth=6in


\newif\ifdotitlepage
\dotitlepagetrue

\ifdotitlepage

\expandafter\ifx\csname psfonts\endcsname\relax 
\font\big=cmbx10 scaled \magstep5 
\font\semibig=cmbx10 scaled\magstep4
\font\xbig=cmr10 scaled \magstep4
\font\xmed=cmr10 scaled\magstep3 
\font\med=cmbx10 scaled\magstep3
\font\jourfont=cmbx10 scaled \magstep5
\else
%% ps fonts:
\font\big=\timesbolditalic at 30pt
\font\semibig=\timesbolditalic at 20pt
\font\xbig=\timesroman at 24pt%24pt
\font\xmed=\timesroman at 19pt%20pt
\font\med=\timesbold at 18pt
\font\jourfont=\timesbold at 30pt
\fi
\parindent=0pt
\vbox to\vsize{\hyphenpenalty10000
\overfullrule=0pt
\vglue.5in
\hbox to\hsize
{\xbig K \xmed L U W E R\hfill \xbig A \xmed C A D E M I C\hfill%
\xbig P \xmed U B L I S H E R S}
\vskip6pt
\hrule  height.05in
\vskip6pt
\vskip1.3in{
\big Author's Guide to 
\vskip16pt
\hbox{Typesetting Kluwer Books}
\vskip12pt
with
L\hskip-8pt\raise 4pt\hbox{\semibig A}\hskip-3pt\TeX 
\vskip16pt

\vfill}

\hbox to\hsize{\hss\vtop{\hsize=.8\hsize
\baselineskip=36pt
%\makecenterlines
\centering\jourfont
{\currstyle}}\hss}
\vfill
\vskip1in
\hrule height .04in width 2.5in%3in
\vskip3pt
\vskip3pt
\med Amy Hendrickson
\vskip3pt
\TeX nology Inc.
\vskip3pt
\vskip3pt
\vskip3pt
\vskip3pt
\hrule height .05in 
}
\thispagestyle{empty}
\newpage
\fi

\thispagestyle{empty}


%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

\vfill
\newpage
\noindent\hskip-24pt{\sectionfont CONTENTS}
\begin{itemize}
\contentsline {section}{\numberline {x}The Files in the Kapproc Macro Set}{2}
\contentsline {section}{\numberline {x}The Sample Files}{3}
\contentsline {section}{\numberline {x}The Template File}{3}
\contentsline {section}{\numberline {x}Starting your book}{3}
\contentsline {section}{\numberline {x}Computer Modern vs. PostScript}{3}
\contentsline {section}{\numberline {x}Customizing Your Book Format}{5}
\contentsline {section}{\numberline {x}Front Matter}{7}
\contentsline {section}{\numberline {x}Part and Part with Text}{10}
\contentsline {section}{\numberline {x}Controlling what is sent to the TOC}{11}
\contentsline {section}{\numberline {x}Controlling Running Heads}{11}
\contentsline {section}{\numberline {x}Starting Your Article}{13}
\contentsline {section}{\numberline {x}Lettered Equations}{23}
\contentsline {section}{\numberline {x}All the Things that can be Done with Captions}{24}
\contentsline {section}{\numberline {x}Illustrations, using graphicx.sty to insert .eps files}{27}
\contentsline {section}{\numberline {x}Using graphicx.sty for landscape tables and figures}{29}
\contentsline {section}{\numberline {x}Making Tables}{33}
\contentsline {section}{\numberline {x}To Illustrate an Algorithm}{35}
\contentsline {section}{\numberline {x}End of Article}{36}
\contentsline {section}{\numberline {x}Glossary}{37}
\contentsline {section}{\numberline {x}Appendices}{38}
\contentsline {section}{\numberline {x}End Notes and Footnotes}{39}
\contentsline {section}{\numberline {x}References}{41}
\contentsline {section}{\numberline {x}Using the Kluwerbib or Normallatexbib Bibliography Option}{42}
\contentsline {section}{\numberline {x}Using BibTeX for your Chapter References}{47}
\contentsline {section}{\numberline {x}Commands for the end of the Book: End Matter}{49}
\contentsline {section}{\numberline {x}Making Your Index}{56}
\contentsline {section}{\numberline {x}Kluwer Indexing Method}{57}
\contentsline {section}{\numberline {x}Author and Topic Indices}{69}
\contentsline {section}{\numberline {x}Using the Kluwer Proceedings Style with Scientific Word/Workplace}{70}
\contentsline {section}{\numberline {x}Final Book Production: Table of Contents}{74}
\contentsline {section}{\numberline {x}Advice to Book Editor}{74}
\contentsline {section}{\numberline {x}Enjoy!}{74}
\end{itemize}

\thispagestyle{empty}
\newpage
\setcounter{page}{1}
\chapter{\huge\bf Using the Kluwer\\ Proceedings Style File}

\vglue-32pt
Welcome to the use of the Kluwer style file for 
preparing Proceedings! 

You will find that most of the
commands found in the \LaTeX\ book will work exactly the same when
you use this style file. The new commands specifically for
this book style
will be explained here, with examples of
code and the typeset results. 
To help make formatting your book with the Kluwer style an easy process,
you will also be supplied with sample text, procsamp.tex, and
a template file, proctmpl.tex. There is also a sample of one
chapter, procchap.tex.

\vskip-36pt
\vskip1sp
\subsection{Current Version}
Please make sure that you have the current version of the macro files
and the documentation. If you are in doubt, please download a
new copy of the files from\\
{\tt http://www.wkap.nl/authors/bookstylefiles/latexstyles}.

You may also find the guidelines.pdf file useful. It is found at\\
{\tt http://www.wkap.nl/authors/bookstylefiles}.

     Beware using a set of
     style files or documentation that you have downloaded from any
     site other than the official Kluwer site listed here, because
     they may very well not be current.

\subsection{Getting Help}
If you find that you are having a problem {\bf after you have read
this documentation carefully}, help may be had by sending email
to {\tt dthelp@wkap.com}. If possible, please send a
small file demonstrating the problem.

     Authors preparing their book with the Kluwer \LaTeX\ style are asked to 
     produce copy identical to the final layout.  However, if an author has 
     trouble with the figure/table placement, please inform Kluwer of these 
     problems at time of submission.  Authors should indicate where the 
     figures/tables should be set in the paper and Kluwer will prepare the 
     final layout.  Make sure to included separate original figures/tables 
     with your article as well as PostScript files of the figures.

\subsection{\LaTeX2.09 and \LaTeX2e}
Most people who use LaTeX have moved to the newer version,
called for some time \LaTeX2e, now simply called \LaTeX.
If you are one of the few people still using \LaTeX2.09,
you can use the kapproc macro set. Just rename
kapekbk.cls to kapproc.sty and type

\verb+\documentstyle{kapproc}+

\subsection{Author written macros}
One of the great pleasures of \LaTeX\ is the ability to add
your own macros to simplify your work or to produce effects
that are not otherwise readily available. 

You are welcome to write you own macros, but we suggest that
you keep the macros in your main file so that they
don't become separated from your text.

\subsection{Added macro packages}
Authors are discouraged from using additional macro packages
when using the kapproc macros. Kluwer cannot offer technical
support for any package conflicts that may arise from the
combination of several packages. 
\eject


\subsection{Inserting .eps files when using \LaTeX}
An exception to the suggestion that you don't use additional
macro packages is the style used to add .eps files.
The standard macro package is graphicx, used as
\verb+\usepackage{graphicx}+. There will be examples of
using the \verb+\includegraphics[]{}+ commands on page  \pageref{inserteps}.
The following section, on page \pageref{landscape}, shows 
how to use the graphicx command \verb+\rotatebox{}+ to
rotate figures and tables to set them in landscape.

\section{The Files in the Kapproc Macro Set}
\vskip12pt
\hrule
\begin{verbatim}
kapproc.cls/sty   The main macro file

procdocs.tex, .ps, .pdf Documentation in .tex, .ps, .pdf form

proctmpl.tex     Template File

procps.sty       PostScript font calls
m-times.sty      MathTimes font calls

procchap.tex     Sample File of one Article for Authors
procchap.ps      Sample chapter file in .ps form
procchap.pdf     Sample chapter file in .pdf form
chapbib.bbl      Sample chapter bibliography file

procsamp.tex     Sample File of Complete Book
procsamp.bbl     Sample bibliography file  
procsamp.srt     Sample sorted index file
procsamp.ps, pdf Sample file in .ps, .pdf form

Files necessary if you are using Scientific Word/Workplace
----------------------------------------------------------
kapproc.swp     Text file describing how to use kapproc.cls with SWP

procbook.shl    Shell files used by SWP
procdocs.shl
procsamp.shl

procsamp.sav    SWP version of procsamp.tex, sample file
procdocs.sav    SWP version of procdocs.tex, documentation

Inserting .eps files
--------------------
graphics.zip  Graphics files, including graphicx.sty, used for
                inserting .eps files.

figsamp.eps   Sample .eps file

Kluwer BibTeX style file
------------------------
kapalike.bst    
\end{verbatim}
\hrule
\vskip-24pt
\vskip1sp
\global\doctitlefalse
\newpage
\section{The Sample Files}
{\tt procsamp.tex} is a sample file which shows examples of the commands
that may be used in your book. You may run \LaTeX\ on this
file to compare the results with the mark-up code within the
file. This alone should indicate how to format your book
in most cases.
There is also a sample chapter, procchap.tex.


\section{The Template File}
A template file, {\tt proctmpl.tex} is provided to make it
easier to enter the the commands in the correct order.
It should be self-explanatory, and contains many examples of
commands you might like to use.


To use the template file you should:
\begin{itemize}
\item
Copy {\tt proctmpl.tex} to {\tt<yourfile>.tex}.

\item
Enter your text.
\end{itemize}


\section{Starting your book}
Your book will start with
\begin{verbatim}
\documentclass{kapproc}
\end{verbatim}
or,
\begin{verbatim}
\documentstyle{kapproc}
\end{verbatim}
\vskip-36pt

\vskip1sp
\section{Computer Modern vs. PostScript}
The default font set when using \LaTeX\ is Computer Modern.
Authors can choose to use either Computer Modern or PostScript fonts,
but the results will be much more handsome with PostScript fonts,
and authors are {\bf strongly} encouraged to use PostScript for the
final version of their book.

\noindent
{\bf To use Computer Modern fonts:}

\vskip-4pt
\vskip1sp
\begin{verbatim}
\documentclass{kapproc} %% (LaTeX)
\documentstyle{kapproc} %% (LaTeX2.09)
\end{verbatim}
\vskip-6pt
\vskip1sp

{\bf To use the PostScript and/or MathTimes font files:}

{\it When using the current version of \LaTeX:}
\vskip-12pt
\vskip1sp
\begin{verbatim}
\documentclass{kapproc}
\usepackage{m-times} %% for MathTimes math fonts, if you have these fonts
\usepackage{procps} %% for PostScript text fonts
\end{verbatim}

{\it When using \LaTeX2.09:}
\vskip-12pt
\vskip1sp
\begin{verbatim}
\documentstyle[procps]{kapproc} % For PostScript text, Computer Modern Math:
\end{verbatim}
\newpage
\subsection{Renaming PostScript font definitions}
Since the PostScript fonts have different names on different
systems, you may need to redefine the font names at the top of the
{\tt procps.sty} file. (The default names are 
the names invented by Karl Berry, used by the dvips driver program.)
If you do not already know the names of the Times and Helvetica fonts
on your system, you will have to find the directory
where your .tfm fonts are stored to try figure out their names, 
or consult your driver documentation
to find the correct names. 

The changes should be confined to the top
part of the file. Those changes will be used in the file below to
customize your .sty file. Change this part of the file:
\vskip6pt
\hrule
\begin{verbatim}
%%  Change these definitions, if necessary ====>

%% Times-Roman
% Berry names
\def\timesroman{ptmr}
\def\timesbold{ptmb}
\def\timesitalic{ptmri}
\def\timesbolditalic{ptmbi}

%% Dvipsone names
% \def\timesroman{tir}
% \def\timesbold{tib}
...
\end{verbatim}
\hrule


If you use MathTimes fonts, you may also have to change these names
in the beginning of the m-times.sty file:
\vskip6pt
\hrule
\begin{verbatim}
%% Times-Roman
\def\TimesRoman{ptmr}

%% Helvetica
%\def\Helvetica{phvr}

%% Courier
%\def\Courier{pcrr}

%% Please do not make any changes below this point!
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\end{verbatim}
\hrule
\newpage
\section{Customizing Your Book Format}

Between the \verb+\documentclass{}+ and \verb+\begin{document}+
commands you have a number of possibilities that may be 
used to customize the format of your book. (You will see
these commands in both the procsamp.tex and proctmpl.tex
files.) Consult your editor to see if any of these changes
are acceptable, since you will want to match the other chapters
in the book.

\begin{description}
\item[Running heads:]
\smallskip
\item[{\tt
\string\chapsectrunningheads}]will make chapter title on left hand page
  and section title on right hand page

\bigskip
\item[Section heads:]
\smallskip
\item[{\tt
\string\chaptersection}] will use chapter.section form for section heads.
\bigskip
\item[{\tt
\string\upperandlowercase}]Uncomment to make section heads appear in
                    both upper and lower case.
\bigskip
\item[{\tt
\string\useuppercase}]Uncomment to make section and subsection heads 
                 appear in uppercase.

\bigskip

\item[{\tt
\string\setcounter\string{secnumdepth\string}\string{1\string}}]
How many levels of section head would you like numbered?
 
0= no section numbers, 1= section, 2= subsection, 3= subsubsection


\bigskip
\item[Table of Contents:]
\smallskip
\item[{\tt
\string\setcounter\string{tocdepth\string}\string{1\string}}]
how many levels of section head would you like to appear in the
Table of Contents?

 0= chapter titles, 1= section titles, 2= subsection titles, 
 3= subsubsection titles.
\bigskip

\item[Equation numbering:]
\smallskip
\item[{\tt
\string\nochapequationnumber}] 
which will result in equation numbers that are (1)
\bigskip
\item[{\tt
\string\sectionequationnumber}] 
which will result in equation numbers that are (1.1)
   and renumber for each section


Default for kapmono and kapedbk is (chapternumber.equationnumber)

Default for kapproc is (equation number)
\bigskip
\item[Theorem numbering:]
\smallskip
\item[{\tt
\string\nochaptheoremnumber}] will make the theorem type environments number
only with the theorem number. Default is chapter.theorem for 
kapmono and kapedbk. Default is only theorem number for kapproc.

\bigskip

\item[Footnotes/Endnotes:]

\smallskip
\item[]
Default is endnotes that appear at the end of the chapter, above
the references, or whereever {\tt\string\notes} is written.
To change footnotes to appear at bottom of page:

\bigskip

\item[{\tt
\string\let\string\footnote\string\savefootnote}] 
Uncomment to make footnote appear at bottom of page.
\bigskip

\item[{\tt
\string\let\string\footnotetext\string\savefootnotetext}] 
Uncomment if you want footnotetext to appear at the bottom of the page.

\bigskip
\item[{\tt
\string\let\string\footnoterule\string\savefootnoterule}]
Uncomment if you want a ruled line above the footnote.
\bigskip
\item[(More on next page)]
\bigskip
\newpage
\bigskip
\item[Bibliography Style Settings:]
\item[]
Choose either kluwerbib or normallatexbib
\bigskip
\item[{\tt\string\kluwerbib}]will produce this kind of bibliography entry:

\begin{verbatim}
  Anderson, Terry L.,...
    continuing bib entry here
\end{verbatim}

{\tt\string\cite\string{xxx\string}} will print without brackets around 
the citation.

({\tt\string\bibliographystyle{kapalike}} should be used when
you use \verb+\kluwerbib+.)
\bigskip
\item[{\tt\string\normallatexbib}]
will produce bibliography entries as shown in the
LaTeX book

\begin{verbatim}
 [1] Anderson, Terry L.,
     continuing bib entry
\end{verbatim}

{\tt\string\cite\string{xxx\string}} will print with square brackets around 
the citation, i.e., [1].

 Any \verb+\bibliographystyle{}+ may be used with \verb+\normallatexbib+, but
 you should check with your editor to find the style preferred for
 your book.

\bigskip
\item[Change Brackets around Citation:]
\item[\sqbullet] Default with \verb+\kluwerbib+ is no brackets around citation. 
 \item[\sqbullet] Default with \verb+\normallatexbib+ is square brackets 
around citation. 

If you want parens around citation, i.e., (citation), type in these
lines, or uncomment them if you are using the template file.

\begin{verbatim}
\let\lcitebracket(
\let\rcitebracket)
\end{verbatim}

\item[{\bf Draft Line:}]
\smallskip
\item[{\tt\string\draft}]
You may use the command \verb+\draft+ immediately after the 
\verb+\documentclass+ command. This will cause a line to
appear at the bottom of each page containing the words `Draft'
with the page number, current date and time that the file was \LaTeX ed.
\end{description}

\newpage
\subsection{Ordering the Various Parts of the Book}

The various parts of the book should be entered in this order.

\vskip12pt
\hrule
\begin{verbatim}
Half title page
Blank
Full Title page
Blank
Dedication 
Blank
Contents
List of Figures
List of Tables
List of Contributors
Foreword
Preface
Acknowledgements

\part{} or \partwithtext{}{}
Introduction
\chapter{}
...

Glossary
Appendices
Bibliography
Index
\end{verbatim}
\hrule
\vskip-12pt


\section{Front Matter}
\subsection{Dedication}
If you want to make a dedication, it should be
made before the table of contents.

\code
\begin{verbatim}
\dedication{This book is dedicated to the development
of greater understanding between our peoples, and to
the opportunity to diminish trade conflicts in the future.}
\end{verbatim}
\hrule
\endcode

\vskip-12pt
\vskip1sp
\subsection{Foreword}
The foreword comes after the table of contents, and
is formatted with\\ \verb+\begin{foreword}...\end{foreword}+.\\
At the end of the foreword, there is an optional command
that you can use to format the foreword author name:
\verb+\forewordauthor{}+.

\code
\begin{verbatim}
\begin{foreword}
In the first, 1987, edition of this book, Dr.~Higashi and Dr.~Lauter
have discussed and analyzed the initial stages of the 
internationalization process...
\forewordauthor{Michio Watanabe, Chairman\\
LDP Policy Affairs Research Council 1988--1989\\
Tokyo, May 1989\\
\\
Minister of International Trade and\\
Industry, December 1985--July 1986}
\end{foreword}
\end{verbatim}
\vskip-12pt
\endcode
\results
\vskip24pt
\begin{foreword}
In the first, 1987, edition of this book, Dr.~Higashi and Dr.~Lauter
have discussed and analyzed the initial stages of the internationalization
process...
\forewordauthor{Michio Watanabe, Chairman\\
LDP Policy Affairs Research Council 1988--1989\\
Tokyo, May 1989\\
\\
Minister of International Trade and\\
Industry, December 1985--July 1986}
\end{foreword}
\endresults



\subsection{Preface}
Preface is next. If you have
sections in the preface, you should use the star form of
section command: \verb+\section*{Preface Section}+.
You can also use the \verb+\prefaceauthor{}+
command to format the preface author name. 

\code
\begin{verbatim}
\begin{preface}
This is an example preface. This is an example preface.
This is an example preface. This is an example preface.
\section*{This is a preface section}
This is an example of a preface.
This is an example preface. This is an example preface.
This is an example preface. This is an example preface.
\prefaceauthor{David Reisman}
\end{preface}
\end{verbatim}
\endcode
\results
\let\chapter\savechapter
\begin{preface}
This is an example preface. This is an example preface.
This is an example preface. This is an example preface.
\savesection*{This is a preface section}
This is an example of a preface.
This is an example preface. This is an example preface.
This is an example preface. This is an example preface.
\prefaceauthor{David Reisman}
\vskip6pt
\hrule 
\let\newpage\relax
\end{preface}
\egroup\egroup


\subsection{Acknowledgments}
To make an acknowledgment, singular, use
{\tt\string\begin\string{acknowledgment\string}}, for acknowledgements, use:

\code
\begin{verbatim}
\begin{acknowledgments}
Much of the information and insight presented in this book
was obtained through personal interviews particularly with
Japanese and, to a lesser extent, American government officials
and business executives in Tokyo and Washington, D.C. While
they are too numerous to mention individually, their willingness
to take time out of their busy schedules is very much appreciated.
\end{acknowledgments}
\end{verbatim}
\endcode
\results
\begin{acknowledgments}
Much of the information and insight presented in this book
was obtained through personal interviews particularly with
Japanese and, to a lesser extent, American government officials
and business executives in Tokyo and Washington, D.C. While
they are too numerous to mention individually, their willingness
to take time out of their busy schedules is very much appreciated.
\end{acknowledgments}
\endresults
\newpage

\section{Part and Part with Text}
As well as the normal \LaTeX\ \verb+\part{<part title>}+ command, we now also
have a new command:\\ \verb+\partwithtitle{<part title>}{<text>}+

If the square bracket argument is used, it will send the text
to the TOC.

\code
\begin{verbatim}
\partwithtext[Introduction to Book]{Introduction}
{Test resource partitioning (TRP)
for system-on-a-chip (SOC) refers to the process of partioning monolithic
test resources, such as the test data set or the top-level TAM into
sub-components that can be optimized to achieve significant gains in test
resource utilization.}
\end{verbatim}
\endcode
\results
\let\newpage\relax\let\clearpage\relax
\partwithtext[Introduction to Book]{Introduction}
{Test resource partitioning (TRP)
for system-on-a-chip (SOC) refers to the process of partioning monolithic
test resources, such as the test data set or the top-level TAM into
sub-components that can be optimized to achieve significant gains in test
resource utilization.}
\endresults
\newpage

\section{Controlling what is sent to the TOC}
There are a number of commands the use optional square bracket to
enable you to enter commands to be printed on the page in one 
form, and to be sent to the Table of Contents and Running head
in another form. These include
\vskip-6pt
\vskip1sp
\begin{verbatim}
\booktitle[]{}, \part[]{}, \partwithtitle[]{}{}, 
\chapter[]{}, \section[]{}, \subsection[]{}, \appendix[]{}.
\end{verbatim}
You can use
\verb+\\ + to break lines in any of these commands within the
curly brackets, and without \verb+\\+ within square brackets.
This means that you can break lines easily in the body of the
title without causing confusion in the Table of Contents.

You do not need to use the square bracket at any time except when
you want to provide two different forms of the title.
\vskip6pt
{\baselineskip=9pt
\hrule
\vskip-6pt
\vskip1sp
\begin{verbatim}
\booktitle[<optional shorter version without \\ to appear in running heads>]
{<title>}% may use \\ to start new lines

\part[<optional short version for TOC>]{<part title>} % or ==>
\partwithtext[<optional short version for TOC>]{<part title>}{<part text>}

\chapter[<optional short version for running head and TOC>]
               {<chapter title as appears on page>}%

\section[<optional short version for TOC>]{<section title>}
\end{verbatim}}
\hrule
\vskip-24pt
\vskip1sp
\section{Controlling Running Heads}
You may want to print one version of a chapter or section
head and send another version to the TOC. You may want
to send a third version to print in the running head.
In addition,
it is not unusual to have a section or chapter title that
is too long to fit into the running head. 
In any case we can use one of the following
commands which will only control the running heads, not
effect the chapter or section title, or the TOC entry.

To determine the book title running head, type\\
\hrule
\verb+\booktitlerunninghead{<Book Title for Running Head>}+
\vskip3pt
\hrule
\vskip6pt
To send a variation on the article title you can use\\
\verb+\chaptitlerunninghead{<Article Title for Running Head>}+
after the article title:
\vskip6pt
\hrule
\begin{verbatim}
\articletitle{Here is an Article Title}
\chaptitlerunninghead{<Article Title for Running Head>}
\end{verbatim}
\hrule
\vskip6pt

If you are using the \verb+\chapsectrunningheads+ option you
can use the usual LaTeX commands:\\ \verb+\markboth{}{}+ or
\verb+\markright{}+.\\
(\verb+\chapsectrunningheads+ will make chapter title on left hand page
  and section title on right hand page)
\vskip6pt
\hrule
\begin{verbatim}
\articletitle{Article Title}
\markboth{<Short version of Article Title for Left Running Head>}
{<Short version of Article Title for Right Running Head>}

\section{Section Head}
\markright{<Short version of Section Title for Running Head>}
\end{verbatim}
\hrule
\eject

\subsection{Introduction}
If you use an introduction, it should come after the optional
part page and should be numbered with arabic rather than roman
numbers.
\code
\begin{verbatim}
\introduction{David Reisman}
For many, the distinction is clear. Economics is about the market,
about individuals maximizing utility and firms maximizing profit.  
Politics is about the state, about constitutional rules and piecemeal 
interventions. The two realms are separate and distinct...
\end{verbatim}
\endcode
\results
\makeatletter
\let\@makeschapterhead\save@makeschapterhead
\makeatother
\vskip2pc
\introduction{David Reisman}
For many, the distinction is clear. Economics is about the market,
about individuals maximizing utility and firms maximizing profit.  
Politics is about the state, about constitutional rules and piecemeal 
interventions. The two realms are separate and distinct...
\endresults
\newpage

\section{Starting Your Article}
We will look at some commands you can use, and then show
a sample article title page;

\begin{verbatim}
\articletitle[]{}
\author{}
\prologue{}{}% optional prologue
\end{verbatim}
\vskip-36pt
\vskip1sp
\subsection{Using Optional square brackets}
\verb+\title[]{}+, \verb+\part[]{}+, 
\verb+\section[]{}+ and \verb+\subsection[]{}+ 
all allow you to enter the title in square brackets in the
way you'd like it to appear in the Table of Contents, and in
curly brackets in the way that you want the title to appear on
the page in the body of the article. You can use
\verb+\\ + to break lines in any of these commands within the
curley brackets, and without \verb+\\+ within square brackets.
This means that you can break lines easily in the body of the
article without causing confusion in the Table of Contents.

If you are not using \verb+\\+ you do not need to supply a title
within square brackets.


\subsection{Author Name}
For author, write \verb+\author{<Author Name>}+.

You may also supply names of multiple authors:
\begin{verbatim}
\author{Author Name}

\author{Second Author}
\end{verbatim}

\newpage
\subsection{Sample Title Block}
\code
\begin{verbatim}
\articletitle[Communism, Sparta, and Plato]<<== goes to TOC and Running Head
{COMMUNISM, SPARTA,\\ and PLATO\thanks{The thanks command will work
in the articletitle}%
}<<== prints on current page

% <<== Important:
% If you want to enter a shortened version of the chapter title
% in the running head, but not change the chapter title in
% the table of contents, use:
% \chaptitlerunninghead{short title}


\author{Samuel Bostaph}
\author{Gregor Kariotis}

%% Optional prologue command:
\prologue{The organization of our forces is a thing calling in its
nature for much advice and the framing of many rules, but the principal
[first] is this---that no man, and no woman, be ever suffered
to live without an officer set over them, and no soul of man
to learn the trick of doing one single thing of its own sole
motion,
in play or in earnest, but in peace as in war...\footnote{This
prologue represents thought developed and written more than two
thousand years ago. That is quite a few years!}}
{Plato, {\it Laws}, 942a--c}
\end{verbatim}
\endcode
\newpage
\results
\vskip-4pc
\vskip1sp
\articletitle[Communism, Sparta, and Plato]
{COMMUNISM, SPARTA,\\ and PLATO\thanks{The thanks command will work
in the articletitle}%
}

%% optional, to supply a shorter version of the title for the running head:
%%\chaptitlerunninghead{}

\author{Samuel Bostaph}
\author{Gregor Kariotis}

\prologue{The organization of our forces is a thing calling in its
nature for much advice and the framing of many rules, but the principal
[first] is this---that no man, and no woman, be ever suffered
to live without an officer set over them, and no soul of man
to learn the trick of doing one single thing of its own sole
motion, in play or in earnest, but in peace as in war...\footnote{This
prologue represents thought developed and written more than two
thousand years ago. That is quite a few years!}}
{Plato, {\it Laws}, 942a--c}

\notes
\endresults
\newpage
\subsection{Sample Title with Multiple Authors and Affiliations}
There are several ways to handle the formatting of
a title page with multiple authors and affiliations.

The first is to list each author separately, followed by his/her
affiliation.

You can also list the authors together, and give each
author an affiliation number or numbers, and follow
with separate numbered affiliations. 

You will see examples of each of these methods on
the following pages:


\code
\begin{verbatim}
\articletitle[Audio Quality Determination]
{Audio Quality Determination\\
Based on Perceptual \\
Measurement Techniques
}

\author{John G. Beerends}
\affil{Royal PTT Netherlands N.V.\\
KRN Research, P. Box 421, AK Leidenham\\
The Netherlands}
\email{beerends@ptt.com.nl}

\author{James Joyce}
\affil{Trinity University\\
Dublin, Ireland}
\email{jjoyce@dublin.ir}

\author{Arthur Miller}
\affil{Syracuse University,\\
Syracuse, NY}
\email{arthurm@math.syracuse.edu}

%% optional, to supply a shorter version of the title for the running head:
%%\rhead{}

\begin{abstract}
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract....
\end{abstract}

\begin{keywords}
Sample keywords, sample keywords.
\end{keywords}

\end{verbatim}
\endcode
\newpage
\results
\articletitle[Audio Quality Determination]
{Audio Quality Determination\\
Based on Perceptual \\
Measurement Techniques
}

\author{John G. Beerends}
\affil{Royal PTT Netherlands N.V.\\
KRN Research, P. Box 421, AK Leidenham\\
The Netherlands}
\email{beerends@ptt.com.nl}

\author{James Joyce}
\affil{Trinity University\\
Dublin, Ireland}
\email{jjoyce@dublin.ir}

\author{Arthur Miller}
\affil{Syracuse University,\\
Syracuse, NY}
\email{arthurm@math.syracuse.edu}


%% optional, to supply a shorter version of the title for the running head:
%%\rhead{}

\begin{abstract}
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract....
\end{abstract}

\begin{keywords}
Sample keywords, sample keywords.
\end{keywords}

\endresults

\newpage
\subsection{Using Affiliation Numbers with Authors}
Here is a method of using affiliation numbers
to let the reader know which authors have which
affiliations. We have two new commands: \verb+\altaffilmark{}+
to be used in the \verb+\author{}+ environment; and 
\verb+\altaffiltext{}{}+ where the first argument is
used for the affiliation number and the second for
the affiliation. 

This allows you to list several
affiliations for one author, and is less verbose
than listing each author and affiliation separately.

\code
\begin{verbatim}
\articletitle[Audio Quality Determination]
{Audio Quality Determination\\
Based on Perceptual \\
Measurement Techniques
}

\author{John G. Beerends,\altaffilmark{1} James Joyce,\altaffilmark{2}
and Arthur Miller\altaffilmark{1,3}}

\altaffiltext{1}{Royal PTT Netherlands N.V.\\
KRN Research, P. Box 421, AK Leidenham\\
The Netherlands}
\email{beerends@ptt.com.nl}

\altaffiltext{2}{Trinity University\\
Dublin, Ireland}
\email{jjoyce@dublin.ir}

\altaffiltext{3}{Syracuse University,\\
Syracuse, NY}
\email{arthurm@math.syracuse.edu}

\begin{abstract}
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract....
\end{abstract}

\begin{keywords}
Sample keywords, sample keywords.
\end{keywords}

\end{verbatim}%
\endcode
\newpage
\results
\articletitle[Audio Quality Determination]
{Audio Quality Determination\\
Based on Perceptual \\
Measurement Techniques
}

\author{John G. Beerends,\altaffilmark{1} James Joyce,\altaffilmark{2}
and Arthur Miller\altaffilmark{1,3}}

\altaffiltext{1}{Royal PTT Netherlands N.V.\\
KRN Research, P. Box 421, AK Leidenham\\
The Netherlands}
\email{beerends@ptt.com.nl}

\altaffiltext{2}{Trinity University\\
Dublin, Ireland}
\email{jjoyce@dublin.ir}

\altaffiltext{3}{Syracuse University,\\
Syracuse, NY}
\email{arthurm@math.syracuse.edu}

\begin{abstract}
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract....
\end{abstract}

\begin{keywords}
Sample keywords, sample keywords.
\end{keywords}

\endresults
\newpage
\subsection{Another Option for Affiliation Numbers}
Here is another method of using affiliation numbers,
using many numbers in one affiliation. This method 
might be preferable where there are more than three authors.

\code
\begin{verbatim}
...

\author{John G. Beerends,\altaffilmark{1} James Joyce,\altaffilmark{2}
and Arthur Miller\altaffilmark{1,3}}

\affil{\altaffilmark{1}Royal PTT Netherlands N.V., \ 
\altaffilmark{2}Trinity University, \ \altaffilmark{3}Syracuse
University}

\begin{abstract}
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract....
\end{abstract}

\begin{keywords}
Sample keywords, sample keywords.
\end{keywords}
\end{verbatim}
\endcode
\results
\vglue-36pt
\articletitle[Audio Quality Determination]
{Audio Quality Determination\\
Based on Perceptual \\
Measurement Techniques
}

\author{John G. Beerends,\altaffilmark{1} James Joyce,\altaffilmark{2}
and Arthur Miller\altaffilmark{1,3}}

\affil{\altaffilmark{1}Royal PTT Netherlands N.V., \ 
\altaffilmark{2}Trinity University, \ 
\altaffilmark{3}Syracuse University}

\begin{abstract}
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract....
\end{abstract}

\begin{keywords}
Sample keywords, sample keywords.
\end{keywords}

\endresults
\newpage
\subsection{Using thanks in title block}
You can offer additional information in the title block
with the use of the \verb+\thanks{}+ command:
\code
\begin{verbatim}
\articletitle[Audio Quality Determination]
{Audio Quality Determination\\
Based on Perceptual \\
Measurement Techniques\thanks{Thanks works in articletitle}
}

\author{John G. Beerends\thanks{Thanks works in author.}}
\affil{Royal PTT Netherlands N.V.\\
KRN Research, P. Box 421, AK Leidenham\\
The Netherlands\thanks{Thanks works in affil.}}
\email{beerends@ptt.com.nl\thanks{Thanks works in email.}}

\author{James Joyce}
\affil{Trinity University\\
Dublin, Ireland}
\email{jjoyce@dublin.ir}

\author{Arthur Miller}
\affil{Syracuse University,\\
Syracuse, NY}
\email{arthurm@math.syracuse.edu}

\begin{abstract}
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract....
\end{abstract}

\begin{keywords}
Sample keywords, sample keywords.
\end{keywords}
\end{verbatim}
\endcode
\newpage
\results
\articletitle[Audio Quality Determination]
{Audio Quality Determination\\
Based on Perceptual \\
Measurement Techniques\thanks{Thanks works in articletitle}
}

\author{John G. Beerends\thanks{Thanks works in author.}}
\affil{Royal PTT Netherlands N.V.\\
KRN Research, P. Box 421, AK Leidenham\\
The Netherlands\thanks{Thanks works in affil.}}
\email{beerends@ptt.com.nl\thanks{Thanks works in email.}}

\author{James Joyce}
\affil{Trinity University\\
Dublin, Ireland}
\email{jjoyce@dublin.ir}

\author{Arthur Miller}
\affil{Syracuse University,\\
Syracuse, NY}
\email{arthurm@math.syracuse.edu}

\begin{abstract}
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract....
\end{abstract}

\begin{keywords}
Sample keywords, sample keywords.
\end{keywords}

text...

\endresults
\newpage

\section{Lettered Equations}
Math in this style is handled the same as in any \LaTeX\ style,
with the exception that we have the added command for lettered
equations:

\code
\begin{verbatim}
Lettered equation,
\begin{equation}
g_i(y|f)=\sum_x P(x|F_n)f_i(y|x)\mathletter{a}
\end{equation}
Second lettered equation
\begin{equation}
g_i(y|f)=\sum_x P(x|F_n)f_i(y|x)\mathletter{b}
\end{equation}
Unlettered equation
\begin{equation}
g_i(y|f)=\sum_x P(x|F_n)f_i(y|x)
\end{equation}
Formally, this amounts to calculating:
\begin{eqnarray}
g_1(y|f)&=\sum_x P(x|F_n)f_1(y|x)\mathletter{a}\\
g_2(y|f)&=\sum_x P(x|F_n)f_2(y|x)\mathletter{b}\\
g_3(y|f)&=\sum_x P(x|F_n)f_3(y|x)\mathletter{c}
\end{eqnarray}
where $g_i(y|F_n)$ is the function specifying...
\end{verbatim}
\endcode
\results
Lettered equation,
\begin{equation}
g_i(y|f)=\sum_x P(x|F_n)f_i(y|x)\mathletter{a}
\end{equation}
Second lettered equation
\begin{equation}
g_i(y|f)=\sum_x P(x|F_n)f_i(y|x)\mathletter{b}
\end{equation}
Unlettered equation
\begin{equation}
g_i(y|f)=\sum_x P(x|F_n)f_i(y|x)
\end{equation}
Formally, this amounts to calculating:
\begin{eqnarray}
g_1(y|f)&=\sum_x P(x|F_n)f_1(y|x)\mathletter{a}\\
g_2(y|f)&=\sum_x P(x|F_n)f_2(y|x)\mathletter{b}\\
g_3(y|f)&=\sum_x P(x|F_n)f_3(y|x)\mathletter{c}
\end{eqnarray}
where $g_i(y|F_n)$ is the function specifying...
\endresults

\newpage

\section{All the Things that can be Done with Captions}
Captions made with this style are the same as normal \LaTeX\ captions:

\begin{verbatim}
\begin{figure}[h]
\vskip.2in
\caption{Short caption.}
\end{figure}
\end{verbatim}

Remember that if you use indexing commands within a caption to
preceed the command with {\tt\string\protect}:

\begin{verbatim}
\begin{figure}[h]
\vskip2pt
\caption{\protect\inx{Oscillograph} for memory address access 
operations, showing 500 ps
address access time and $\alpha\beta\Gamma\Delta\sum_{123}^{345}$
\protect\inx{superimposed signals}%
\protect\inxx{address,superimposed
signals} of address access in 1 kbit
memory plane.}
\end{figure}
\end{verbatim}

To make captions that print next to each other, you have the
command \verb+\sidebyside{}{}+ to use. Just put a caption into
each set of curly brackets and the captions will print next
to each other:

\code
\begin{verbatim}
\begin{figure}[ht]
\sidebyside{Space for figure...
\caption{This caption will go on the left side of
the page. It is the initial caption of two side-by-side captions.}}
{space for figure...
\caption{This caption will go on the right side of
the page. It is the second of two side-by-side captions.}}
\end{figure}
\end{verbatim}
\endcode
\results
\makeatletter
\def\@captype{figure}
\makeatother
\sidebyside{Space for figure...
\caption{This caption will go on the left side of
the page. It is the initial caption of two side-by-side captions.}}
{space for figure...
\caption{This caption will go on the right side of
the page. It is the second of two side-by-side captions.}}
\endresults

\newpage

In some cases you might want to use a continued caption, 
with the same figure number used as for last caption. The command
\verb+\contcaption+ is the command to use:

\code
\begin{verbatim}
\begin{figure}[h]
\contcaption{This is a continued caption.}
\end{figure}
\end{verbatim}
\endcode
\results
\begin{figure}[h]
\contcaption{This is a continued caption.}
\end{figure}
\endresults

If you want to make a narrow caption, here is the code:

\code
\begin{verbatim}
\begin{figure}[h]
\narrowcaption{This is a narrow caption so that it can
be at the side of the illustration. This is a narrow caption.
This is a narrow caption. This is a narrow caption.}
\end{figure}
\end{verbatim}
\endcode
\results
\begin{figure}[h]
\narrowcaption{This is a narrow caption so that it can
be at the side of the illustration. This is a narrow caption.
This is a narrow caption. This is a narrow caption.}
\end{figure}
\endresults
\newpage
Then, to make a narrow continued caption:

\code
\begin{verbatim}
\begin{figure}[h]
\narrowcontcaption{This is a narrow continued caption. This is a 
narrow continued caption. This is a narrow continued caption.}
\end{figure}
\end{verbatim}
\endcode
\results
\begin{figure}[h]
\vskip-24pt
\narrowcontcaption{This is a narrow continued caption. This is a 
narrow continued caption. This is a narrow continued caption.}
\end{figure}
\endresults

To make captions with letters, write:

\code
\begin{verbatim}
\begin{figure}[h]
\letteredcaption{a}{Lettered caption.}
\end{figure}

\begin{figure}[h]
\letteredcaption{b}{Lettered caption.}
\end{figure}
\end{verbatim}
\endcode
\results
\vskip-24pt
\begin{figure}[h]
\letteredcaption{a}{Lettered caption.}
\end{figure}
\vskip-24pt
\begin{figure}[h]
\letteredcaption{b}{Lettered caption.}
\end{figure}
\vskip-18pt
\endresults

Captions may be both lettered and print  side by side:

\code
\begin{verbatim}
\begin{figure}
\sidebyside
{\letteredcaption{b}{One caption.}}
{\letteredcaption{c}{Two captions.}}
\end{figure}
\end{verbatim}
\endcode
\results
\vskip-6pt
\makeatletter
\def\@captype{figure}
\makeatother
\sidebyside
{\letteredcaption{b}{One caption.}}
{\letteredcaption{c}{Two captions.}}
\vskip6pt
\endresults
\newpage

\section{Illustrations, using graphicx.sty to insert .eps files}
If you want to include
.eps illustrations, or turn figures or tables on their side,
you should use graphicx.sty, which has
become the standard way to do this, and which is quite
reliable.

Graphicx.sty is part of the general LaTeX distribution so
you should already have it on your system.
If you don't already have graphicx.sty, you can download the
graphics.zip file from the CTAN web site. 
Go to {\tt http://www.ctan.org} and search for graphics.zip, 
then click on the filename, which will download the file to
your machine.

({\tt www.ctan.org} is the repository for all the publicly available
TeX and LaTeX files. It is a resource you might like to explore
for other files as well.
Another web address you might find useful is {\tt http://www.tug.org},
the site for the TeX Users Group.
)


You should tune the graphicx package by selecting the
driver program that is on your system and using that
name as the optional argument.

\vskip8pt
\hrule
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage[<your driver program>]{graphicx} 

%for instance:

\usepackage[dvipsone]{graphicx} 
\end{verbatim}
\hrule
\vskip8pt

Please choose
the name that matches your program. If you don't see the
name listed here, try dvips.
\vskip-8pt\vskip1sp
\begin{verbatim}
 [dvips], [xdvi], [dvipdf], [dvipsone], [dviwindo], [emtex], [dviwin],
 [pctexps],  [pctexwin],  [pctexhp],  [pctex32], [truetex], [tcidvi],
 [oztex], [textures]
\end{verbatim}
\subsection{LaTeX2.09 Users:}
Since graphicx.sty is made to work with the current version
of LaTeX, you may have problems getting it to work with
LaTeX 2.09. You can try

\noindent\verb+\documentstyle[graphicx]{kapmono}+ but no guarantees
that it will work right for you.

You might use another style file for inserting .eps files, 
for instance, epsf.sty:
\begin{verbatim}
\documentstyle[epsf]{kapmono}
\end{verbatim}
\label{inserteps}
\newpage
\subsection{Using {\tt\string\includegraphics[]\string{\string}}}
The basic command you use to include your .eps files is
\verb+\includegraphics+. The command takes the name of
the .eps file as its argument, and allows optional square
brackets to set the width or height of the illustration.

Here are some ways you can use the \verb+\includegraphics+ command:

\begin{verbatim}
\includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{figsamp.eps}
\includegraphics[height=1in]{figsamp.eps}
\end{verbatim}

If you make the illustration be less than the width of
the page (\verb+\textwidth+) you will probably want to
center the illustration:

\code
\begin{verbatim}
\begin{figure}
\centerline{\includegraphics[width=2in]{figsamp}}
\caption{Here is the caption}
\end{figure}
\end{verbatim}
\endcode
\results
\begin{figure}[h]
\centerline{\includegraphics[width=2in]{figsamp}}
\caption{Here is the caption}
\end{figure}
\endresults


 For more information on options when using the graphicx.sty command,
\verb+\includegraphics+, please see \verb+grfguide.dvi+, which is included
 in the graphics.zip package.
\newpage

\section{Using graphicx.sty for landscape tables and figures}
\label{landscape}
If you want your figure or table to print in landscape, you
will also want them to print on their own page. This means
you should use the \verb+\begin{figure}[p]+ or 
\verb+\begin{table}[p]+.

The \verb+\rotatebox+ takes one argument which determines the
number of degrees that the box should be rotated; and the
second argument that includes a box.

To make the figure fall in the right position we use a box
whose height is the width of the page, or \verb+\textwidth+,
which we set with \verb+\vbox to \textwidth+.

The width should be the height of the page, which we set with
the command \verb+\hsize=\textheight+ within the box.

The \verb+\vfill+ command will push the contents of the box
to the bottom, which is positioned in this case on the
right side of the page.

Here is the code to make a figure print in landscape:
\code
\begin{verbatim}
\begin{figure}[p]
\rotatebox{90}{\vbox to\textwidth{
\vfill
\hsize=\textheight

\includegraphics{}
\caption{}

}}
\end{figure}
\end{verbatim}
\hrule
\endcode

Here is an actual figure to be printed in landscape:
\code
\begin{verbatim}
\begin{figure}[p]
\rotatebox{90}{\vbox to\textwidth{
\vfill
\hsize=\textheight

\centerline{\includegraphics[width=\textheight]{figsamp.eps}}

\caption[Self-Organizing Maps and Cluster Analysis]{Self-Organizing Maps and
Cluster Analysis.  Clustering of tumor gene expression data and
identification of tumor-specific molecular markers. Hierarchical clutering
(1) and a 5x5 self organizng map (b) were used to cluster 144 tumors spanning
14 tumor classes according to their gene expression patterns (c) gene
expression values for class-specific OVA markers.}}}
\end{figure}
\end{verbatim}
\hrule
\endcode

You can see how this looks on the next page.


\begin{figure}[p]
\rotatebox{90}{\vbox to\textwidth{\vfill
\hsize=\textheight
\centerline{\includegraphics[width=\textheight]{figsamp.eps}}
\caption[Self-Organizing Maps and Cluster Analysis]{
Self-Organizing Maps and Cluster Analysis.
Clustering of tumor gene expression data and identification of tumor-specific
molecular markers. Hierarchical clutering (1) and a 5x5 self organizng map (b) 
were used to cluster 144 tumors spanning 14 tumor classes according to their gene
expression patterns (c) gene expression values for class-specific OVA
markers.}}}
\end{figure}
\clearpage

\subsection{Landscape Table}
You make a table print in landscape very much as you do
for figures:

\code
\begin{verbatim}
\begin{table}[p]
\rotatebox{90}{\vbox to\textwidth{
\hsize=\textheight

\caption{}
\begin{tabular}...\end{tabular}

}}
\end{table}
\end{verbatim}
\hrule
\endcode

Here is an example landscape table:

\code
\begin{verbatim}
\begin{table}[p]
\rotatebox{90}{\vbox to\textwidth{
\hsize=\textheight
\caption{Here is a sample landscape table caption}
\def\ph{\phantom{age }}
\def\pph{\phantom{th}}
\begin{tabular*}{.9\textheight}{@{\extracolsep\fill}lccrrrcrrr}
&&\multicolumn{4}{c}{\bf Panel A}&\multicolumn{4}{c}{\bf Panel B}\cr
&&\multicolumn{4}{c}{\bf Regression A}&\multicolumn{4}{c}{\bf Regression B}\cr
\cline{3-6}\cline{7-10}\cr
...
\end{tabular*}
}}
\end{table}
\end{verbatim}
\hrule
\endcode

You'll see this table on the next page.

\begin{table}[p]
\rotatebox{90}{\vbox to\textwidth{
\hsize=\textheight
\caption{Here is a sample landscape table caption}
\def\ph{\phantom{age }}
\def\pph{\phantom{th}}
\begin{tabular*}{.9\textheight}{@{\extracolsep\fill}lccrrrcrrr}
&&\multicolumn{4}{c}{\bf Panel A}&\multicolumn{4}{c}{\bf Panel B}\cr
&&\multicolumn{4}{c}{\bf Regression A}&\multicolumn{4}{c}{\bf Regression B}\cr
\cline{3-6}\cline{7-10}\cr
%&&\multicolumn{4}{c}{\hrulefill}&\multicolumn{4}{c}{\hrulefill}\cr
\noalign{\vskip-4pt}
&\multicolumn{1}{c}{\bf\ Actual}&\multicolumn{1}{c}{\bf\ Predicted}&\multicolumn{3}{c}{\bf
Error}&
\multicolumn{1}{c}{\bf \ Predicted}&\multicolumn{3}{c}{
\bf Error}\cr
&\multicolumn{1}{c}{\bf M2}&\multicolumn{1}{c}{\bf M2}&&&&\multicolumn{1}{c}{\bf M2}\cr
\noalign{\vskip-6pt}
\cline{4-6}\cline{8-{10}}\cr
\noalign{\vskip-6pt}
\bf\ \ Year&\bf Growth&\bf Growth&\bf Growth&\multicolumn{2}{c}{\bf Cumulative}
&\bf Growth&\bf Growth&\multicolumn{2}{c}{\bf Cumulative}\cr
\cline{5-6}\cline{9-{10}}\cr
\noalign{\vskip-9pt}
&&&&\multicolumn{1}{c}{\bf Level\hbox to-12pt{}}&\multicolumn{1}{c}{\bf Percentage}&&&
\multicolumn{1}{c}{\bf Level\hbox to-12pt{}}&\multicolumn{1}{r}{\bf Percentage}\cr
&&&&\multicolumn{1}{c}{\bf (billions)\hbox to-12pt{}}&&&&
\multicolumn{1}{c}{\bf (billions)\hbox to -12pt{}}&\cr
\noalign{\vskip3pt}
\hline
\noalign{\vskip3pt}
1990Q4&4.0& 6.4& $-$2.3\ &$-$71 &  2.2\ph& 6.5&$-$2.4\pph&$-$80&2.4\ph  \cr
1991Q4&3.0& 3.6& $-$0.5\ &$-$91 &  2.7\ph & 3.3&$-$0.3\pph&$-$92&2.7\ph  \cr
1992Q4&1.8& 6.4& $-$4.5\ &$-$257 & 7.5\ph  & 5.9&$-$4.0\pph&$-$239&6.9\ph  \cr
1993Q4&1.4& 4.8& $-$3.4\ &$-$392 & 11.2\ph  & 5.0&$-$3.6\pph&$-$381&10.9\ph  \cr
1994Q4&0.6& 3.0& $-$2.4\ &$-$489 & 13.9\ph  & 2.6&$-$2.0\pph&$-$464&13.2\ph  \cr
1995Q4&3.8& 3.5& 0.3\ &$-$495  & 13.6\ph  & 4.2&$-$0.4\pph&$-$500&13.7\ph  \cr
1996Q4&4.5& 3.9& 0.5\ &$-$495  & 13.0\ph  & 4.0&$-$0.4\pph&$-$505&13.3\ph
\cr 
\noalign{\vskip10pt}
\hline
\noalign{\vskip3pt}
\multicolumn{3}{l}{Mean Error (1990\/--1996)}&
\multicolumn{4}{l}{\phantom{$-$1.7}$-$1.78}&
\multicolumn{3}{l}{\phantom{$-$}$-$1.78}\cr
\multicolumn{3}{l}{\it RMSE}&
\multicolumn{4}{l}{\phantom{$-$$-$1.7}2.52}&
\multicolumn{3}{l}{\phantom{$-$$-$}2.40}\cr
\end{tabular*}
}}
\end{table}




\newpage

\section{Making Tables}
There are two aspects of making tables with this macro package
that need to be mentioned. 

First, you need to enter commands
as you see in the section `Normal Tables' below, in order to have the
table have the correct appearance. This includes using the
command \verb+\sphline+ instead of \verb+\hline+, which will
add a little vertical space between lines, making your
table look more professional and finished.

Second, if you are making tables with vertical lines,
which you should only do if the vertical lines are crucial
to convey the information in your table, you should use
the normal \LaTeX\ command \verb+\hline+ instead of \verb+\sphline+.

\subsection{Normal Tables}
In order to make your table conform to the Kluwer Book
specification you must follow several steps.

\begin{itemize}
\item
Use \verb+\sphline+ at the top of the table,  underneath the column headers,
and at the end of the table.

\item
Please enter \verb+\it+ before each column head, to make the
column heads appear in italic.
\item
You are discouraged from using vertical lines in tables.

\item
Make your table span the full page width if possible.
\end{itemize}

The following example shows these steps being followed and the
form of the table preamble that will cause the table
to spread out to the width of the page:

\code
\begin{verbatim}
\begin{table}[h]
\caption{This is an example table caption. If there is
enough text it will form a paragraph.}
\begin{tabular*}{\hsize}{@{\extracolsep{\fill}}lcr}
\sphline
\it$\alpha\beta\Gamma\Delta$ One&\it Two&\it Three\cr
\sphline
one&two&three\cr
one&two&three\cr
\sphline
\end{tabular*}
\end{table}
\end{verbatim}
\endcode

\results

\makeatletter
\def\@captype{table}
\makeatother
\caption{This is an example table caption. If there is
enough text it will form a paragraph.}
\leftskip-12pt
\begin{tabular*}{\hsize}{@{\extracolsep{\fill}}lcr}
\sphline
\it$\alpha\beta\Gamma\Delta$ One&\it Two&\it Three\cr
\sphline
one&two&three\cr
one&two&three\cr
\sphline
\end{tabular*}

\endresults
\eject
\subsection{Making Table Notes}
Table notes are made by entering the symbol that you want
to use in math mode in a superscript. At the end of the
table, please enter the command \verb+\begin{tablenotes}+
and enter the notes, as seen below.

\code
\begin{verbatim}
\begin{table}[h]
\caption{Effects of the Two Types of Scaling Proposed by 
\protect\inx{Dennard} and Co-Workers.$^{a,b}$}
\begin{tabular*}{\textwidth}{@{\extracolsep{\fill}}lcc}\sphline
Parameter& $\kappa$ Scaling & $\kappa$, $\lambda$ Scaling\\
\sphline
Dimension&$\kappa^{-1}$&$\lambda^{-1}$\\
Voltage&$\kappa^{-1}$&$\kappa^{-1}$\\
Currant&$\kappa^{-1}$&$\lambda/\kappa^{2}$\\
\sphline
\end{tabular*}
\begin{tablenotes}
$^a$Refs.~19 and 20.

$^b\kappa, \lambda>1$.
\end{tablenotes}
\end{table}
\end{verbatim}
\vskip-12pt
\endcode
\results
\makeatletter
\def\@captype{table}
\vskip-24pt
\makeatother
\caption{Effects of the Two Types of Scaling Proposed by \protect\inx{Dennard} 
and Co-Workers.$^{a,b}$}
\noindent
\begin{tabular*}{\textwidth}{@{\extracolsep{\fill}}lcc}
\sphline
Parameter& $\kappa$ Scaling & $\kappa$, $\lambda$ Scaling\\
\sphline
Dimension&$\kappa^{-1}$&$\lambda^{-1}$\\
Voltage&$\kappa^{-1}$&$\kappa^{-1}$\\
Currant&$\kappa^{-1}$&$\lambda/\kappa^{2}$\\
\sphline
\end{tabular*}
\parindent=0pt
\begin{tablenotes}
$^a$Refs.~19 and 20.

$^b\kappa, \lambda>1$.
\end{tablenotes}
\endresults
\vskip-36pt
\vskip1sp
\subsection{Vertical Lines in Tables}
Notice in the previous examples that no vertical lines were used.
If at all possible to make your meaning clear without vertical
lines, please leave them out. 

Since we usually do not want vertical
lines in tables and we do want the horizontal lines to extend
exactly to the left and right of text, 
we must go to some extra efforts to get the vertical lines
to extend to the top and bottom of the column and to not
have extra horizontal space to the right of the vertical line
in the last column.
Remember to
add another column entry to the table preamble
and then not to use that column, as seen below. Also notice
that we use \verb+\hline+ instead of \verb+\sphline+
when making tables with vertical lines.

\vtop to 0pt{
\code
\hbox to\textwidth{%
\vtop{\hsize=.5\textwidth
\begin{verbatim}
\begin{tabular}{|c|c}\hline
 A         \\ \hline
 B         \\ \hline
\end{tabular}
\end{verbatim}}
\vtop{\vskip8pt \hsize=.5\textwidth

\centerline{Which will make a little table that looks like this:}

\centering
\begin{tabular}{|c|c}\hline
 A         \\ \hline
 B         \\ \hline
\end{tabular}
}}
\endcode
\hrule
\vss}
\newpage


\section{To Illustrate an Algorithm}

The \verb+\begin{algorithm}...\end{algorithm}+ may be used
to illustrate an algorithm.

\begin{itemize}
\item
Spaces and
blank lines will be preserved.
Math and font changes may be used. 

\item
Line beginnings may be
positioned with a \verb+\ +, which may be used as many
times as you need. A backslash followed by a space
will provide a space a bit wider than the width of 2 `M's.

\item
If you want to break lines on the screen but not break the line
in the results, use `\%' at the end of line, as you see in
the fifth line in this example.

\item
The command
\verb+\bit+ will produce bold italics if you are using PostScript fonts, 
boldface in Computer Modern. 

\item
\verb+\note{}+ will position the note on the right margin. 
\end{itemize}



\code
\begin{verbatim}
\begin{algorithm}
{\bit Evaluate-Single-FOE} ({\bf x$_f$, I$_0$, I$_1$}):
\ {\bf I}+ := {\bf I}$_1$;
\ ($\phi,\theta$) := (0,0);
\ {\it repeat}\note{/*usually only 1 interation required*/}
\ \ (s$_{opt}${\bf E}$_\eta$) := {\bit Optimal-Shift}%
  ({\bf I$_0$,I$^+$,I$_0$,x$_f$});
\ \ ($\phi^+$, $\theta^+$) := {\bit Equivalent-Rotation} ({\bf s}$_{opt}$);
\ \ ($\phi$, $\theta$) := ($\phi$, $\theta$) + ($\phi^+$, $\theta^+$);
\ \ {\bf I}$^+$:= {\bit Derotate-Image} ({\bf I}$_1$, $\phi$, $\theta$);
\ \ {\it until} ($|\phi^+|\leq\phi_{max}$ \& $|\theta^+|\leq\theta_{max}$);
\ {\it return} ({\bf I}$^+$, $\phi$, $\theta$, E$_\eta$).
End pseudo-code.
\end{algorithm}
\end{verbatim}
\endcode

\results
\begin{algorithm}
{\bit Evaluate-Single-FOE} ({\bf x$_f$, I$_0$, I$_1$}):
\ {\bf I}+ := {\bf I}$_1$;
\ ($\phi,\theta$) := (0,0);
\ {\it repeat}\note{/*usually only 1 interation required*/}
\ \ (s$_{opt}${\bf E}$_\eta$) :={\bit Optimal-Shift} %
  ({\bf I$_0$,I$^+$,I$_0$,x$_f$});
\ \ ($\phi^+$, $\theta^+$) := {\bit Equivalent-Rotation} ({\bf s}$_{opt}$);
\ \ ($\phi$, $\theta$) := ($\phi$, $\theta$) + ($\phi^+$, $\theta^+$);
\ \ {\bf I}$^+$:= {\bit Derotate-Image} ({\bf I}$_1$, $\phi$, $\theta$);
\ \ {\it until} ($|\phi^+|\leq\phi_{max}$ \& $|\theta^+|\leq\theta_{max}$);
\ {\it return} ({\bf I}$^+$, $\phi$, $\theta$, E$_\eta$).
End pseudo-code.
\end{algorithm}
\endresults

\clearpage


\newpage
\section{End of Article}
Getting the end of article commands in the right order will not
be difficult if you use the {\tt procsamp.tex} template file.
The commands should be used in this order:
Acknowledgments (optional), Appendix (optional), References, and 
finally \verb+\end{article}+.

\code
\begin{verbatim}
%% End of article:

%% optional:
% \begin{glossary}
% \end{glossary}

%% optional:
%\begin{acknowledgements}
%\end{acknowledgements}

%% optional: 
%\chapappendix{<Optional Chapter Appendix Letter or title>}
%\chapappendix{} % Untitled chapter appendix

\begin{references}
...
\end{references}

\end{article}
\end{document}
\end{verbatim}
\hrule

\newpage
\section{Glossary}
An optional glossary section is available. Its commands are
very straightforward:\label{gloss}

\begin{verbatim}
\begin{glossary}
\term{xxx}Text...
\term{yyy}Text...
\end{glossary}
\end{verbatim}

Here is an example:

\code
\begin{verbatim}
\begin{glossary}
\term{GaAs}Gallium Arsinide. For similar device sizes GaAs transistors 
have three to
five times greater transconductance than those of of silicon bipolar
and MOS transistors.

\term{VLSI}Very Large Scale Integration. Since the mid-1970's 
VLSI technology has been successfully used in many areas, but its effect on
computers of all shapes and sizes has been the most dramatic. Some of the
application areas got boosts in performance while others became
feasible.

\end{glossary}
\end{verbatim}
\endcode
\results
\begin{glossary}
\term{GaAs}Gallium Arsinide. For similar device sizes GaAs transistors 
have three to
five times greater transconductance than those of of silicon bipolar
and MOS transistors.

\term{VLSI}Very Large Scale Integration. Since the mid-1970's 
VLSI technology has been successfully used in many areas, but its effect on
computers of all shapes and sizes has been the most dramatic. Some of the
application areas got boosts in performance while others became
feasible.

\end{glossary}
\vskip-12pt
\endresults

\vskip-12pt
\vskip1sp
\subsection{Acknowledgements}

\vtop to 0pt{
\code
\begin{verbatim}
\begin{acknowledgments}
We would like to thank....
\end{acknowledgments}
\end{verbatim}
\endcode
\results
\vskip-1.5\baselineskip
\vskip1sp
\begin{acknowledgments}
We would like to thank....
\end{acknowledgments}
\endresults
\vss}
\newpage



\section{Appendices}
There are two sets of appendix commands; those for the end of
the chapter and those for an appendix at the end of the book.
\subsection{End of Chapter Appendix}
An appendix to appear at the end of the book
is
made with the command \verb+\appendix{}+, as seen below.
If you want only one appendix, follow \verb+\appendix+ with facing
curly brackets: \verb+\appendix{}+.

Section numbers, equation numbers, and captions will all use the 
appendix letter as well as their number. Each new appendix will
generate a new appendix letter.

Here are some appendix possibilities:
\code
\begin{verbatim}
\chapappendix{This is a Chapter Appendix}
This is an appendix which is meant to appear in individual chapters
of the proceedings, not at the end of the book.

\begin{equation}
g_i(y|f)=\sum_x P(x|F_n)f_i(y|x)
\end{equation}

\chapappendix{}
This is a chapter appendix without a title
which is meant to appear in individual chapters
of the proceedings, not at the end of the book.

\begin{equation}
g_i(y|f)=\sum_x P(x|F_n)f_i(y|x)
\end{equation}
\end{verbatim}
\endcode

\results
\chapappendix{This is a Chapter Appendix}
This is an appendix which is meant to appear in individual chapters
of the proceedings, not at the end of the book.

\begin{equation}
g_i(y|f)=\sum_x P(x|F_n)f_i(y|x)
\end{equation}

\chapappendix{}
This is a chapter appendix without a title
which is meant to appear in individual chapters
of the proceedings, not at the end of the book.

\begin{equation}
g_i(y|f)=\sum_x P(x|F_n)f_i(y|x)
\end{equation}
\endresults
\newpage
Here is a longer example showing a figure, table and equation
in the appendix:

\code
\vskip-12pt
\vskip1sp
\begin{verbatim}
\begin{figure}[h]
\caption{This is an appendix figure caption.}
\end{figure}

\begin{table}[h]
\caption{This is an appendix table caption.}
\centering
\begin{tabular}{ccc}
\hline
one&two&three\\
\hline
C&D&E\\
\hline
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

\begin{equation}
\alpha\beta\Gamma\Delta
\end{equation}

\chapappendix{}
This is a chapter appendix without a title ...
\end{verbatim}
\endcode

\results
\vskip-24pt
\vskip1sp
\let\section\savesection

\chapappendix{This is a Chapter Appendix}
This is an appendix which is meant to appear in individual chapters
of the proceedings, not at the end of the book.

\begin{figure}[h]
\caption{This is an appendix figure caption.}
\end{figure}

\vskip-24pt
\vskip1sp
\begin{table}[h]
\caption{This is an appendix table caption.}
\centering
\begin{tabular}{ccc}
\hline
one&two&three\\
\hline
C&D&E\\
\hline
\end{tabular}
\end{table}
\begin{equation}
\alpha\beta\Gamma\Delta
\end{equation}


\chapappendix{}
This is a chapter appendix without a title 
meant to appear in individual chapters
of the proceedings, not at the end of the book.
\begin{equation}
e=mc^2
\end{equation}
\endresults


\section{End Notes and Footnotes}
In this style the default is end notes rather than footnotes. The
user enters the usual footnote command \verb+\footnote{<text>}+.
A number appears in the text as it would with a footnote, but
with this style the note only appears at the end of the chapter
when the user writes \verb+\notes+.

\code
\begin{verbatim}
Here is some sample text\footnote{Here is our first sample note}
to show how end notes print.

\notes
\end{verbatim}
\endcode
\results
\global\footnum=0
Here is some sample text\footnote{Here is our first sample note}
to show how end notes print.

\notes
\endresults

\subsection{If you want Footnotes instead of Endnotes}
If you would rather have footnote at the bottom of the page,
you may write this command below the documentstyle or documentclass
command: \verb+\let\footnote\savefootnote+.

If you would also like to have a ruled line appear above the
footnote, you may write this: 

\noindent
\verb+\let\footnoterule\savefootnoterule+.
\newpage

\section{References}

Before \verb+\begin{document}+ in your proctmpl.tex file you will see the
following information:

\begin{verbatim}
% Bibliography Style Settings:
% ============================
% Choose either kluwerbib or normallatexbib:

%%%
\kluwerbib % will produce this kind of bibliography entry:

%  Anderson, Terry L.,...
%    continuing bib entry here

%  \cite{xxx} will print without brackets around the citation.
% \bibliographystyle{kapalike} % should be used when you use \verb+\kluwerbib+.

%%%
%\normallatexbib %will produce bibliography entries as shown in the
                % LaTeX book

% [1] Anderson, Terry L.,
%     continuing bib entry

% \cite{xxx} will print with square brackets around the citation, i.e., [1].

% Any \verb+\bibliographystyle{}+ may be used with \verb+\normallatexbib+, but
% you should check with your editor to find the style preferred for
% your book.

% Change Brackets around Citation:
% ================================

%% Default with \kluwerbib is no brackets around citation. 
%% Default with \normallatexbib is square brackets around citation. 

% For parens around citation uncomment these:

%\let\lcitebracket(
%\let\rcitebracket)

% For square brackets around citation uncomment these:

%\let\lcitebracket[
%\let\rcitebracket]

%%%%%%%  <<== End Bibliography Style Settings
\end{verbatim}

\newpage
\section{Using the Kluwerbib or Normallatexbib Bibliography Option}
Unless you have a preference to use the normal \LaTeX\ bibliography
styles, you should leave \verb+\kluwerbib+ uncommented.

If you
plan on using the \verb+\cite{}+ command,
and are using \verb+\kluwerbib+,
remember that \verb+\bibitem+ should be used with the square bracket argument.
With \verb+\kluwerbib+,
whatever is typed between square brackets after \verb+\bibitem+
will be printed when you use \verb+\cite{}+.


When the square bracket argument is used:

\code
\begin{verbatim}
Here is our citation: \cite{lacey}.
...
\bibitem[Lacey, 1968]{lacey}
Lacey, W.K. (1968). {\it History of Socialism}. Ithaca, NY: Cornell
University Press.
\end{verbatim}
\endcode
\results
Here is our citation: Lacey, 1968.
\endresults

If you forgot to use the square bracket argument, you will get
the name of the symbolic label when you type \verb+\cite{}+, i.e.,

\code
\begin{verbatim}
Here is our citation: \cite{lacey}.
...
\bibitem{lacey}
Lacey, W.K. (1968). {\it History of Socialism}. Ithaca, NY: Cornell
University Press.
\end{verbatim}
\endcode
\results
Here is our citation: lacey.
\endresults

When using the \verb+\normallatexbib+ option, you don't have
to use the square bracket argument, since the bibitems will
be numbered and \verb+\cite+ will produce numbers.
\newpage

\subsection{chapthebibliography}
Now you can use the \verb+\begin{chapthebibliography}{<widest bib entry>}+
command, which works like the \newline
\verb+\begin{thebibliography}{<widest bib entry>}+ command, except
that it can be used at the end of chapters.

Here is how bib entries will be formatted if you have uncommented the 
\verb+\kluwerbib+ command near the top of the file. 

\code
\begin{verbatim}
\kluwerbib %% <== above \begin{document}
...
Sample citations: \cite{lacey,oliva}.

\begin{chapthebibliography}{}
\bibitem[Anderson, et al]{ander}
Anderson, Terry L., and Fred S. McChesney. (n.d.). ``Raid or Trade?
An Economic Model of Indian-WhiteRelations,'' Political Economy Research
Center Working Paper 93--1.

\bibitem[Lacey, 1968]{lacey}
Lacey, W.K. (1968). {\it History of Socialism}. Ithaca, NY: Cornell
University Press.

\bibitem[Oliva, 1971]{oliva}
Oliva, Pavel. (1971). {\it Sparta and Her Social Problems.} Amsterdam: Adolf
M. Hakkert.

\bibitem[Zimmern, 1961]{zimmern}
Zimmern, Alfred. (1961). {\it The Greek Commonwealth: Politics and Economics
in Fifth-Century Athens,}\/ 5th ed. New York: Galaxy Book, Oxford University
Press.
\end{chapthebibliography}
\end{verbatim}
\endcode
\results
\kluwerbib
Sample citations: Lacey, 1968, Oliva, 1971.

\begin{chapthebibliography}{}
\bibitem[Anderson, et al]{aander}
Anderson, Terry L., and Fred S. McChesney. (n.d.). ``Raid or Trade?
An Economic Model of Indian-WhiteRelations,'' Political Economy Research
Center Working Paper 93--1.

\bibitem{alacey}
Lacey, W.K. (1968). {\it History of Socialism}. Ithaca, NY: Cornell
University Press.

\bibitem[Oliva, 1971]{aoliva}
Oliva, Pavel. (1971). {\it Sparta and Her Social Problems.} Amsterdam: Adolf
M. Hakkert.

\bibitem[Zimmern, 1961]{azimmern}
Zimmern, Alfred. (1961). {\it The Greek Commonwealth: Politics and Economics
in Fifth-Century Athens,}\/ 5th ed. New York: Galaxy Book, Oxford University
Press.
\end{chapthebibliography}
\endresults
\newpage
If you use 
\verb+\normallatexbib+  your bibliography will
format just as it would with a standard \LaTeX\ style.

\code
\begin{verbatim}
\normallatexbib %% <== above \begin{document}
...
Sample citations: \cite{raidtrade,sparta}.

\begin{chapthebibliography}{1}
\bibitem{raidtrade}
Anderson, Terry L., and Fred S. McChesney. (n.d.). ``Raid or Trade?
An Economic Model of Indian-WhiteRelations,'' Political Economy Research
Center Working Paper 93--1.

\bibitem{history}
Lacey, W.K. (1968). {\it History of Socialism}. Ithaca, NY: Cornell
University Press.

\bibitem{sparta}
Oliva, Pavel. (1971). {\it Sparta and Her Social Problems.} Amsterdam: Adolf
M. Hakkert.

\bibitem{earlygreek}
Zimmern, Alfred. (1961). {\it The Greek Commonwealth: Politics and Economics
in Fifth-Century Athens,}\/ 5th ed. New York: Galaxy Book, Oxford University
Press.
\end{chapthebibliography}
\end{verbatim}
\endcode
\results
\normallatexbib
Sample citations: [1,3].

\begin{chapthebibliography}{1}
\bibitem{raidtradey}
Anderson, Terry L., and Fred S. McChesney. (n.d.). ``Raid or Trade?
An Economic Model of Indian-WhiteRelations,'' Political Economy Research
Center Working Paper 93--1.

\bibitem{historyy}
Lacey, W.K. (1968). {\it History of Socialism}. Ithaca, NY: Cornell
University Press.

\bibitem{spartay}
Oliva, Pavel. (1971). {\it Sparta and Her Social Problems.} Amsterdam: Adolf
M. Hakkert.

\bibitem{earlygreeky}
Zimmern, Alfred. (1961). {\it The Greek Commonwealth: Politics and Economics
in Fifth-Century Athens,}\/ 5th ed. New York: Galaxy Book, Oxford University
Press.
\end{chapthebibliography}
\endresults

\newpage
Using symbolic names for your bibliography is done as you see
below, using the \verb+\normallatexbib+ command.

\code
\begin{verbatim}
Sample citations: \cite{xraidtrade,xsparta}.

\begin{chapthebibliography}{AnderMcC}
\bibitem[AnderMcC]{xraidtrade}
Anderson, Terry L., and Fred S. McChesney. (n.d.). ``Raid or Trade?
An Economic Model of Indian-WhiteRelations,'' Political Economy Research
Center Working Paper 93--1.

\bibitem[Lacey68]{xhistory}
Lacey, W.K. (1968). {\it History of Socialism}. Ithaca, NY: Cornell
University Press.

\bibitem[Oliva71]{xsparta}
Oliva, Pavel. (1971). {\it Sparta and Her Social Problems.} Amsterdam: Adolf
M. Hakkert.

\bibitem[Zim61]{xearlygreek}
Zimmern, Alfred. (1961). {\it The Greek Commonwealth: Politics and Economics
in Fifth-Century Athens,}\/ 5th ed. New York: Galaxy Book, Oxford University
Press.
\end{chapthebibliography}
\end{verbatim}
\endcode

\results
Sample citations: [AnderMcC; Oliva71].

\begin{chapthebibliography}{AnderMcC}
\bibitem[AnderMcC]{zraidtrade}
Anderson, Terry L., and Fred S. McChesney. (n.d.). ``Raid or Trade?
An Economic Model of Indian-WhiteRelations,'' Political Economy Research
Center Working Paper 93--1.

\bibitem[Lacey68]{zhistory}
Lacey, W.K. (1968). {\it History of Socialism}. Ithaca, NY: Cornell
University Press.

\bibitem[Oliva71]{zsparta}
Oliva, Pavel. (1971). {\it Sparta and Her Social Problems.} Amsterdam: Adolf
M. Hakkert.

\bibitem[Zim61]{xearlygreek}
Zimmern, Alfred. (1961). {\it The Greek Commonwealth: Politics and Economics
in Fifth-Century Athens,}\/ 5th ed. New York: Galaxy Book, Oxford University
Press.
\end{chapthebibliography}
\endresults
\newpage


\subsection{Changing the bracket around the citation}
If you want to set the bracket around the citation to parens,
you can do it at the top of your file:

\begin{verbatim}
%%%%%%% To change brackets around citation ==>>
% Default with \kluwerbib is no brackets around citation. 
% Default with \normallatexbib is square brackets around citation. 

%If you want parens, around citation, i.e., (citation), uncomment these lines:
\let\lcitebracket(
\let\rcitebracket)
\end{verbatim}

Then the citation will look like:

\code
\begin{verbatim}
\let\lcitebracket(
\let\rcitebracket)
...
Sample citations: \cite{xraidtrade,xsparta}.
\end{verbatim}
\endcode
\results
Sample citations: (AnderMcC,Oliva71).
\endresults


\newpage
\section{Using BibTeX for your Chapter References}
Using BibTeX is a bit more effort, but the major advantage
is that you can build a database of your references
that you can reuse for other books or articles.

To use Bib\TeX\ to make your chapter bibliography
you will follow the usual \LaTeX\ method, but you
must also use two new commands: {\tt\string\chapbblname} and
{\tt\string\chapbibliography}, along with the familiar
{\tt\string\bibliographystyle{}}. 

The {\tt\string\chapbblname}
command is needed to let LaTeX know which .bbl file to
use since there will be presumably more than one bibliography
in the complete book. The {\tt\string\chapbibliography} command 
makes the bibliography print in the style
appropriate to a bibliography appearing in a chapter.

\begin{verbatim}
\bibliographystyle{<name of a .bst file>} % Choose the BibTeX style

\chapbblname{<name of a .bbl file>} 
              % The .bbl file appears after you run BibTeX
              % on your file; its name will be the same as the 
              % file name, but with a .bbl extension
				      
\chapbibliography{<name of one or more .bib files>}
              % .bib files are the bibliography database
\end{verbatim}                            
\vskip-12pt
Follow these steps.

\def\dothis#1#2{\vskip-8pt\vskip1sp
\item[\bf#1.]{\bf\uppercase{#2}}}
\begin{enumerate}
\parskip=4pt
\item[\bf1.]{\bf\uppercase{Preparation}}

\vskip6pt
{\bf Make a .bib file}

If you do not already have one or more .bib files, 
make a {\tt xxx.bib} file, with `{\tt xxx}' being any file name you choose.
The .bib file or files are a database of references.
Please see Leslie Lamport's {\it \LaTeX\ A Document Preparation System}
for information on the form of entries in the .bib file.

\vskip6pt
{\bf Enter Citations}

Write either \verb+\cite{<label>}+ or \verb+\nocite{<label>}+
for each reference that you want to appear in the bibliography.
The name of the \verb+<label>+ is found in the .bib file.

Each citation pull an entry from the .bib file with the same
label name and make it appear in the bibliography.

There is also a command called
\verb+\nocite+ which is used in the same way as \verb+\cite+
but will not print a citation. Its only purpose is to
cause the matching entry to be pulled from the database
and added to the .bbl file when BibTeX is run on the .tex file.

For example:
\begin{verbatim}
Here are some more citations
\cite{dms80}, \cite{gm91}, \cite{hhmz77,hb85},
\cite{kt78}. \nocite{kl94}
\end{verbatim}
\null
\vskip1sp
\dothis{2}{Commands to enter in your .tex file}



\vskip6pt
{\bf Supply a Bibliography Style}

Use kapalike or alpha for the bibliographystyle:

\vskip3pt
{\tt\string\bibliographystyle\string{kapalike\string}}
\vskip3pt

The kapalike.bst file may be downloaded from the Kluwer ftp site,
in the same directory as you found the other book files: \\
{\tt http://www.wkap.nl/authors/bookstylefiles/latexstyles}.

Please put kapalike.bst in the same directory where you are working, or in
a directory where BibTeX can find it when it is running.

\vskip6pt
{\bf Supply a .bbl file name}

Write \verb+\chapbblname{<name of your bbl file>}+\hfill\break
with the name of your bbl file being the name of the file
you are writing, i.e, if you are working in a file named
chap1.tex, the name you should supply is 
\vskip-12pt
\vskip1sp
\begin{verbatim}
\chapbblname{chap1}
\end{verbatim}
\vskip-12pt

{\bf  Supply a .bib file name, or names}

Next you must write \verb+\chapbibliography{xxx}+, 
with `xxx' being the name of 
the .bib database file that you have written. You can also use more
than one .bib file, in which case you must separate the filenames with
a comma: \verb+\chapbibliography{xxx,yyy}+.

For example:
\vskip-12pt
\vskip1sp
\begin{verbatim}
\bibliographystyle{kapalike}
\chapbblname{chap1}
\chapbibliography{bkbib}
\end{verbatim}

\vskip-1pt
\null
\dothis{3}{Making the .bbl file}

{\bf Run LaTeX on your file}

Once the citations are entered in your text, you can
run LaTeX on the file. This step is needed to send
label information to the .aux file, which will tell BibTeX
which entries should be taken from the .bib database and
used in the .bbl file that it will make.
\vskip6pt

{\bf Run BibTeX on your file to produce a .bbl file}

Use the BibTeX program to make the .bbl file, by entering
the command \verb+bibtex filename+ with filename being
the .tex file you are working on, without the .tex extension.

If the .tex file is named chap1.tex 
you will produce a file named chap1.bbl.
\vskip6pt
{\bf Run \LaTeX\ on your file two more times}

After you have a .bbl file, you should
run LaTeX on your .tex file to produce
a formatted bibliography. 

The next time you run \LaTeX\ on your file your citations
will appear.
(You must run LaTeX on the file one final time so
that the entries in the bibliography are able
to send information about the text of the citations
to the .aux file.)
\null
\vskip6pt
\vskip6pt
\vskip6pt
\dothis{4}{Sending in the bbl file}

You have two choices at this point: 

1) Either send the .bbl
file in to the editor at the same time that you submit
your chapter, or 

2) Copy the \verb+\bibitem+s from your .bbl file and drop
them into a \verb+\chapthebibliography+ environment. If
you follow this path, you will no longer need the
commands you originally entered, \verb+\bibliographystyle{}+,
\verb+\chapbblname{}+, or \verb+\chapbibliography{}+.
This option may be preferable in that there is greater
assurance that
the .bbl file will not become separated from the
.tex file.

\vtop to 0pt{
\vskip-18pt
\vskip1sp
\begin{verbatim}
\begin{chapbibliography}
<add bibitems here>
\end{chapbibliography}
\end{verbatim}
\vss}
\end{enumerate}
\eject


\section{Commands for the end of the Book: End Matter}
The end of the book should use this order:
\begin{verbatim}
Glossary %% optional
Appendices %% optional
Bibliography
Index
\end{verbatim}

\subsection{Glossary}
You've seen how to format a glossary on page \pageref{gloss}.
If you make the glossary at the end of a chapter or at the
end of the book the commands are identical.

\subsection{End of book appendix}
\setcounter{alphanum}{0}
The appendix commands at the end of the book are exactly
the same, except that they use \verb+\appendix{}+ instead
of \verb+\chapappendix{}+.

If you want only one appendix, follow \verb+\appendix+ with facing
curly brackets: \verb+\appendix{}+.

Section numbers, equation numbers, and captions will all use the 
appendix letter as well as their number. Each new appendix will
generate a new appendix letter.

Here are some appendix possibilities:
\code
\begin{verbatim}
\appendix{}
This is an appendix.
\begin{equation}\sum_k P(k) \sum_i \sum_y f_i(y|k)^2\end{equation}

\appendix{Pspace $\supseteq$ PCP(log n)}
....
\end{verbatim}
\endcode
\global\let\savenewpage\newpage

\results
\let\section\savesection
\appendix{}
This is an appendix.
\begin{equation}\sum_k P(k) \sum_i \sum_y f_i(y|k)^2\end{equation}

\appendix{Pspace $\supseteq$ PCP(log n)}
This is an appendix.
\begin{equation}
\sum_k P(k) \sum_i \sum_y f_i(y|k)^2
\end{equation}
\endresults

\newpage
\subsection{Bibliography at end of Book}
The commands \verb+\begin{thebibliography}{<widest label>}+...
\verb+\end{thebibliography}+ may be used to format the
bibliography at the end of the book.

The appearance of the bibliography will differ depending on
whether \verb+\kluwerbib+ or \verb+\normallatexbib+ has
been uncommented at the beginning of the file.

If you
plan on using the \verb+\cite{}+ command,
and are using \verb+\kluwerbib+,
remember that \verb+\bibitem+ should be used with the square bracket argument.
With \verb+\kluwerbib+,
whatever is typed between square brackets after \verb+\bibitem+
will be printed when you use \verb+\cite{}+.

\subsection{Using thebibliography}
You can use the \LaTeX\ command 
\verb+\begin{thebibliography}{<widest label>}+ at the end of
the book, and use \verb+\bibitem+ with or without the optional
argument in square brackets. The appearance will differ depending
on whether you uncommented \verb+\kluwerbib+ or \verb+\normallatexbib+
at the beginning of the file.

\code
\begin{verbatim}
\kluwerbib %% <== above \begin{document}
...
\begin{thebibliography}{}
\bibitem[Anderson, et al]{ander}
Anderson, Terry L., and Fred S. McChesney. (n.d.). ``Raid or Trade?
An Economic Model of Indian-WhiteRelations,'' Political Economy Research
Center Working Paper 93--1.

\bibitem[Lacey, 1968]{lacey}
Lacey, W.K. (1968). {\it History of Socialism}. Ithaca, NY: Cornell
University Press.

\bibitem[Oliva, 1971]{oliva}
Oliva, Pavel. (1971). {\it Sparta and Her Social Problems.} Amsterdam: Adolf
M. Hakkert.
\end{thebibliography}
\end{verbatim}
\endcode
\results
\kluwerbib
\let\chapter\savechapter
\begin{thebibliography}{}
\bibitem{ander}
Anderson, Terry L., and Fred S. McChesney. (n.d.). ``Raid or Trade?
An Economic Model of Indian-WhiteRelations,'' Political Economy Research
Center Working Paper 93--1.

\bibitem{lacey}
Lacey, W.K. (1968). {\it History of Socialism}. Ithaca, NY: Cornell
University Press.

\bibitem{oliva}
Oliva, Pavel. (1971). {\it Sparta and Her Social Problems.} Amsterdam: Adolf
M. Hakkert.

\end{thebibliography}
\endresults

\newpage
When you have used
\verb+\normallatexbib+ your bibliography will
format just as it would with a standard \LaTeX\ style.

\code
\begin{verbatim}
\normallatexbib %% <== above \begin{document}
...
\begin{thebibliography}{1}
\bibitem{raidtrade}
Anderson, Terry L., and Fred S. McChesney. (n.d.). ``Raid or Trade?
An Economic Model of Indian-WhiteRelations,'' Political Economy Research
Center Working Paper 93--1.

\bibitem{history}
Lacey, W.K. (1968). {\it History of Socialism}. Ithaca, NY: Cornell
University Press.

\bibitem{sparta}
Oliva, Pavel. (1971). {\it Sparta and Her Social Problems.} Amsterdam: Adolf
M. Hakkert.

\bibitem{earlygreek}
Zimmern, Alfred. (1961). {\it The Greek Commonwealth: Politics and Economics
in Fifth-Century Athens,}\/ 5th ed. New York: Galaxy Book, Oxford University
Press.
\end{thebibliography}
\end{verbatim}
\endcode
\results
\let\chapter\savechapter
\normallatexbib

\begin{thebibliography}{1}
\bibitem{raidtradea}
Anderson, Terry L., and Fred S. McChesney. (n.d.). ``Raid or Trade?
An Economic Model of Indian-WhiteRelations,'' Political Economy Research
Center Working Paper 93--1.

\bibitem{historya}
Lacey, W.K. (1968). {\it History of Socialism}. Ithaca, NY: Cornell
University Press.

\bibitem{spartaa}
Oliva, Pavel. (1971). {\it Sparta and Her Social Problems.} Amsterdam: Adolf
M. Hakkert.

\bibitem{earlygreeka}
Zimmern, Alfred. (1961). {\it The Greek Commonwealth: Politics and Economics
in Fifth-Century Athens,}\/ 5th ed. New York: Galaxy Book, Oxford University
Press.
\end{thebibliography}
\endresults

\newpage
If you want to use a symbolic name for your references, please
use \verb+\normallatexbib+, and the symbolic name in square
brackets after \verb+\bibitem+:

\code
\begin{verbatim}
\begin{thebibliography}{AnderMcC}
\bibitem[AnderMcC]{raidtrade}
Anderson, Terry L., and Fred S. McChesney. (n.d.). ``Raid or Trade?
An Economic Model of Indian-WhiteRelations,'' Political Economy Research
Center Working Paper 93--1.

\bibitem[Lacey68]{history}
Lacey, W.K. (1968). {\it History of Socialism}. Ithaca, NY: Cornell
University Press.

\bibitem[Oliva71]{sparta}
Oliva, Pavel. (1971). {\it Sparta and Her Social Problems.} Amsterdam: Adolf
M. Hakkert.

\bibitem[Zim61]{earlygreek}
Zimmern, Alfred. (1961). {\it The Greek Commonwealth: Politics and Economics
in Fifth-Century Athens,}\/ 5th ed. New York: Galaxy Book, Oxford University
Press.
\end{thebibliography}
\end{verbatim}
\endcode
\results
\normallatexbib
\let\chapter\savechapter
\begin{thebibliography}{AnderMcC}
\bibitem[AnderMcC]{yraidtrade}
Anderson, Terry L., and Fred S. McChesney. (n.d.). ``Raid or Trade?
An Economic Model of Indian-WhiteRelations,'' Political Economy Research
Center Working Paper 93--1.

\bibitem[Lacey68]{yhistory}
Lacey, W.K. (1968). {\it History of Socialism}. Ithaca, NY: Cornell
University Press.

\bibitem[Oliva71]{ysparta}
Oliva, Pavel. (1971). {\it Sparta and Her Social Problems.} Amsterdam: Adolf
M. Hakkert.

\bibitem[Zim61]{yearlygreek}
Zimmern, Alfred. (1961). {\it The Greek Commonwealth: Politics and Economics
in Fifth-Century Athens,}\/ 5th ed. New York: Galaxy Book, Oxford University
Press.
\end{thebibliography}
\endresults

\newpage


\subsection{Using Bib\TeX\ for References for End of Book}
The same series of steps that were described earlier to
make a chapter bibliography are also followed to make
a Bib\TeX\ bibliography at the end of the book. The
only differences are that for the end of the book you
may use the command \verb+\bibliography{}+ instead of
\verb+\chapbibliography{}+ and you no longer need \verb+\chapbblname{}+.

To recap the steps needed to use BibTeX:

\begin{description}
\item[Make a .bib file]
If you do not already have one or more .bib files, 
make a {\tt xxx.bib} file, with `{\tt xxx}' being any file name you choose.
The .bib file or files are a database of references.
Please see Leslie Lamport's {\it \LaTeX\ A Document Preparation System}
for information on the form of entries in the .bib file.

\vskip12pt
\item[Supply a Bibliography style]
Use kapalike or alpha for the bibliographystyle:

\vskip3pt
{\tt\string\bibliographystyle\string{kapalike\string}}
\vskip3pt

The kapalike.bst file may be downloaded from the Kluwer ftp site,
in the same directory as you found the other book files: 
{\tt www.wkap.nl/kaphtml.htm/LATEXSTYLES}.

Please put kapalike.bst in the same directory where you are working, or in
a directory where BibTeX can find it.

\vskip12pt
\item[Run BibTeX on your file to produce a .bbl file]
Write either \verb+\cite{<label>}+ or \verb+\nocite{<label>}+
for each reference that you want to appear in the bibliography.
Each citation will make a matching entry appear in the bibliography.

\verb+\cite+ will produce a printed citation, \verb+\nocite+ will
not print, but in either case he citation will appear in the
finished bibliography.

Next you must write \verb+\bibliography{xxx}+, 
with `xxx' being the name of 
the .bib database file that you have written. You can also use more
than one .bib file, in which case you must separate the filenames with
a comma: \verb+\bibliography{xxx,yyy}+.

\noindent
For example:
\begin{verbatim}
Here are some more citations
\cite{dms80}, \cite{gm91}, \cite{hhmz77}, \cite{hb85},
\cite{kt78}. \nocite{kl94}

\bibliographystyle{kapalike}
\bibliography{procbib}
\end{verbatim}

\item[Run BibTeX on the file] If the file is named mybook.tex 
this will produce a file named mybook.bbl.

\vskip12pt
\item[Run \LaTeX\ on your file to print your citations]

The next time you run \LaTeX\ on your file your citations
will appear.
\vskip12pt
\item[Sending the .bbl file]
If you are sending the .tex file for the proceedings
to anyone else, please remember to also 
send the .bbl file.
\end{description}
\newpage


Here is the sample bibliography that results from taking the
steps we have just listed:

%% ok
\def\spbibliography{{\normallatexbib
%\let\chapter\savechapter
\begin{thebibliography}{BarMor84}
\vskip48pt
\vskip1sp
\bibitem[BarMor84]{bm84z}
Barrett, J.~W. and Morton, K.~W. (1984).
\newblock Approximate symmetrization and {P}etrov-{G}alerkin methods for
  diffusion-convection problems.
\newblock {\em Comput. Methods Appl. Mech. Engrg.}, 45:97--122.

\bibitem[Ben75]{jb:spectralz}
Benedetto, J. (1975).
\newblock {\em Spectral Synthesis}.
\newblock Academic Press, New York.

\bibitem[Ben90]{jb:uncertz}
Benedetto, J. (1990).
\newblock Uncertainty principle inequalities and spectrum estimation.
\newblock In Byrnes, J.~S. and Byrnes, J.~L., editors, {\em Recent Advances in
  {F}ourier Analysis}, NATO-ASI Series C, pages 143--182. Kluwer Academic
  Publishers.

\bibitem[ChuiWang]{cw:cardsplinez}
Chui, C.~K. and Wang, J.~Z.
\newblock A cardinal spline approach to wavelets.
\newblock {\em Proc. Amer. Math. Soc.}
\newblock to appear.

\bibitem[Daub90]{id:signalz}
Daubechies, I. (1990).
\newblock The wavelet transform, time-frequency localization and signal
  analysis.
\newblock {\em IEEE Trans. Inform. Theory}, 36:961--1005.

\bibitem[GarMac91]{gm91z}
Garc\'{\i}a-Archilla, B. and Mackenzie, J.~A. (1991).
\newblock Analysis of a supraconvergent cell vertex finite volume method for
  one-dimensional convection-diffusion problems.
\newblock Technical Report NA91/13, Oxford University Computing Laboratory, 11
  Keble Road, Oxford, OX1 3QD.
\newblock submitted for publication.

\bibitem[Hein77]{hhmz77z}
Heinrich, J.~C., Huyakorn, P.~S., Mitchell, A.~R., and Zienkiewicz, O.~C.
  (1977).
\newblock An upwind finite element scheme for two-dimensional convective
  transport equations.
\newblock {\em Internat. J. Numer. Methods Engrg.}, 11:131--143.


\end{thebibliography}}
}


%% ok
\def\twospbibliography{{\kluwerbib
\let\chapter\savechapter
\begin{thebibliography}{}
%\vskip-48pt
\vskip1sp
\bibitem[BarMor84]{bm84}
Barrett, J.~W. and Morton, K.~W. (1984).
\newblock Approximate symmetrization and {P}etrov-{G}alerkin methods for
  diffusion-convection problems.
\newblock {\em Comput. Methods Appl. Mech. Engrg.}, 45:97--122.

\bibitem[Ben75]{jb:spectral}
Benedetto, J. (1975).
\newblock {\em Spectral Synthesis}.
\newblock Academic Press, New York.

\bibitem[Ben90]{jb:uncert}
Benedetto, J. (1990).
\newblock Uncertainty principle inequalities and spectrum estimation.
\newblock In Byrnes, J.~S. and Byrnes, J.~L., editors, {\em Recent Advances in
  {F}ourier Analysis}, NATO-ASI Series C, pages 143--182. Kluwer Academic
  Publishers.

\bibitem[ChuiWang]{cw:cardspline}
Chui, C.~K. and Wang, J.~Z.
\newblock A cardinal spline approach to wavelets.
\newblock {\em Proc. Amer. Math. Soc.}
\newblock to appear.

\bibitem[Daub90]{id:signal}
Daubechies, I. (1990).
\newblock The wavelet transform, time-frequency localization and signal
  analysis.
\newblock {\em IEEE Trans. Inform. Theory}, 36:961--1005.

\bibitem[GarMac91]{gm91}
Garc\'{\i}a-Archilla, B. and Mackenzie, J.~A. (1991).
\newblock Analysis of a supraconvergent cell vertex finite volume method for
  one-dimensional convection-diffusion problems.
\newblock Technical Report NA91/13, Oxford University Computing Laboratory, 11
  Keble Road, Oxford, OX1 3QD.
\newblock submitted for publication.

\bibitem[Hein77]{hhmz77}
Heinrich, J.~C., Huyakorn, P.~S., Mitchell, A.~R., and Zienkiewicz, O.~C.
  (1977).
\newblock An upwind finite element scheme for two-dimensional convective
  transport equations.
\newblock {\em Internat. J. Numer. Methods Engrg.}, 11:131--143.


\end{thebibliography}}
}

%% ok

\code
\begin{verbatim}
\kluwerbib %% before \begin{document}
...
\bibliographystyle{kapalike}
\bibliography{ProcBib}
\end{verbatim}
\endcode
\results
\vskip24pt
\twospbibliography
\endresults
\newpage

Here is the bibliography if we uncomment \verb+\normallatexbib+:

\code
\begin{verbatim}
\normallatexbib %% before \begin{document}
...
\bibliographystyle{alpha}
\bibliography{ProcBib}
\end{verbatim}
\endcode
\results
\vskip24pt
\spbibliography
\endresults

\newpage
%% <<==




\makeatletter
\def\ysubsection#1#2{{\let\uppercase\relax%
\@startsection {subsection}{2}{\z@}{-36pt plus -1pt minus 
 -1pt}{1sp}{\large\sc}#1{#2}}}
\makeatother

\newpage

\makeatletter
\def\ysubsection#1#2{{\let\uppercase\relax%
\@startsection {subsection}{2}{\z@}{-24pt}{1sp}{\large\sc}#1{#2}}}

\def\@verbatim{\vskip6pt %\trivlist \item\relax
  \if@minipage\else\vskip\parskip\fi
  \leftskip\@totalleftmargin\rightskip\z@skip
  \parindent\z@\parfillskip\@flushglue\parskip\z@skip
  \@@par
  \@tempswafalse
  \def\par{%
    \if@tempswa
      \leavevmode \null \@@par\penalty\interlinepenalty
    \else
      \@tempswatrue
      \ifhmode\@@par\penalty\interlinepenalty\fi
    \fi}%
  \let\do\@makeother \dospecials
  \obeylines \verbatim@font \@noligs
  \everypar \expandafter{\the\everypar \unpenalty}%
}

\def\verbatim{\@verbatim \frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces \@xverbatim}
\def\endverbatim{\if@newlist \leavevmode\fi\vskip6pt}

\makeatother

\section{Making Your Index}

There are two choices when making your index with this Kluwer
style: The \LaTeX\ Makeindex system and the Kluwer Indexing
Macro set. Please be careful not to confuse the two methods.

\subsection{Makeindex}
Authors wanting to use
the Makeindex commands may do so with this macro
set. Consult the documentation, makeinde.tex, that comes
with the \LaTeX\ distribution.

Your input will look something like this:

For \LaTeX 2.09 Users:
\begin{verbatim}
\documentstyle[makeidx]{kbk}
\makeindex
\begin{document}
Borden's symbol, Elsie the cow, is a Jersey, a kind of
cow characterized by a carmel colored coat and large dark eyes.\index{Jersey}
...
\printindex
\end{verbatim}

For \LaTeX2e Users:
\begin{verbatim}
\documentclass{kbk}
\usepackage{makeidx}
\makeindex
\begin{document}
Borden's symbol, Elsie the cow, is a Jersey, a kind of
cow characterized by a carmel colored coat and large dark eyes.\index{Jersey}
...
\printindex
\end{verbatim}
\newpage

\section{Kluwer Indexing Method}
Here is another
set of commands that will produce a two-column index.
There are many useful features found in this set of
indexing commands which you will see demonstrated in
the following sections.

\subsection{Indexing Commands}
This macro package includes an indexing method which should make
it very easy to compile an index. 

The Index commands:

\verb+\inx{term}+ will print `term' in text but will also send `term' and its
page number to the .inx file.

\verb+\inxx{term}+ 
will not print in text but will send term and its page number to
the .inx file.

\verb+\inxx{term,second term}+ 
will not print in text but will send `second term'
to inx file to print underneath `term' in the index.

To make the index:

1) Enter index markup in the text,

2) Run Latex on file,

3) Run sort routine on file (ie. {\tt`sort < filename.inx > filename.srt'} on
DOS, other commands on other systems), to produce a filename.srt file.

4)\verb+\kluwerprintindex+ 
at end of book will input filename.srt and print index.
The index will be in two columns, sequences of page numbers for the same
entry will automatically have a dash between them, and subheadings will
fall underneath their major headings.

\subsection{Marking the text}
There are two kinds of index entries in the text:

\vskip-\parskip
\btt{inx\lc{\tt word or words}\rc}, and 

\vskip-\parskip
\btt{inxx\lc{\tt word or words}\rc}.


The first form will print the term between curly brackets
on the page and will also send it to an {\tt.inx} file
along with the current page number.

The second, called a `silent' entry, will not print on the page but will send
the material between curly brackets to the {\tt.inx}
file along with the current page number.

\begin{description}
\item[CAREFUL:]
Do not leave an empty space between the silent index entry
and the word preceding it. An extra space will appear in your text
if there is a space both before and after the \btt{inxx} command.
Your input should look like this: 

{\tt\dots 
some words\btt{inxx\lc index entry\rc \dots}}\vskip-\parskip\noindent
Not\vskip-\parskip\noindent
{\tt\dots 
some words \btt{inxx\lc index entry\rc \dots}}

Remember that starting a new line in your editor will also generate
an empty space, so do not do this either:

{\tt\dots 
some words\vskip-\parskip\noindent
\btt{inxx\lc index entry\rc \dots}}
\end{description}
\newpage
You can enter index commands in a figure or table caption, but
please precede it with \verb+\protect+

\code
\begin{verbatim}
\begin{figure}[h]
\caption{\protect\inx{Oscillograph} for memory address access operations, 
showing 500 ps address access time and \protect\inx{superimposed signals}%
\protect\inxx{address,superimposed signals} of address access in 1 kbit
memory plane.}
\end{figure}
\end{verbatim}
\endcode
\results
\begin{figure}[h]
\caption{\protect\inx{Oscillograph} for memory address access operations, 
showing 500 ps address access time and \protect\inx{superimposed signals}%
\protect\inxx{address,superimposed signals} of address access in 1 kbit
memory plane.}
\end{figure}
\endresults

Do not use one or more \verb+\inxx{term}+s immediately after a section head:
\vskip6pt
\hrule
\vskip-6pt
\vskip1sp
\begin{verbatim}
\section{Introduction}% Do Not use \inxx{term} immediately after a section
  % head because that will allow LaTeX to separate the section head from the
  % following text.
Here is some normal text.\inxx{indexterm}
Here is some normal text.
\end{verbatim}
\hrule

\subsection{Subheadings in the Index}
To form an index entry as a subheading of another 
index entry, repeat the first entry and
follow it with the new entry.

For example:

After you have typed
\btt{inx\lc trees\rc} or \btt{inxx\lc trees\rc},

you may type
\btt{inxx\lc trees,green\rc} to cause `green' and
its associated page number to be placed in the index
under the entry for `trees.' 


A third level of subheading is
produced in the same way: 
\vskip-\parskip
\noindent
\btt{inxx\lc trees,green,pointy\rc}.
This will format `pointy' underneath the entry for `green'.
\newpage
\subsection{\LaTeX ing the file}
When you \LaTeX\ {\tt filename.tex}  containing the
marked entries you will produce a {\tt filename.inx}.  

\vskip12pt
\vskip1sp
\subsection{Sorting the {\tt.inx} file}
You can sort the {\tt filename.inx} file
with a sorting routine on your system.\vskip-\parskip\noindent
The MS-DOS command is {\tt sort $<$ filename.inx $>$ filename.srt}.\vskip-
\parskip\noindent
The Vax VMS command is {\tt sort filename.inx filename.srt}.\vskip-\parskip\noindent
The UNIX command is {\tt sort -f filename.inx > filename.srt}.\vskip-\parskip\noindent
Apparently there is no sort routine as part of the Macintosh
software but there are public domain Macintosh sorting packages available.

\vskip12pt
\vskip1sp
\subsection{Marking the {\tt.srt} file}
If you want to make additions to the index entries
such as ``See Also Douglas Firs'' or
to change the fonts of certain entries or
to add a large letter and a ruled line before
each new alphabetical group, you can do this in {\tt filename.srt}.
However, you do not need to even look at this file if you
do not wish to make changes to the index.

For more information see ``Making typeface changes to index entries'' and
``Adding material to your sorted file'' below.

\vskip12pt
\vskip1sp
\subsection{Printing the Index}
The command: \btt{kluwerprintindex} will print the index.
This command will input the {\tt filename.srt} file
to generate your index,
formed in double columns, with a dash between sequential page numbers
and with subsidiary entries formatted below their major entry.

More information on each step follows. 

\vskip12pt
\vskip1sp
\subsection{Entering words to be indexed in the text}
As described earlier, entries are to be marked either

\btt{inx\lc (entry)\rc} 

or

\btt{inxx\lc (entry)\rc} 

\begin{description}
\item[CAREFUL:]When you mark an index entry with \btt{inx} the
word or words will print in the text as well as in the auxiliary file.

However, don't try to use this method of marking a word or phrase if it
is in the argument of another macro.  

To index a word or words that are inside a
macro argument, use the second
method: rewrite the word or words outside the macro and precede
it with \btt{inxx}.
If in doubt follow the second method
which may be slightly more effort, but whose results will be more predictable.
\end{description}
\newpage
\subsection{To call attention to a particular pagenumbers in the index:} 
You may
mark index entries with one or two asterisks.

\btt{inx\lc index entry$\ast$\rc} or \btt{inxx\lc index entry$\ast$\rc} 
will cause the page number to be
underlined.

\btt{inx\lc index entry$\ast\ast$\rc} or \btt{inxx\lc index entry$\ast\ast$\rc} 
will cause the page number to 
appear in boldface.  You may want to use this as a method of
calling attention to the definition of a term (underlined) or
an example of the term in use (boldface).


\subsection{Examples of first, second or third level index entries} 
As mentioned above, second
level entries are produced by writing the primary term,
then a comma, then
the word you are indexing. For example, index entries written on a page 33:

{\obeylines\parskip=0pt
\btt{inx\lc First Level\rc} (or \btt{inxx\lc First Level\rc})
\btt{inxx\lc First Level,Second Level\rc}
will yield the index entries
\hskip2pc First Level, 33
\hskip3pc Second Level, 33
with the page numbers produced automatically. 

\vskip6pt
The third level is produced similarly:
\btt{inx\lc First Level\rc} (or \btt{inx\lc First Level\rc})
\btt{inxx\lc First Level,Second Level\rc}
\btt{inxx\lc First Level,Second Level,Third Level\rc}

Results in:
\hskip2pc First Level, 33
\hskip3pc Second Level, 33
\hskip4pc Third Level, 101}

%\newpage

\begin{description}
\item{\bf CAREFUL:}

\item{\bf Spaces:}
Notice that there
are no spaces after the comma in the index entry.
It is important to keep spaces from appearing between
entry levels for the index
formatter to work correctly.

\item{\bf Consistency:}
Capital and small letters will not be distinguished by the index
formatter but will be sorted differently. Therefore you must be
careful to be consistent in capitalization.  

\item{\bf Commas:}
Since commas are used to separate arguments in the index
entries, you must write \btt{,} when you actually want a comma
to appear in the formatted index. For example:

\btt{inxx\lc Nixon\btt, Richard Milhous\rc}

will print in the index as:

\hskip2pc Nixon, Richard Milhous, 72

If you forgot to put the backslash in front of the comma after
`Nixon' as in the following:

\btt{inxx\lc Nixon, Richard Milhous\rc}

The results will be

{}\hskip2pc Nixon
\vskip-\parskip
{}\hskip3pc Richard Milhous, 72
\end{description}

\newpage
\subsection{How to make a first or second level entry {\it Without}
page numbers} 
You may occassionally want to have a major or secondary index entry
that doesn't have a page number associated with it, but is used
as a heading for the following entries. 

To do this, type the second or third level entries
as you would do ordinarily, but do not
make an index entry for the first level term by itself.  

For example, if these \btt{inxx} entries have been used in the text:
{\obeylines\parskip=0pt
\btt{inxx\lc Cows,Holstein-Friesen\rc}
\btt{inxx\lc Cows,Jersey\rc}
\btt{inxx\lc Cows,Holy\rc}

The index will look like this:
\hskip2pc Cows
\hskip3pc Holstein-Friesen, 33
\hskip3pc Jersey, 43
\hskip3pc Holy, 23

}


The same sequence follows for second and third level entries; when
the third level is being looked at by the index formatter it will
check to see if the second level has been printed. If it hasn't
the formatter will supply the second level entry without a page number.

%\newpage
The second level without a page number is produced like this:
{\obeylines\parskip=0pt
\btt{inxx\lc Cows,Four-legged,black and white\rc}
\btt{inxx\lc Cows,Four-legged,gentle brown\rc}
\btt{inxx\lc Cows,Four-legged,invisible\rc}
\vskip12pt
Results in:
\hskip2pc Cows
\hskip3pc Four-legged
\hskip4pc black and white, 101
\hskip4pc gentle brown, 201
\hskip4pc invisible, 32

}




\subsection{Index Error Control}
You might have inadvertantly neglected to supply a first level
entry and asked for second or third level entries that were to
appear under the first level entry.  In this case the index formatter
will supply the first level entry without a page number, just as
if that was your intention. Similarly, if third level entries
have been called for without the preceding second level entry
ever being asked for by itself, the second level entry will print
without a page number, as if that was your intention.

\vtop to0pt{
Thus, you have a method of index error control, that will let
you know if you neglected to enter a term with \btt{inxx} that
you intended. Scan your completed index to see if there are
entries without page numbers. If this was not your intention, either
edit your original file to supply the appropriate \btt{inxx} term,
or edit the .srt file to supply the term and page number.
\vss}
\newpage

\subsection{OK, the index entries are marked, now what?}

The first thing to do is \LaTeX\ the file that contains the marked index
entries.

You will automatically produce an auxilary file named {\tt filename.inx}
with `filename' being the name of the file you \LaTeX ed and the
{\tt.inx} extension being added automatically.


\subsection{How to sort the {\tt.inx} file}
The next step is to sort the contents of the file.
On a VAX running VMS, you do this by typing\vskip-\parskip\noindent
{\tt sort filename.inx filename.srt}.\vskip-\parskip\noindent
The UNIX command is {\tt sort -f filename.inx > filename.srt}.
\vskip-\parskip\noindent
The MS-DOS command is {\tt sort <filename.inx > filename.srt}.
\vskip-\parskip\noindent
If you are using another system, you must find the sorting
command for that system.

\subsection{Looking at the {\tt.srt} file}
You can look at the sorted file in your editor. Notice that the
page numbers that are less than 10 will be preceded with two zeros,
and those that are more than 10 but less than 100 will be preceded
with one zero.   These
`leading zeros' will not print but are necessary for the sort algorithm to
work correctly. 

\subsection{Special use characters: $>$\ and \~{}}
There is a `$>$' at the top of the {\tt.srt} file and 
a `\~{}' at the end of the file. These are commands to make the
index formatter work correctly. $>$ must immediately precede the index entries
and \~{} must immediately follow them, so do not change their position.

You can use \~{}\ as you would normally, except you {\bf may not}
use \~{}\ at the beginning of an index entry (and I can think of
no reason that you would want to) except as an accent (\btt{\~{} ...}).

\subsection{Making changes in the {\tt.srt} file}You can make
typeface changes, add or delete index entries, add comments
to the index with the \btt{addtoindex} command, and separate
the index into alphabetical sections with the use of the \btt{ltr}
command.  However, remember: These changes will disappear
the next time you sort the {.inx} file to produce
a new {\tt.srt} file.

\subsection{Making typeface changes to index entries}
If you want to change the typeface of an index entry, you can do
this in your sorted file with these commands:

\begin{verbatim}
\indexit{index entry} |1{003}  
\indexbf{index entry} |1{003}  
\indextt{index entry} |1{003}  
\indexsl{index entry} |1{003}  
\end{verbatim}

As you may have guessed, \btt{indexit} will produce {\it italics},
\btt{indexbf} will produce {\bf bold face},
\btt{indextt} will produce {\tt typewriter font},
and
\btt{indexsl} will produce {\sl slanted typeface}.

Assuming that you will be using this command on first level
index entries, each of these commands will cause the first
letter to be capitalized. If you want the first letter to
be lower-case use this form:

\begin{verbatim}
\lcindexit{index entry} |1{003}  
\lcindexbf{index entry} |1{003}  
\lcindextt{index entry} |1{003}  
\lcindexsl{index entry} |1{003}  
\end{verbatim}

If you change the typeface on any index entry, remember
to do the same thing for every entry of the term on the
same level.
The reason that this is important is that the index formatter
will not recognize two entries as being the same
if one is `\btt{indexbf\lc index entry\rc}'

and the next is `{\tt index entry}'. If the formatter sees
the entries as different, the second entry would print on its own line.


\subsection{Using \btt{addtoindex}}
If you want to add a comment to your index
you can enter the commands \btt{addtoindex...}\btt{endadd}.
These commands will temporarily interrupt the index formatter
and allow you to enter text or extra vertical space at
any point in the index. See examples of this in `Indexing Examples' following.

You must end \btt{addtoindex} with \btt{endadd}.  Here is a complete
example;

\begin{verbatim}
Grass |1{001}
\addtoindex
\seealso{Blue-green grass.}
\endadd
\end{verbatim}


\subsection{Making a page range to use with ff}
If you want to direct your reader to a page range
in which he/she will find information on a particular topic,
you can use \btt{addtoindex}:

\begin{verbatim}
\addtoindex
Grass, 51--65 {\it ff}
\endadd
\end{verbatim}

or

\begin{verbatim}
\addtoindex
\seealso{Grass, 51--65 {\it ff}}
\endadd
\end{verbatim}

\subsection{Separating index into alphabetical sections}
Before the first entry for each new letter, use\vskip-\parskip\noindent
\btt{addtoindex}, \btt{vskip}\btt{medskip}, \btt{endadd}.\vskip-\parskip\noindent
For instance, before the B's:\vskip-\parskip\noindent

\begin{verbatim}
\addtoindex
\vskip\medskip
\endadd
\end{verbatim}



\newpage
\subsection{Other editing changes in the {\tt .srt} file}
You can also edit the {\tt.srt} file in other ways, if you'd like.  You can
add or delete entries, or change the page number to appear underlined
or bold by adding \btt{global}\btt{spcount =1} or 
\btt{global}\btt{spcount =2} within 
the curly brackets that surround the page number.


\subsection{Formatting the Index}
Once you have made any desired changes to your {\tt.srt} file you
can format the index in the originating file by writing this
command where you want the index to appear:

\begin{verbatim}
\kluwerprintindex
\end{verbatim}


\subsection{Changing the Format of the Index}

\subsection{Automatic Capitalization of the First Letter}
Your index will be formatted automatically with the first letter
of each first level index term being capitalized. 
The second and third level
index terms will not print in uppercase unless they were typed that way 
with the \btt{inxx} command.
If for
any reason you do not like this, you can read the instructions
at the end of the macro file where you see this:

\begin{verbatim}
%% CHANGE INDEX FORMAT HERE ====>

%% If you DO NOT want the first letter of each first level index
%% entry to be capitalized, delete the % in front of the following line, 
%% and put % in front of the next line:

%\let\capthis\relax
\def\capthis#1{\uppercase{#1}}%

\indexindent=8pt %% indentation for index subentries
\indexwrap=24pt  %% indentation when term is too wide for column,
                 %% continues on following lines indented this much.
\end{verbatim}

These commands can be changed to meet your requirements.

\vskip24pt
\vskip1sp
\subsection{Indexing Examples}

\subsection{Sample of text marked for indexing}

\begin{verbatim}
Here is \inx{Edward Bear*}, coming downstairs, bump, bump,bump,
on the back of his head, behind \inx{Christopher Robin}.  It is, 
as far as he knows, the only way of \inx{coming downstairs}, but 
sometimes he feels\inxx{coming downstairs,bumping}\inxx{coming 
downstairs,stop bumping} that there really is another way, if 
only he could stop bumping for a moment and think of it. 

\newpage
And then he feels that perhaps there isn't.  Anyhow, here he is 
at the bottom, and ready to be introduced to you\inxx{coming 
downstairs,stop bumping,at the bottom}. \inx{Winnie-the-Pooh**}.

\newpage
\subsection{One Day}
One day when he was out walking, he came to an open place in the 
middle of the forest, and in the middle of this place was a 
large \inx{oak-tree}, and, from the top of the tree, there came a 
loud buzzing-noise.\inxx{oak-tree,large}\inxx{oak-tree,large,top}
\inxx{buzzing}\inxx{buzzing-noise}

\newpage
Winnie-the-Pooh sat down at the foot of the tree, put his head 
between his paws and began to think.\inxx{oak-tree,large,foot}
\inxx{trees,oak}\inxx{trees,maple}\inxx{trees,pine}
\end{verbatim}

\catcode`~=13 \let~\relax

\subsection{Sample {.inx} file}
When \TeX\ is run on the preceding text an {\tt.inx} file will be made.
It will look like this:

\vskip-12pt
\vskip1sp
\begin{verbatim}
>
~
Edward Bear |{001\global \spcount =1}
Christopher Robin |{001}
coming downstairs |{001}
coming downstairs,bumping |{001}
coming downstairs,stop bumping |{001}
coming downstairs,stop bumping,at the bottom |{002}
Winnie-the-Pooh |{002\global \spcount =2}
oak-tree |{003}
oak-tree,large |{003}
oak-tree,large,top |{003}
...
\end{verbatim}

\newpage
\subsection{Sample {.srt} file}
The {\tt.inx} file must be sorted to produce a {.srt} file.
That file will look like the following example. Notice
the leading zeros which are needed for the sorting algorithm
to work correctly. 

\begin{verbatim}
>
buzzing |{003}
buzzing-noise |{003}
coming downstairs |{001}
coming downstairs,bumping |{001}
coming downstairs,stop bumping |{001}
coming downstairs,stop bumping,at the bottom |{002}
Christopher Robin |{001}
Edward Bear |{001\global\spcount =1}
oak-tree |{003}
oak-tree,large |{003}
oak-tree,large,foot |{004}
oak-tree,large,top |{003}
...
~
\end{verbatim}

\subsection{Sample formatted index}
The command \btt{kluwerprintindex} will cause the {.srt} file to be
input into the original file.
Notice  `trees'  which was never
a first level entry, but is used as the first part of several second
level entries, and so is formatted as an entry without a page number.  
The index will be formatted and look like this:


\vtop to0pt{\bgroup
\parskip=0pt
\hsize=.4\hsize
\beginindex
buzzing |{003}
buzzing-noise |{003}
coming downstairs |{001}
coming downstairs,bumping |{001}
coming downstairs,stop bumping |{001}
coming downstairs,stop bumping,at the bottom |{002}
Christopher Robin |{001}
Edward Bear |{001\global\spcount =1}
oak-tree |{003}
oak-tree,large |{003}
oak-tree,large,foot |{004}
oak-tree,large,top |{003}
trees,maple |{004}
trees,oak |{004}
trees,pine |{004}
Winnie-the-Pooh |{002\global\spcount =2}
\addtoindex
\endadd
~
\vskip1sp
\vss}

\newpage
\subsection{Making changes or additions to the 
{\tt.srt} file}

Here is the same .srt file with some comments added
with \btt{addtoindex}, and Winnie-the-Pooh changed to boldface:

\begin{verbatim}
>
buzzing |{003}
buzzing-noise |{003}
\addtoindex
\seealso{oak-tree}
\endadd
coming downstairs |{001}
coming downstairs,bumping |{001}
coming downstairs,stop bumping |{001}
coming downstairs,stop bumping,at the bottom |{002}
Christopher Robin |{001}
\addtoindex
Christopher Robin's relationship to animals, 1--99 {\it ff}
\endadd
Edward Bear |{001\global\spcount =1}
oak-tree |{003}
oak-tree,large |{003}
oak-tree,large,foot |{004}
oak-tree,large,top |{003}
trees,maple |{004}
trees,oak |{004}
trees,pine |{004}
\indexbf{Winnie-the-Pooh} |{002\global\spcount =2}
~
\end{verbatim}

\vskip2pt
Which will produce this index:
\vskip12pt
\vskip1sp
{\bgroup \parskip=0pt
\hsize=.4\hsize
\beginindex
buzzing |{003}
buzzing-noise |{003}
\addtoindex
\seealso{oak-tree}
\endadd
coming downstairs |{001}
coming downstairs,bumping |{001}
coming downstairs,stop bumping |{001}
coming downstairs,stop bumping,at the bottom |{002}
Christopher Robin |{001}
\addtoindex
Christopher Robin's relationship to animals, 1--99 {\it ff}
\endadd
Edward Bear |{001\global\spcount =1}
oak-tree |{003}
oak-tree,large |{003}
oak-tree,large,foot |{004}
oak-tree,large,top |{003}
trees,maple |{004}
trees,oak |{004}
trees,pine |{004}
\indexbf{Winnie-the-Pooh} |{002\global\spcount =2}
\addtoindex
\endadd
~
}


To make a separation between index entries starting with
a new letter of the alphabet, you can use \verb+\addtoindex+
and \verb+\endadd+ with a space of your choice:

\begin{verbatim}
>
buzzing |{003}
\addtoindex
\seealso{Bees}
\endadd
buzzing-noise |{003}
\addtoindex %<====
\medskip  %<====
\endadd     %<====
\indexit{Christopher Robin} |{001}
coming downstairs |{001}
coming downstairs,bumping |{001}
coming downstairs,stop bumping |{001}
coming downstairs,stop bumping,at the bottom |{002}
\addtoindex %<====
\medskip  %<====
\endadd     %<====
Edward Bear |{001\global\spcount =1}
\addtoindex %<====
\medskip  %<====
\endadd     %<====
oak-tree |{003}
oak-tree,large |{003}
oak-tree,large,foot |{004}
oak-tree,large,top |{003}
\addtoindex %<====
\medskip  %<====
\endadd     %<====
Winnie-the-Pooh |{002\global\spcount =2}
~
\end{verbatim}
\vskip24pt
{\bgroup\parskip=0pt
\hsize=.4\hsize
\beginindex
buzzing |{003}
\addtoindex
\seealso{Bees}
\endadd
buzzing-noise |{003}
\addtoindex
\medskip
\endadd
\indexit{Christopher Robin} |{001}
coming downstairs |{001}
coming downstairs,bumping |{001}
coming downstairs,stop bumping |{001}
coming downstairs,stop bumping,at the bottom |{002}
\addtoindex
\medskip
\endadd
Edward Bear |{001\global\spcount =1}
\addtoindex
\medskip
\endadd
oak-tree |{003}
oak-tree,large |{003}
oak-tree,large,foot |{004}
oak-tree,large,top |{003}
\addtoindex
\medskip
\endadd
Winnie-the-Pooh |{002\global\spcount =2} 
\addtoindex
\endadd
~
}

\section{Author and Topic Indices}
Some authors would like to have both a topic and author
index. This can be done by using a variation on the
indexing macros described on the previous pages.

To enter author index commands, use the commands 
\verb+\anx{Author Name}+ which is also printed in the text (equivalent to \verb+\inx{...}+),
or \verb+\anxx{Author Name}+, for a `silent entry' which will not
be printed in the text but the author name and current page number 
will be sent to the {\tt filename.aut} file, with {\tt filename} being the
same as the name of the \LaTeX\ file that you are working on.

Remember to use \verb+\,+ instead of a normal comma to produce a
comma in the author index.\newline
\verb+\anxx{Dillon\, Matt}+ will produce ``Dillon, Matt'' in the
index; \verb+\anxx{Dillon, Matt}+ will produce ``Dillon,'' with
``Matt'' on the next line.

When you enter
\verb+\anx{Author Name}+ or
\verb+\anxx{Author Name}+ commands, you will find that there is
a filename.aut formed when you run \LaTeX\ on your file. 
The {\tt filename.aut} file is equivalent to the filename.inx
that was discussed earlier, except it will have author names
instead of subject matter as the items in the index.

The topic index will be formed the same as the kluwerindex discussed
above, from \verb+\inx{index entry}+ and \verb+\inxx{index entry}+
commands which will be sent to an .inx file when you run \LaTeX\
on your file.

\subsection{How to sort the {\tt.aut} and {\tt.inx} files}
You must sort the filename.aut file to make a filename.att
for the author index, and sort the filename.inx file to
make a filename.srt file for the topic index.

The UNIX command is {\tt sort -f filename.aut > filename.att}, and\newline
{\tt sort -f filename.inx > filename.srt}.

The MS-DOS command is {\tt sort filename.aut > filename.att},
and\newline {\tt sort filename.inx > filename.srt}.
\vskip-\parskip\noindent
If you are using another system, you must find the sorting
command for that system.

{\bf !
Make sure that the .srt and .att files start with \verb+>+ and end with
\verb+~+. (Some sorting routines do not produce these results)}

\vskip12pt
\vskip1sp
\subsection{Printing the Author and Topic Index}
Once you have a filename.att and a filename.srt file available,
these commands will allow you to print the author and topic index:
\begin{verbatim}
\printauthorindex
\printtopicindex
\end{verbatim}

The topic index may be printed first by reversing the order in
which you use these commands.


\newpage

\section{Using the Kluwer Proceedings Style with Scientific 
Word/Workplace}

\subsection{Evaluation of SWP}
Scientific Word/Workplace is a program that makes writing a
\LaTeX\ document easy, even if the author knows nothing about
\TeX\ or \LaTeX. (Scientific Word and Scientific Workplace differ
only in that the Maple Math software is included in Scientific
Workplace. We will refer to both programs with the abbreviation
`SWP'.)

SWP is essentially a word and math processor
in which the author enters text and clickable tags and the program
compiles and produces a valid \LaTeX\ file.
This means that the author can be almost completely
ignorant of TeX commands and syntax and yet produce a perfectly
acceptable .tex file.

In addition there are a number of other features that make this
package attractive to authors: ScientificWorkplace includes the
Maple math software so that within one's document calculations
may be done and mathematical graphs may be constructed that will
be printable in the final \LaTeX\ document.

There is downtime necessary to get accustomed to the software and
some set-up time needed to get SWP to work with the Kluwer
kapproc.cls file, but some authors may feel that this is more than
compensated for by ease of use of the program and ease of entry
of mathematical symbols and notation. For those authors who
want to use kapproc.cls with SWP, the following information is necessary.

\subsection{Getting kapproc.cls to work with SWP}
Here are the names of the files that are necessary to use
when formatting your book with SWP using the kapproc files.
\vskip12pt
\hrule
\begin{verbatim}
Concise explanation of how to use kapproc.cls with SWP
   kapproc.swp

Basic kapproc macro file, identical to that used outside of SWP.
   kapproc.cls        

Shell files used by SWP:
   procdocs.shl   
   procsamp.shl
   procbook.shl

SWP compatible versions of the procsamp.tex and procdocs.tex files:
   procsamp.sav
   procdocs.sav
\end{verbatim}
\hrule
\newpage
\subsection{Step 1:}
Drop these files into appropriate directories:

\vskip12pt
\hrule
\begin{verbatim}
Drop these files into directory \swp40\shells\books 
   procdocs.shl   
   procsamp.shl
   procbook.shl

Drop these files directory \swp40\tcitex\tex\latex\tci 
   kapproc.cls
   procsamp.sav
   procdocs.sav
\end{verbatim}
\hrule
\vskip12pt
\vskip1sp
\subsection{Step 2: Setting Defaults in SWP}
Start Scientific Workplace, then

\vskip12pt
\hrule
\begin{verbatim}
In the File menu, click New
When the New window pops up, 
   under Shell Directories: highlight Books
   under Shell Files: highlight procbook
   Click OK

In the Tools menu, click User Setup
   under Start-up Document
        under Shell Directories: highlight Books
        under Shell Files: highlight procbook
   Click OK

   under Files
       near bottom of window you will see `Default Document Types'
         In the Open Type: bring up-- LaTeX(*.tex)  
         In the Save As Type: bring up-- Portable LaTeX(*.tex)  
   Click OK
\end{verbatim}
\hrule
\newpage
\subsection{Step 3: Viewing and/or Printing Sample Pages}
To see kapproc sample pages followed by verbatim marked up text that
produced the pages, showing the commands that were needed:

\vskip12pt
\hrule
\begin{verbatim}
Under File, select New

   When the New window pops up, 
     under Shell Directories: highlight Books
     under Shell Files: highlight procsamp
   Click OK

Either:
Click the third button from the far right of the menu to Typeset
this document to print the sample pages

or,
Click the second button from the far right of the menu to Preview
this document to view the sample pages
\end{verbatim}
\hrule
\vskip12pt
\vskip1sp
\subsection{Step 4: Viewing and/or Printing kapproc Documentation}

To see Kluwer Documentation for Proceedings done with the 
kapproc.cls style:

\vskip12pt
\hrule
\begin{verbatim}
Under File, select New

   When the New window pops up, 
     under Shell Directories: highlight Books
     under Shell Files: highlight procdocs
   Click OK

Either:
Click the third button from the far right of the menu to Typeset
this document to print the documentation.

or,
Click the second button from the far right of the menu to Preview
this document to view the documentation.
\end{verbatim}
\hrule
\vskip12pt
\vskip1sp
\subsection{Notes on Documentation}

You will see references in the documentation to both font
issues and the use of the template file. Neither of these
comments applies to your document in SWP. You can see the
commands you need to enter by looking at the Preview or
typeset version of procsamp, as noted above. You will have
to enter these commands without the help of a template file.
Font issues are discussed below. 

\newpage

\subsection{Starting Your Book}
To start your document,

\vskip12pt
\hrule
\begin{verbatim}
In the File menu, click New
When the New window pops up, 
   under Shell Directories: highlight Books
   under Shell Files: highlight procbook
   Click OK

Use `Save as' under the File menu, to give this file the name you want.
\end{verbatim}
\hrule
\vskip12pt
\vskip1sp
\subsection{Entering \TeX\ Commands}
Although you can pick many commands from the Tag menu and
thus don't have to type them in, there are some commands
that are included in the kapproc.cls file that are not
found on that menu. In addition there may be other circumstances
in which you would like to enter a \LaTeX\ command, i.e., 
\verb+\setcounter{page}{<number>}+. 

In SWP, you are not
allowed to simply type \LaTeX\ commands into your file. However,
you can highlight the Insert menu, go down to the bottom of it,
highlight `fields' and then go to `TeX'. A screen will pop up,
into which you can write any \LaTeX\ command that you'd like to
have in your file. Click on `ok' and the screen will disappear
leaving a grey box on the screen saying `TeX field'. When you
run `preview' from the file menu, whatever was in the `TeX field'
will be expanded and will appear in your file.

\subsection{Fonts}
If you follow the directions above, your book will be typeset using
ComputerModern fonts.

If you would like to use PostScript fonts, which will give your book
a somewhat more finished appearance, you should run \LaTeX\ your files
using \LaTeX\ outside of ScientificWord/Workplace. Fortunately, when
using SWP, you can save your files in a form that will be understood
by any standard \LaTeX\ system.

To rerun your file produced with SWP, you need to do two things:

\begin{itemize}
\item
Edit the procps.sty file to have it match the names of the PS fonts
for Times, Helvetica, and Courier on the system that you are using.

\item
You will find the .tex file you have produced while working with
SWP in the \verb+\swp40\docs+ directory. Edit this file to add the line 
\verb+\usepackage{procps}+:

\begin{verbatim}
\documentclass{kapproc}
\usepackage{procps}
\end{verbatim}
\end{itemize}

This file is then ready to run with \LaTeX\ outside of SWP in order
to produce your book with PS fonts.

\newpage
\section{Final Book Production: Table of Contents}
You can determine how many levels of section heads you would like to
appear in the table of contents by using the 
\verb+\setcounter{tocdepth}{<number>}+ command. The numbers
indicate:

\vskip-\parskip
0= chapter titles, 1= section titles, 2= subsection titles, 
3= subsubsection titles, will be included.

You may make Table of Contents using the normal \LaTeX\ command,
\verb+\tableofcontents+, but there is another command that
you may also use, \verb+\sptableofcontents+.

The difference between the two commands is that \verb+\tableofcontents+
will have the page number of roman numeral five `{\tt v}'. 

\verb+\sptableofcontents+ will
start on an odd page but the page number that it starts on is not pre-set. 
This allows
extra material to be placed before the Table of Contents and to
have the TOC numbered appropriately.

\subsubsection{Changing fonts for Table of Contents}
If you would like to change the size of fonts used in the Table of
Contents, you can change the size of the fonts in procps.sty if
you are using \verb+\usepackage{procps}+. If you are not using
procps, you can change the size of the fonts in kapproc.cls (or kapproc.sty
if you are using \LaTeX2.09). In either case, you should search
for these font declarations, and change them to suit your needs.

\begin{verbatim}
%% Table of Contents
  \font\toctitlefont=\helveticamedium at 16pt % Title of Table of Contents
  \font\tocarticletitlefont=\helvetica at 10pt %
  \font\tocauthorfont=\timesitalic at9pt %
\end{verbatim}

\section{Advice to Book Editor}
Just a word of caution: Several authors may have inadvertantly
chosen the same citation name. If this occurs, you will have
to edit one of the authors' file and change the offending
bibitem entries, so that each bibitem name is unique to the
complete book.
\vskip24pt
\section{Enjoy!}
\end{document}



procsamp.tex
%% Version 3/21/02

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%% Kluwer Proceedings Sample, ProcSamp.tex
%%
%% Kluwer Academic Press
%%
%% Prepared by Amy Hendrickson, TeXnology Inc., July 1999.
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

%%%%%
%% LaTeX2e 
%% Uncomment documentclass, 
\documentclass{kapproc} % Computer Modern font calls

%% and, optionally, one or more 
%%   of the \usepackage commands below:

%%%%%
%% If you use a font encoding package, please enter it here, i.e.,
%  \usepackage{T1enc}

%%%%%
%  If you have MathTimes and MathTimesPlus fonts, you
%  may uncomment the line below and use them, but you are
%  not obligated to do so, and most authors do not have
%  these fonts. (You may need to edit m-times.sty to make the
%  font names match those on your system)

%  You must have the MathTimes fonts for this to work. They may be
%  purchased from the Y&Y company, http://www.YandY.com.

% \usepackage[mtbold,noTS1]{m-times}

%%%%%
% PostScript font calls
%
% If you use the procps PS font file, you may need to edit it
% to make sure the font names match those on your system. See
% the top of the procps.sty file for more info.

\usepackage{procps} 

%%%%%
% Style for inserting .eps files and rotating illustrations or tables

% possible options for graphicx:
% [dvips], [xdvi], [dvipdf], [dvipsone], [dviwindo], [emtex], [dviwin],
% [pctexps],  [pctexwin],  [pctexhp],  [pctex32], [truetex], [tcidvi],
% [oztex], [textures]

\usepackage[dvips]{graphicx}

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%% LaTeX209, 
%  Uncomment only one below, comment out similar commands above
%  \documentstyle{kapproc} % Computer Modern fonts
%  \documentstyle[procps]{kapproc} %For PostScript fonts
%  (The m-times.sty works only with LaTeX2e)

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%% Commands You Can Set or Change to Customize Your Book Format: ===>>>

% Running heads:
% ==============

%  Uncomment to make chapter title on left hand page
%  and section title on right hand page
%  \chapsectrunningheads


% Section heads:
% ==============

%%%
% \chaptersection % will use chapter.section form for section heads.

%%%
% Uncomment to make section heads appear in
%                    both upper and lower case.
\upperandlowercase

% \useuppercase % Uncomment to make section and subsection heads 
                %  appear in uppercase.

%%%
% How many levels of section head would you like numbered?
% 0= no section numbers, 1= section, 2= subsection, 3= subsubsection
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{1}

% Table of Contents:
% ==================
% How many levels of section head would you like to appear in the
%  Table of Contents?
%  0= chapter titles, 1= section titles, 2= subsection titles, 
%  3= subsubsection titles.

\setcounter{tocdepth}{1}

% Equation numbering:
% ===================

%%%
% \nochapequationnumber % will result in equation numbers that are (1)

%%%
% \sectionequationnumber % will result in equation numbers that are (1.1)
                         % and renumber for each section

% Default for kapproc is (equation number)

% Theorem numbering:
% ==================
% \nochaptheoremnumber % will make the theorem type environments number
       % only with the theorem number. 
       % Default is only theorem number for kapproc.

% Footnotes/Endnotes:
% ===================

% Default is endnotes that appear at the end of the chapter, above
% the references, or whereever \notes is written.

%%%
% To change footnotes to appear at bottom of page uncomment:
% \let\footnote\savefootnote

%%%
% Uncomment if you want footnotetext to appear at the bottom of the page:
%\let\footnotetext\savefootnotetext

%%%
% Uncomment if you want a ruled line above the footnote.
%\let\footnoterule\savefootnoterule

% Bibliography Style Settings:
% ============================
% Choose either kluwerbib or normallatexbib:

%%%
\kluwerbib % will produce this kind of bibliography entry:

%  Anderson, Terry L.,...
%    continuing bib entry here

%  \cite{xxx} will print without brackets around the citation.
% \bibliographystyle{kapalike} % should be used when you use \verb+\kluwerbib+.

%%%
%\normallatexbib %will produce bibliography entries as shown in the
                % LaTeX book

% [1] Anderson, Terry L.,
%     continuing bib entry

% \cite{xxx} will print with square brackets around the citation, i.e., [1].

% Any \verb+\bibliographystyle{}+ may be used with \verb+\normallatexbib+, but
% you should check with your editor to find the style preferred for
% your book.

% Change Brackets around Citation:
% ================================

%% Default with \kluwerbib is no brackets around citation. 
%% Default with \normallatexbib is square brackets around citation. 

% For parens around citation uncomment these:

%\let\lcitebracket(
%\let\rcitebracket)

% For square brackets around citation uncomment these:

%\let\lcitebracket[
%\let\rcitebracket]

% Draft Line:
% ===========
%  Optional, uncomment to make current time and `draft' appear at
%  bottom of page.

% \draft

%%%% <<== End Formatting Commands You Can Set or Change %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

\begin{document}

%% (short version of book title for running head, in square brackets)

\booktitle[Conference on Economic and Political Theory]
{Proceedings of the\\ 21st Annual Conference on\\
Economic and Political Theory}
\subtitle{This is the\\ Subtitle}
\editor{First Editor}
\edaffil{First Affiliation}

\editor{Second Editor}
\edaffil{Second Affiliation}

%% For more than one editor, simply repeat commands
%% as many times as is necessary
%\editor{Third Editor}
%\edaffil{Third Affiliation}

\halftitlepage

%\seriespage
% See end of this file, after \endinput for \seriespage commands if you
% want to format it in LaTeX.

\titlepage

\dedication{This book is dedicated to the memory of
Adam~Smith, who gave the study of economics its impetus.}

\tableofcontents
\listoffigures
\listoftables

\begin{contributingauthors}

\author{Samuel Bostaph} is an Associate Professor and Chairman of the 
Department of Economics, University of Dallas, where he has taught since
1981. He earned his PhD from Sothern Illinois University at Carbondale.
\anxx{Bostaph\, Samuel}% <== \anxx{} to make sample author index entry

\author{Samuel Hollander} is University Professor of Economics in the
University of Toronto. He is the author of {\it The Sources of Increased
Efficiency: A Case-Study of Dupont Rayon Plants, The Economics of Adam Smith,
The Economics of David Ricardo, The Economics of John Stuart Mill,} and
{\it Classical Economics}.
\anxx{Hollander\, Samuel}% <== \anxx{} to make sample author index entry
\end{contributingauthors}





\begin{foreword}
This is a foreword to this volume...

\forewordauthor{Samuel Bostaph\\
Chairman, Department of Economics\\
University of Dallas\\
Dallas, Texas,  May 1999}
\end{foreword}

\begin{preface}
This is an example preface.
This is an example preface.
This is an example preface.
This is an example preface.
\section*{This is a preface section}
This is an example of a preface.
This is an example preface.
This is an example preface.
This is an example preface.
This is an example preface.
\prefaceauthor{David Reisman}
\end{preface}

\begin{acknowledgments}
This is to acknowledge the help of the many
unnamed economists who gave advice in the
process of making of this book.
\end{acknowledgments}

\part[Economics as Discourse]
{Economics as Discourse}

\introduction{David Reisman}
For many, the distinction is clear. Economics is about the market,
about individuals maximizing utility and firms maximizing profit.  
Politics is about the state, about constitutional rules and piecemeal 
interventions. The two realms are separate and distinct...
\anxx{Reisman\, David}% <== \anxx{} to make sample author index entry

\articletitle{Sample Article Title}

\articlesubtitle{This is an Article Subtitle}


\author{First Author}
\affil{Author Affiliation\\
Second Line of Affiliation}
\email{firstauthor@myuniv.edu}

\author{Second Author}
\affil{Author Affiliation\\
Second Line of Affiliation}
\email{secondauthor@anotheruniv.edu}



\begin{abstract}
This is the abstract. This is the abstract.
This is the abstract. This is the abstract.
This is the abstract. This is the abstract.
This is the abstract. This is the abstract.
This is the abstract. This is the abstract.
\end{abstract}

\begin{keywords}
Sample, proceedings
\end{keywords}

\section*{Introduction}
Here is an introduction.
Here is an introduction.
Here is an introduction.
Here is an introduction.
Here is an introduction.

\section{First Section}
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.


\subsection{First SubSection}
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.

\subsubsection{First SubSubSection}
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.

\paragraph{First Paragraph}
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.
Here is some sample text.


\articletitle[Communism, Sparta, and Plato]
{Communism, Sparta,\\ and Plato\thanks{Thanks will work in
articletitle.}}

\author{The Author}

\affil{Author Affiliation}

%% optional, to supply a shorter version of the title for the running head:
%%\chaptitlerunninghead{}

%%\inxx{} seen below, is an indexing command, for `silent' index
%% entries. \inx{} will print on page AND send term to .inx file.


\prologue{The organization of our forces is a thing calling in its
nature for much advice and the framing of many rules, but the principal
[first] is this---that no man, and no woman, be ever suffered
to live without an officer set over them, and no soul of man
to learn the trick of doing one single thing of its own sole
\inx{motion}, in play or in earnest, but in peace as in war...\footnote{This
prologue represents thought developed and written more than two
thousand years ago. That is quite a few years!}\inxx{Plato}\inxx{Plato,Laws}}
{Plato, {\it Laws}, 942a--c}
\anxx{Plato}

\section{Introduction}
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.\footnote{A further, but subsidiary thought
on this subject will find itself in the endnote section which
appears above the references at the end of this article.}
\newpage
\notes

\articletitle[Audio Quality Determination]
{Audio Quality Determination\\
Based on Perceptual \\
Measurement Techniques
}

\author{John G. Beerends,\altaffilmark{1} James Joyce,\altaffilmark{2}
and Arthur Miller\altaffilmark{1,3}}

\altaffiltext{1}{Royal PTT Netherlands N.V.\\
KRN Research, P. Box 421, AK Leidenham\\
The Netherlands}
\email{beerends@ptt.com.nl}

\altaffiltext{2}{Trinity University\\
Dublin, Ireland}
\email{jjoyce@dublin.ir}

\altaffiltext{3}{Syracuse University,\\
Syracuse, NY}
\email{arthurm@math.syracuse.edu}

\begin{abstract}
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract....
\end{abstract}

\begin{keywords}
Sample keywords, sample keywords.
\end{keywords}

\articletitle[Audio Quality Determination]
{Audio Quality Determination\\
Based on Perceptual \\
Measurement Techniques
}
\author{John G. Beerends,\altaffilmark{1} James Joyce,\altaffilmark{2}
and Arthur Miller\altaffilmark{1,3}}

\affil{\altaffilmark{1}Royal PTT Netherlands N.V., \ 
\altaffilmark{2}Trinity University, \ \altaffilmark{3}Syracuse
University}

\begin{abstract}
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
\end{abstract}

\begin{keywords}
Audio quality measurements, perceptual measurement techniques
\end{keywords}

\section{Introduction}
Here is the beginning of the article.

\articletitle[Audio Quality Determination]
{Audio Quality Determination\\
Based on Perceptual \\
Measurement Techniques}

\author{John G. Beerends}

%% affil, email, and abstract are optional
\affil{Royal PTT Netherlands N.V.\\
KRN Research, P. Box 421, AK Leidenham\\
The Netherlands\footnote{Partial funding provided by grant NL-213-456.}}
\email{beerends@ptt.com.nl}

%% optional, to supply a shorter version of the title for the running head:
%%\chaptitlerunninghead{}

\anxx{Beerends\, John G.}

\begin{abstract}
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
Here is quite a long abstract.
\end{abstract}

\begin{keywords}
Audio quality measurements, perceptual measurement techniques
\end{keywords}

\section{Introduction}
Here is the beginning of the article.\footnote{Here is a sample footnote
which will normally format as an endnote at the end of the article.}
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.
Here is some normal text.


\section[All the Things that can be Done with Figure Captions]
{All the Things that can be Done\\ with Figure Captions}

Here are some examples of various kinds of figure captions
that can be use with this Kluwer style. They include the
normal \LaTeX\ \verb+\caption{}+ as well as many more possibilities
which you will see illustrated here.

\begin{figure}[ht]
\vskip.2in
\caption{Short caption.}
\end{figure}

\noindent
The following example shows a caption which includes an indexing command.
Notice that there is a \verb+\protect+ command before the \verb+\inx+.
This keeps \LaTeX\ from expanding the \verb+\inx+ command at
the wrong time.

\begin{figure}[ht]
\caption{\protect\inx{Oscillograph} for memory address access operations, showing 500 ps
address access time and $\alpha\beta\Gamma\Delta\sum_{123}^{345}$
\protect\inx{superimposed signals}%
\protect\inxx{address,superimposed
signals} of address access in 1 kbit
memory plane.}
\end{figure}

\noindent
Here is an example of a double caption; one figure with two
captions appearing side by side:

%% Double captions:
\begin{figure}[ht]
\sidebyside
{\caption{This caption will go on the left side of
the page. It is the initial caption of two side-by-side captions.}}
{\caption{This caption will go on the right side of
the page. It is the second of two side-by-side captions.}}
\end{figure}

\noindent
When you need a continued caption for a second figure that
uses the same number as the preceding one as a continuation
of the previous figure:

%% For continued caption. Same figure number used as for last caption.
\begin{figure}[ht]
\contcaption{This is a continued caption.}
\end{figure}
\inxx{captions,figure}

\noindent
When you want to make a narrow caption, you can use the
\verb=\narrowcaption= command.

%% To make narrow caption:
\begin{figure}[ht]
\narrowcaption{This is a narrow caption so that it can
be at the side of the illustration. This is a narrow caption.
This is a narrow caption. This is a narrow caption.}
\end{figure}

\noindent
You may also make a narrow continued caption as you see in
the following example.

%% To make narrow continued caption:
\begin{figure}[ht]
\narrowcontcaption{This is a narrow continued caption.
This is a narrow continued caption. This is a narrow continued caption.}
\end{figure}

\noindent
When you need to make a lettered caption, you may use the command\newline
\verb+\letteredcaption{}{}+. The first argument is
for the letter.

\begin{figure}[ht]
\letteredcaption{a}{Lettered caption.}
\end{figure}
\inxx{captions,lettered}


Notice that you can have lettered captions in the side by side
environment, which is one of the places that lettered captions
may be most useful. 


\begin{figure}[ht]
\sidebyside
{
\letteredcaption{b}{One caption.}}
{
\letteredcaption{c}{Two captions.}}
\end{figure}

\section{Making Tables}\inxx{Making tables}
Notice that the caption should be at the top of the table. Use
a line above the table, under the column heads, and at the
end of the table. If you use the Kluwer command, \verb+\sphline+
instead of the \LaTeX\ command \verb+\hline+, you will get
a little space added above and below the line, which will
make your table look more elegant.

This form of the tabular command makes the
table spread out to the width of the page.
This example also shows using \verb+\caption[]{}+ with the
first argument, in square brackets, used to send information
to the List of Tables. 


\begin{table}[ht]
\caption[Effects of the Two Types of Scaling Proposed by Dennard 
and Co-Workers.]%<-- this version will appear in List of Tables
{Effects of the Two Types of Scaling Proposed by \protect\inx{Dennard} 
and\newline
Co-Workers.$^{a,b}$}%<-- this version will appear on page
\begin{tabular*}{\textwidth}{@{\extracolsep{\fill}}lcc}
\sphline
\it Parameter&\it $\kappa$ Scaling &\it $\kappa$, $\lambda$ Scaling\cr
\sphline
Dimension&$\kappa^{-1}$&$\lambda^{-1}$\cr
Voltage&$\kappa^{-1}$&$\kappa^{-1}$\cr
Currant&$\kappa^{-1}$&$\lambda/\kappa^{2}$\cr
\inx{Dopant Concentration}&$\kappa$&$\lambda^2/\kappa$\cr
\sphline
\end{tabular*}
\begin{tablenotes}
$^a$Refs.~19 and 20.

$^b\kappa, \lambda>1$.
\end{tablenotes}
\end{table}
\inxx{captions,table}

\noindent
Tables may use both the\verb+\sidebyside+ and the 
\verb+\letteredcaption+ command to position the tables
side by side and letter the captions.

\begin{table}[ht]
\sidebyside
{\letteredcaption{a}{A small table with a lettered table caption.}
\centering
\begin{tabular}{lcr}\sphline
\it $\alpha\beta\Gamma\Delta$ One&\it Two&\it Three\cr\sphline
one&two&three\cr\sphline
\end{tabular}
\label{table2a}}
{\letteredcaption{b}{A small table with a second lettered table caption.}
\centering
\begin{tabular}{lcr}\sphline
\it $\alpha\beta\Gamma\Delta$ One&\it Two&\it Three\cr\sphline
one&two&three\cr
one&two&three\cr\sphline
\end{tabular}
\label{table2b}}
\end{table}

\newpage
The following table shows  how you might increase vertical space between
particular lines with the use of a `strut', a vertical line with no width
so that it doesn't print, but which does have a height and/or
depth.

It also shows how to make a table with vertical lines, if you
find them absolutely necessary, by supplying and extra column
entry in the preamble, which you never use in the body of the
table. This makes the vertical line position itself correctly.


\begin{table}[ht]
\caption{Here is a table caption.}
\begin{center}
\begin{tabular}{||c||c||l}
\hline
  %% On the next line is an example of how to get extra vertical space in
  %% a line: Use a \vrule with width 0pt and the height or depth that you
  %% want.
\it Cell\vrule height 14pt width 0pt depth 4pt
&\it Time (sec.)&\cr
\hline
\hline
1&432.22\vrule height 12pt width0pt&\cr
%%
%% On the next line, see how to line up numbers aligned on their decimal point
2&\phantom{3}32.32&\cr
3&\phantom{33}2.32&\cr
\hline
\end{tabular}
\end{center}
\end{table}

The following table uses a continued caption, made with the command
\verb+\contcaption{}+.


\begin{table}[ht]
\contcaption{This is a continued caption.}
\begin{center}
\begin{tabular}{||c||c||l}
\hline
  %% On the next line is an example of how to get extra vertical space in
  %% a line: Use a \vrule with width 0pt and the height or depth that you
  %% want.
\it Cell\vrule height 14pt width 0pt depth 4pt
&\it \inx{Time} (sec.)&\cr
\hline
\hline
4&532.22\vrule height 12pt width0pt&\cr
%%
%% On the next line, see how to line up numbers aligned on their decimal point
5&\phantom{3}12.02&\cr
6&\phantom{33}4.44&\cr
\hline
\end{tabular}
\end{center}
\end{table}

\subsection{Figure and Table in Landscape Mode}
If you want to make landscape tables or figures, you should
use\\ \verb+\usepackage[<your driver program>]{graphicx}+.\\
In the square brackets you should type in the name of the
driver program you are using, for instance, dvips, or dvipsone,
or textures, etc. See the documentation for this package, edbkdocs.ps 
or .pdf, for
information specifically about graphicx.sty, see grfguide.tex.

This is how to make a figure and caption turn sideways on the page:

\begin{verbatim}
\begin{figure}[p]
\rotatebox{90}{\vbox to\textwidth{
\vfill
\hsize=\textheight

\includegraphics{}
\caption{}

}}
\end{figure}
\end{verbatim}

To make a table print sideways, you follow a similar same set
of commands, except substitute\\ \verb+\begin{table}...\end{table}+
for \verb+\begin{figure}...\end{figure}+\\ and skip the \verb+\vfill+ command:

\begin{verbatim}
\begin{table}[p]
\rotatebox{90}{\vbox to\textwidth{
%\vfill
\hsize=\textheight
\caption{}
\begin{tabular}
....
\end{tabular}
}}
\end{table}
\end{verbatim}

\section{Other environments}
\begin{quote}
This is a sample of extract or quotation.\inxx{quotation}%
\inxx{quotation,extract}
This is a sample of extract or quotation.
This is a sample of extract or quotation.
\end{quote}

\begin{enumerate}
\item
This is the first item in the numbered list.

\item
This is the second item in the numbered list.
This is the second item in the numbered list.
This is the second item in the numbered list.
\end{enumerate}

\begin{itemize}
\item
This is the first item in the itemized list.

\item
This is the first item in the itemized list.
This is the first item in the itemized list.
This is the first item in the itemized list.
\end{itemize}

\begin{itemize}
\item[]
This is how to get an indented paragraph without
an item marker.

\item[]
This is how to get an indented paragraph without
an item marker.
\end{itemize}


\section[Small Running Head]{Some Sample Algorithms}
When you want to demonstrate some programming code, these are
the commands to use. Lines will be preserved as you see them
on the screen, as will spaces at the beginning of the line.%
\inxx{algorithm,State transition}\inxx{algorithm}
A backslash followed with a space will indent the line. 
Blank lines will be preserved.
Math and font changes may be used. 

\begin{algorithm}
{\bf state\_transition algorithm} $\{$
\        for each neuron $j\in\{0,1,\ldots,M-1\}$
\        $\{$   
\            calculate the weighted sum $S_j$ using Eq. (6);
\            if ($S_j>t_j$)
\                    $\{$turn ON neuron; $Y_1=+1\}$   
\            else if ($S_j<t_j$)
\                    $\{$turn OFF neuron; $Y_1=-1\}$   
\            else
\                    $\{$no change in neuron state; $y_j$ remains %
unchanged;$\}$.
\        $\}$   
$\}$   
\end{algorithm}

Here is another sample algorithm:

%% \bit will produce bold italics if you are using PostScript fonts, 
%% boldface in Computer Modern.

\begin{algorithm}
{\bit Evaluate-Single-FOE} ({\bf x$_f$, I$_0$, I$_1$}):
\ {\bf I}+ := {\bf I}$_1$;
\ ($\phi,\theta$) := (0,0);
\ {\it repeat}\note{/*usually only 1 interation required*/}
\ \ (s$_{opt}${\bf E}$_\eta$) := {\bit Optimal-Shift} ({\bf I$_0$,I$^+$,I$_0$,x$_f$});
\ \ ($\phi^+$, $\theta^+$) := {\bit Equivalent-Rotation} ({\bf s}$_{opt}$);
\ \ ($\phi$, $\theta$) := ($\phi$, $\theta$) + ($\phi^+$, $\theta^+$);
\ \ {\bf I}$^+$:= {\bit Derotate-Image} ({\bf I}$_1$, $\phi$, $\theta$);
\ \ {\it until} ($\|\phi^+\|\leq\phi_{max}$ \& $\|\theta^+\|\leq\theta_{max}$);
\ {\it return} ({\bf I}$^+$, $\phi$, $\theta$, E$_\eta$).

End pseudo-code.
\end{algorithm}
\inxx{code,Pseudo}

% Notice that to produce printed `{' brackets, precede them with \string

% Notice that \begin{codebox}...\end{codebox} can be inserted within
%   codesamp, and will be positioned at the same distance from right
%   margin as text. codebox needs an argument for the width of the box,
%   as in  \begin{codebox}{2.5in} below.

This is an example of `codesamp' with a `codebox' included. Notice
that `underline' will still work even though this is basically
a verbatim environment.\inxx{code,Sample}

\begin{codesamp}
sqrdc(a, n)(a, qraux)\string{
  \underline{DARRAY float[180] a[180];}
  float qraux[180], col[180], nrmxl,t;
  DO(1=0, n)\string{
         \underline{ALIGN*(i=1, n) col[i]=a[l][i];}
         \begin{codebox}{2.3in}
         init*\string{ nrmxl=0.0;\string}
         DO*(i=l, n)\string{
           nrmxl += col[i]*col[i];\string}
         combine*\string{nrmxl;\string}
         \end{codebox}
         nmxl=sqrt(nrmxl);
         if (nrmxl != 0.00)\string{
            if (col[1]=1.0+col[1];
\end{codesamp}


\begin{glossary}
\term{GaAs}Gallium Arsinide. For similar device sizes GaAs transistors 
have three to\inxx{GaAs,Gallium Arsinide}
five times greater transconductance than those of of silicon bipolar
and MOS transistors.

\term{VLSI}Very Large Scale Integration. Since the mid-1970's 
VLSI technology has been successfully used in many areas, but its effect on
computers of all shapes and sizes has been the most dramatic. Some of the
application areas got boosts in performance while others became
feasible.
\end{glossary}


\section{Summary}
This is a \inx{summary} of this article.

\begin{acknowledgments}
The authors wish to thank Drs.~T. Misugi, M. Kobayashi, and M. Fukuta for%
\inxx{Misugi\, Dr. T.}\inxx{Kobayashi\, Dr. M.}%
\inxx{Fukuta\, Dr. M.}
their encouragement and support. Their authors also wish to thank their
colleagues...
\end{acknowledgments}

\chapappendix{}
This is a chapter appendix without a title 
meant to appear in individual chapters
of the proceedings book, not at the end of the book.

\chapappendix{This is a Chapter Appendix}
This is a chapter appendix with a title.


\begin{figure}[ht]
\caption{This is an appendix figure caption.}
\end{figure}

\begin{table}[ht]
\caption{This is an appendix table caption.}
\centering
\begin{tabular}{ccc}
\hline
one&two&three\\
\hline
C&D&E\\
\hline
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

\begin{equation}
\alpha\beta\Gamma\Delta
\end{equation}

\chapappendix{}
This is a chapter appendix without a title 
that is lettered because it is not the first
appendix.

\begin{equation}
e=mc^2
\end{equation}


\begin{chapthebibliography}{1}
\bibitem{ander}
Anderson, Terry L., and Fred S. McChesney. (n.d.). ``Raid or Trade?
An Economic Model of Indian-WhiteRelations,'' Political Economy Research
Center Working Paper 93--1.

\bibitem{lacey}
Lacey, W.K. (1968). {\it History of Socialism}. Ithaca, NY: Cornell
University Press.

\bibitem{oliva}
Oliva, Pavel. (1971). {\it Sparta and Her Social Problems.} Amsterdam: Adolf
M. Hakkert.

\bibitem{zimmern}
Zimmern, Alfred. (1961). {\it The Greek Commonwealth: Politics and Economics
in Fifth-Century Athens,}\/ 5th ed. New York: Galaxy Book, Oxford University
Press.
\end{chapthebibliography}

\articletitle{Using BibTeX for a bibliography}
\vskip48pt
\vskip1sp
\section{Sample Chapter Bibliography Using BibTeX}
If you would rather make a bibliography using Bib\TeX\ write, 
\begin{verbatim}
\bibliographystyle{kapalike}
\chapbblname{chapbib}
\chapbibliography{logic}
\end{verbatim}
and substitute
the name of your .bib file for {\tt logic} below. If you don't
have kapalike.bst on your system, you can get it from Kluwer at
the same .ftp site where you can find the book style files.

This will allow many Bib\TeX\ bibliographies in one book.
This example shows the chapter bibliography using
\verb+\normallatexbib+.
See the documentation, KapProc.doc, for more information.


{%\normallatexbib


\bibliographystyle{kapalike}
\chapbblname{chapbib}
\chapbibliography{logic}

}

%% These index commands will not work with SWP. You must use
%% LaTeX outside SWP to format the index.

\kluwerprintindex

%% Use these commands if you are making a separate topic and author index.
%% If you use these two commands, you will not need the \kluwerprintindex
%% above.

%\printtopicindex
%\printauthorindex

%% Author index info:
%% Enter author entries like this: \anxx{Dillon\, Matt}
%% When you run LaTeX on your file you will produce filename.aut.
%%   You will need an .att file to produce the author index.
%% Sort the filename.aut file to produce filename.att:
%%    sort filename.aut > filename.att

\end{document}

proctmpl.tex
%% Version 3/21/02

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%% Kluwer Proceedings Sample, ProcSamp.tex
%%
%% Kluwer Academic Press
%%
%% Prepared by Amy Hendrickson, TeXnology Inc., July 1999.
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

%%%%%
%% LaTeX2e 
%% Uncomment documentclass, 
\documentclass{kapproc} % Computer Modern font calls

%% and, optionally, one or more 
%%   of the \usepackage commands below:

%%%%%
%% If you use a font encoding package, please enter it here, i.e.,
%  \usepackage{T1enc}

%%%%%
%  If you have MathTimes and MathTimesPlus fonts, you
%  may uncomment the line below and use them, but you are
%  not obligated to do so, and most authors do not have
%  these fonts. (You may need to edit m-times.sty to make the
%  font names match those on your system)

%  You must have the MathTimes fonts for this to work. They may be
%  purchased from the Y&Y company, http://www.YandY.com.

% \usepackage[mtbold,noTS1]{m-times}

%%%%%
% PostScript font calls
%
% If you use the procps PS font file, you may need to edit it
% to make sure the font names match those on your system. See
% the top of the procps.sty file for more info.

\usepackage{procps} 

%%%%%
% Style for inserting .eps files and rotating illustrations or tables

% possible options for graphicx:
% [dvips], [xdvi], [dvipdf], [dvipsone], [dviwindo], [emtex], [dviwin],
% [pctexps],  [pctexwin],  [pctexhp],  [pctex32], [truetex], [tcidvi],
% [oztex], [textures]

\usepackage[dvips]{graphicx}

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%% LaTeX209, 
%  Uncomment only one below, comment out similar commands above
%  \documentstyle{kapproc} % Computer Modern fonts
%  \documentstyle[procps]{kapproc} %For PostScript fonts
%  (The m-times.sty works only with LaTeX2e)

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%% Commands You Can Set or Change to Customize Your Book Format: ===>>>

% Running heads:
% ==============

%  Uncomment to make chapter title on left hand page
%  and section title on right hand page
%  \chapsectrunningheads


% Section heads:
% ==============

%%%
% \chaptersection % will use chapter.section form for section heads.

%%%
% Uncomment to make section heads appear in
%                    both upper and lower case.
\upperandlowercase

% \useuppercase % Uncomment to make section and subsection heads 
                %  appear in uppercase.

%%%
% How many levels of section head would you like numbered?
% 0= no section numbers, 1= section, 2= subsection, 3= subsubsection
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{1}

% Table of Contents:
% ==================
% How many levels of section head would you like to appear in the
%  Table of Contents?
%  0= chapter titles, 1= section titles, 2= subsection titles, 
%  3= subsubsection titles.

\setcounter{tocdepth}{1}

% Equation numbering:
% ===================

%%%
% \nochapequationnumber % will result in equation numbers that are (1)

%%%
% \sectionequationnumber % will result in equation numbers that are (1.1)
                         % and renumber for each section

% Default for kapproc is (equation number)

% Theorem numbering:
% ==================
% \nochaptheoremnumber % will make the theorem type environments number
       % only with the theorem number. 
       % Default is only theorem number for kapproc.

% Footnotes/Endnotes:
% ===================

% Default is endnotes that appear at the end of the chapter, above
% the references, or whereever \notes is written.

%%%
% To change footnotes to appear at bottom of page uncomment:
% \let\footnote\savefootnote

%%%
% Uncomment if you want footnotetext to appear at the bottom of the page:
%\let\footnotetext\savefootnotetext

%%%
% Uncomment if you want a ruled line above the footnote.
%\let\footnoterule\savefootnoterule

% Bibliography Style Settings:
% ============================
% Choose either kluwerbib or normallatexbib:

%%%
\kluwerbib % will produce this kind of bibliography entry:

%  Anderson, Terry L.,...
%    continuing bib entry here

%  \cite{xxx} will print without brackets around the citation.
% \bibliographystyle{kapalike} % should be used when you use \verb+\kluwerbib+.

%%%
%\normallatexbib %will produce bibliography entries as shown in the
                % LaTeX book

% [1] Anderson, Terry L.,
%     continuing bib entry

% \cite{xxx} will print with square brackets around the citation, i.e., [1].

% Any \verb+\bibliographystyle{}+ may be used with \verb+\normallatexbib+, but
% you should check with your editor to find the style preferred for
% your book.

% Change Brackets around Citation:
% ================================

%% Default with \kluwerbib is no brackets around citation. 
%% Default with \normallatexbib is square brackets around citation. 

% For parens around citation uncomment these:

%\let\lcitebracket(
%\let\rcitebracket)

% For square brackets around citation uncomment these:

%\let\lcitebracket[
%\let\rcitebracket]

% Draft Line:
% ===========
%  Optional, uncomment to make current time and `draft' appear at
%  bottom of page.

% \draft

%%%% <<== End Formatting Commands You Can Set or Change %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

\begin{document}

%------------ article title  ------------------->>

% If you use \\'s , please supply an alternate version of the title
% in square brackets, i.e., 
%\articletitle[Communism, Sparta, and Plato]
%{COMMUNISM, SPARTA,\\ and PLATO}

\articletitle[]{}

%% optional, to supply a shorter version of the title for the running head:
%%\chaptitlerunninghead{}

\author{}

%% multiple authors may be separated with \\
%% \author{Samuel Bostaph\\
%% and Gregor Kariotis}

%------ author/affiliation choices -------------->>

%% Single author

% \author{}
% \affil{}
% \email{}

%% Multiple authors, single affiliation

% \author{Samuel Bostaph}
% \author{George Lewis}
% \and   % <=== Type in \and before the last author so that `and' will
% \author{Cleon Jones}    % print between the last two authors
                           % in the table of contents.

% \affil{}

%% Multiple authors, multiple affiliations

% First method:
--------------

\author{}
\affil{}

\author{}
\affil{]

etc.

% Second method:
--------------

\author{author\altaffilmark{1}, author\altaffilmark{2}, 
         author\altaffilmark{1,3}}

\altaffiltext{1}{Affiliation}
\altaffiltext{2}{Affiliation}
\altaffiltext{3}{Affiliation}

% Third method:
--------------

\author{author\altaffilmark{1}, author\altaffilmark{2}, 
         author\altaffilmark{1,3}}

\affil{\altaffilmark{1}First affiliation, \ 
\altaffilmark{2}Second affiliation, \
\altaffilmark{3}Second affiliation}

%------ prologue, abstract, keywords ----------->>
% optional prologue
%\prologue{<text>}{<author, year>}


% optional abstract
% \begin{abstract}
% text...
% \end{abstract}

% optional keywords
% \begin{keywords}
% Text, text...
% \end{keywords}


%------------ body of article ------------------->>

%------------ end of article ------------------->>

%% optional
%\section{Summary}

%% optional
%\begin{acknowledgments}
%...
%\end{acknowledgments}


%% appendix optional
%\appendix{This is the Appendix Title}
%This is an appendix with a title.

%\appendix{}
%This is an appendix without a title.

%
% Bibliography made with BibTeX:
%% kapalike is preferred if you have used \kluwerbib, above.
%% Otherwise you may use any .bst style your editor approves.

This will allow many Bib\TeX\ bibliographies in one book.
See the documentation, edbk.doc, for more information.

\bibliographystyle{kapalike}
\chapbblname{<name of .bbl file>}
\chapbibliography{<name of .bib file>}

%or 
\begin{chapthebibliography}{<widest bib entry>}
\bibitem[optional]{symbolic name}
Text of bib item...

\end{chapthebibliography}

\end{document}

Other commands, and notes on usage:

-----
Possible section head levels:
\section{Introduction}
\subsection{This is subsection}
\subsubsection{This is subsubsection}
\paragraph{This is the paragraph}

-----
Captions:
 If you use index commands within a caption, precede \inx or \inxx with
 \protect.

\begin{figure}[h]
\caption{\protect\inx{Oscillograph} for memory address access ....
memory plane.}
\end{figure}

-----
Tables:
 Remember to use \centering for a small table and to start the table
 with \hline, use \hline underneath the column headers and at the end of 
 the table. Column headers should be in italic:

\begin{table}[h]
\caption{Small Table}
\centering
\begin{tabular}{ccc}
\sphline
\it one&\it two&\it three\\
\sphline
C&D&E\\
\sphline
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

For a table that expands to the width of the page, write

\begin{table}
\begin{tabular*}{\textwidth}{@{\extracolsep{\fill}}lcc}
\hline
....
\end{tabular*}
%% Sample table notes:
\begin{tablenotes}
$^a$Refs.~19 and 20.

$^b\kappa, \lambda>1$.
\end{tablenotes}
\end{table}

-----
%% Use \printindex if you are using the LaTeX Makeindex commands:
%% \makeindex and \index{}
%\printindex

%% Use \kluwerprintindex if you are using the Kluwer indexing macros:
%%(\inx{} and \inxx{})
\kluwerprintindex

Kluwer Index commands:
\inx{term} will print `term' in text but will also send `term' and its
page number to the .inx file.

\inxx{term} will not print in text but will send term and its page number to
the .inx file.

\inxx{term,second term} will not print in text but will send `second term'
to inx file to print underneath `term' in the index.

1) Run Latex on file,
2) Run sort routine on file ie. `sort < filename.inx > filename.srt' on
your system to produce a filename.srt file
3)\printindex at end of book will input filename.srt and print index.

See documentation for more information.

-----
Algorithm.
Maintains same fonts as text (as opposed to verbatim which uses fixed
width fonts). Space at beginning of line will be maintained if you
use \ at beginning of line.

\begin{algorithm}
{\bf state\_transition algorithm} $\{$
\        for each neuron $j\in\{0,1,\ldots,M-1\}$
\        $\{$   
\            calculate the weighted sum $S_j$ using Eq. (6);
\            if ($S_j>t_j$)
\                    $\{$turn ON neuron; $Y_1=+1\}$   
\            else if ($S_j<t_j$)
\                    $\{$turn OFF neuron; $Y_1=-1\}$   
\            else
\                    $\{$no change in neuron state; $y_j$ remains %
unchanged;$\}$ .
\        $\}$   
$\}$   
\end{algorithm}

-----
Sample quote:
\begin{quote}
quotation...
\end{quote}

-----
Listing samples

\begin{enumerate}
\item
This is the first item in the numbered list.

\item
This is the second item in the numbered list.
\end{enumerate}

\begin{itemize}
\item
This is the first item in the itemized list.

\item
This is the first item in the itemized list.
This is the first item in the itemized list.
This is the first item in the itemized list.
\end{itemize}

\begin{itemize}
\item[]
This is the first item in the itemized list.

\item[]
This is the first item in the itemized list.
This is the first item in the itemized list.
This is the first item in the itemized list.
\end{itemize}

----
Glossary:

\begin{glossary}
\term{xxx}Text...
\term{yyy}Text...
\end{glossary}

i.e.,
\begin{glossary}
\term{GaAs}Gallium Arsinide. For similar device sizes GaAs transistors 
have three to
five times greater transconductance than those of of silicon bipolar
and MOS transistors.

\term{VLSI}Very Large Scale Integration. Since the mid-1970's 
VLSI technology has been successfully used in many areas, but its effect on
computers of all shapes and sizes has been the most dramatic. Some of the
application areas got boosts in performance while others became
feasible.

\end{glossary}








grfguide.tex
%% grfguide.tex Copyright (C) 1994 1995 1996 1998 1999 David Carlisle
%%
%% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Graphics Bundle'.
%% It may be distributed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public
%% License, as described in lppl.txt in the base LaTeX distribution.
%% Either version 1.0 or, at your option, any later version.
%%

\begin{filecontents*}{a.ps}
%!
%%BoundingBox:100 100 172 172
100 100 moveto
72 72 rlineto
72 neg 0 rlineto
72 72 neg rlineto
stroke
100 100 moveto
/Times-Roman findfont
72 scalefont
setfont
(A) show
showpage
\end{filecontents*}

\documentclass{ltxguide}

%%% No driver option specified
%%% set up the files color.cfg and graphics.cfg for your site.
%%% for example:
%%%
%%% \ExecuteOptions{dvips}
%%%
\usepackage{color,graphicx,shortvrb}

%% Just as an example, and to make sure, in case some
%% driver option has not declared a default rule for
%% .ps files:
\DeclareGraphicsRule{.ps}{eps}{.ps}{}
\DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.ps}
%% Which means:
%% .ps files are (to be treated as) EncapsulatedPostScript
%% files. The .ps file is to be read for the BoundingBox.
%% No `special' commands need to be applied by the driver.


\renewcommand\star{{\ttfamily*}}

\let\package\textsf

\newlength{\gxlen}
\settowidth{\gxlen}{\package{graphicx}: }
\newcommand\gs{\makebox[\gxlen][l]{\package{graphics}:}}
\newcommand\gx{\makebox[\gxlen][l]{\package{graphicx}:}}

\MakeShortVerb{\|}

\begin{document}
\title{Packages in the `graphics' bundle}
\author{D. P. Carlisle}
\date{1999/01/13}

\maketitle

\tableofcontents

\section{Introduction}
This document serves as a user-manual for the packages \package{color},
\package{graphics}, and \package{graphicx}. Further documentation may be
obtained by processing the  source (|dtx|) files of the individual
packages.

\section{Driver support}\label{drivers}
All these packages rely on features that are not in \TeX\ itself.
These features must be supplied by the `driver' used to print the
|dvi| file. Unfortunately not all drivers support the same features, and
even the internal method of accessing these extensions varies between
drivers. Consequently all these packages take options such as
`|dvips|' to specify which driver is being used.

You should to set up a site default for these
options, for the driver that you normally use. Suppose that you wish for
the \package{color} package to always default to use specials for the
PostScript driver, |dvipsone|. In that case create a file |color.cfg|
containing the line:\\
|\ExecuteOptions{dvipsone}|\\
Normally you will want an identical file |graphics.cfg| to set a similar
default for the graphics packages.

The following driver options are declared in the packages.
\begin{quote}\raggedright
 |dvips|, |xdvi|, |dvipdf|, |dvipdfm|, |pdftex|,
 |dvipsone|, |dviwindo|, |emtex|, |dviwin|,
 |pctexps|,  |pctexwin|,  |pctexhp|,  |pctex32|,
 |truetex|, |tcidvi|, |vtex|,
 |oztex|, |textures|
\end{quote}

If you use a driver that is not in the list above you may add an option
for that driver by putting the appropriate |\DeclareOption| line into
|graphics.cfg| and |color.cfg|, before making it the default option
with |\ExecuteOptions|, as described above.

For example to add the option `|dvi2ps|' for the original Unix dvi to
ps driver, and to make that the default, you just need configuration
files looking like:
\begin{verbatim}
\DeclareOption{dvi2ps}{\def\Gin@driver{dvi2ps.def}}
\ExecuteOptions{dvi2ps}
\end{verbatim}

There is a suitable |dvi2ps.def| file in the standard distribution.
It is not enabled by default as it is not well tested as the driver is
no longer available to me. The following driver files are similarly
distributed but not enabled by default.
\begin{quote}\raggedright
 |dvi2ps|, |dvialw|, |dvilaser|, |dvitops|, |psprint|, |pubps|, |ln|
\end{quote}

Most of these driver files are generated from the source file
|drivers.dtx|. That file has the sources for other versions (for
example older versions of dvips and textures) which are not generated
by default.

If you use a driver that is not covered by any of these possibilities,
you may try to write a |.def| file by analogy with one of the existing
ones, and then specify a suitable option in |graphics.cfg| and
|color.cfg|, as for the above example of |dvi2ps|.

\section{Colour}
The colour support is built around the idea of a system of
\emph{Colour Models}. The Colour models supported by a driver vary,
but typically include
\begin{description}
\item[rgb] Red Green Blue: A comma separated list of three numbers
  between~0 and~1, giving the components of the colour.
\item[cmyk] Cyan Magenta Yellow [K]Black:  A comma separated list of
  four numbers between~0 and~1, giving the components of the colour
  according to the additive model used in most printers.
\item[gray] Grey scale: a single number between~0 and~1.
\item[named] Colours accessed by name, e.g.\ `JungleGreen'. Not all
  drivers support this model. The names must either be `known' to the
  driver or added using commands described in |color.dtx|. Some drivers
  support an extended form of the named model in which an `intensity' of
  the colour may also be specified, so `\mbox{JungleGreen, 0.5}' would
  denote that colour at half strength.
\end{description}
Note that the \textbf{named} model is really just given as an example
of a colour model that takes names rather than a numeric specification.
Other options may be provided locally that provide different colour
models, eg \textbf{pantone} (An industry standard set of colours),
\textbf{x11} (Colour names from the X Window System), etc. The
standard distribution does not currently have such models, but the
\textbf{named} model could be used as an example of how to define a new
colour model. The names used in the \textbf{named} model are those 
suggested by Jim Hafner in his \textsf{colordvi} and \textsf{foiltex}
packages, and implemented originally in the |color.pro| header file for
the \texttt{dvips} driver.

\subsection{Package Options}
Most of the options to the \package{color} package just specify a
driver, e.g., \ |dvips|, as discussed in section~\ref{drivers}.

One special option for the \package{color} package 
that is of interest is |monochrome.|
If this option is selected the colour commands are all
disabled so that they do not generate errors, but do not generate colour
either. This is useful if previewing with a previewer that can not
produce colour.

Three other package options control the use of the \textbf{named} model.
The |dvips| driver (by default) pre-defines 68 colour names. The |dvips|
option normally makes these names available in the \textbf{named} colour
model. If you do not want these names to be declared in  this model
(Saving \TeX\ some memory) you may give the |nodvipsnames|
option. Conversely, if you are using another driver, you may wish to
add these names to the named model for that driver (especially if you
are processing a document originally produced on |dvips|). In this case
you could use the |dvipsnames| option. Lastly the |usenames| option
makes all names in the \textbf{named} model directly available, as
described below.

\subsection{Defining Colours}

The colours |black|, |white|, |red|, |green|, |blue|, |cyan|,
|magenta|, |yellow| should be predefined, but should you wish to mix
your own colours use the |\definecolor| command.

\begin{decl}
|\definecolor|\arg{name}\arg{model}\arg{colour specification}
\end{decl}


This defines \m{name} as a colour which can be used in later colour
commands. For example
\begin{verbatim}
\definecolor{light-blue}{rgb}{0.8,0.85,1}
\definecolor{mygrey}{gray}{0.75}
\end{verbatim}
\definecolor{light-blue}{rgb}{0.8,0.85,1}
\definecolor{mygrey}{gray}{0.75}

Now |light-blue| and |mygrey| may be used in addition to the
predefined colours above.

\subsection{Using Colours}

\subsubsection{Using predefined colours}
The syntax for colour changes is designed to mimic font changes.
The basic syntax is:

\begin{decl}
|\color|\arg{name}
\end{decl}

This is a \emph{declaration}, like |\bfseries| It changes the current
colour to \m{name} until the end of the current group or
environment.

An alternative command syntax is to use a \emph{command} form that
takes the text to be coloured as an \emph{argument}. This is similar
to the font commands such as |\textbf|:

\begin{decl}
|\textcolor|\arg{name}\arg{text}
\end{decl}


So the above is essentially equivalent to
|{\color|\arg{name}\emph{text}|}|.

\subsubsection{Using colour specifications directly}


\begin{decl}
|\color|\oarg{model}\arg{specification}\\
|\textcolor|\oarg{model}\arg{specification}\arg{text}
\end{decl}

Normally one would predeclare all the colours used in a package, or in
the document preamble, but sometimes it is convenient to directly use
a colour without naming it first. To achieve this |\color| (and all
the other colour commands) take an optional argument specifying the
model. If this is used then the mandatory argument takes a
\m{colour specification} instead of a \m{name}. For example:\\
|\color[rgb]{1,0.2,0.3}|\\
would directly select that colour.

This is particularly useful for accessing the \textbf{named} model:\\
|\color[named]{BrickRed}| selects the |dvips| colour BrickRed.

Rather than repeatedly use |[named]| you may use |\definecolor| to
provide convenient aliases:\\
|\definecolor{myred}{named}{WildStrawberry}|
     \ldots\ |\color{myred}|\ \ldots

Alternatively if you are happy to use the existing names from the
\textbf{named} model, you may use the |usenames| package option, which
effectively calls |\definecolor| on every colour in the \textbf{named}
model, thus allowing |\color{WildStrawberry}| in addition to
|\color[named]{WildStrawbery}|.

\subsection{Named Colours}
Using the \textbf{named} colour model has certain advantages over
using other colour models. 

Firstly as the |dvi| file contains a request
for a colour by \emph{name}, the actual mix of primary colours used to
obtain the requested colour can be tuned to the characteristics of a
particular printer. In the |dvips| driver the meanings of the colour
names are defined in the header file |color.pro|. Users are encouraged
to produce different versions of this file for any printers they use. By
this means the same dvi file should produce colours of similar
appearance when printed on printers with different colour
characteristics.

Secondly, apart from the so called `process colours' that are produced
by mixing primary colours during the print process, one may want to use
`spot' or `custom' colours. Here a particular colour name does not
refer to a mix of primaries, but to a particular ink. The parts of the
document using this colour will be printed separately using this named
ink colour.

\subsection{Page Colour}


\begin{decl}
|\pagecolor|\arg{name}\\
|\pagecolor|\oarg{model}\arg{specification}
\end{decl}

The background colour of the whole page can be set using
|\pagecolor|. This takes the same argument forms as |\color| but sets
the background colour for the current and all subsequent pages. It is
a global declaration, so you need to  use |\pagecolor{white}| to `get
back to normal'. 

\subsection{Box Backgrounds}
Two commands similar to |\fbox| produce boxes with the backgrounds
shaded an appropriate colour.

\begin{decl}
|\colorbox|\arg{name}\arg{text}\\
|\colorbox|\oarg{model}\arg{specification}\arg{text}\\
|\fcolorbox|\arg{name1}\arg{name2}\arg{text}\\
|\fcolorbox|\oarg{model}%
            \arg{specification1}\arg{specification2}\arg{text}
\end{decl}


The former produces a box coloured with \emph{name}
\colorbox{mygrey}{like this}. The latter is similar but puts a frame of
colour \emph{name1} around the box coloured \emph{name2}.

These commands use the |\fbox| parameters |\fboxrule| and |\fboxsep|
to determine the thickness of the rule, and the size of the shaded area.

\subsection{Possible Problems}

\TeX\ was not designed with colour in mind, and producing colours
requires a lot of help from the driver program. Thus, depending on the
driver, some or all features of the \package{color} package may not be
available.

Some drivers do not maintain a special `colour stack'. These drivers are
likely to get confused if you nest colour changes, or use colours in
floating environments.

Some drivers do not maintain colours over a page break, so that if the
page breaks in the middle of a coloured paragraph, the last part of the
text will incorrectly be printed in black.

There is a different type of problem that will occur for all drivers.
Due to certain technical difficulties\footnote{At least two causes:
1) The presence of a \texttt{\char`\\special} \m{whatsit} prevents
\texttt{\char`\\addvspace} `seeing' space on the current vertical list,
so causing it to incorrectly add extra vertical space. 2) A
\m{whatsit} as the first item in a \texttt{\char`\\vtop} moves the
reference point of the box.}%
, it is possible that at points
where the colour changes, the \emph{spacing} is affected. For this
reason the |monochrome| option does not completely disable the colour
commands, it redefines them to write to the log file. This will have the
same effects on spacing, so you can produce monochrome drafts of your
document, at least knowing that the final spacing is being shown.
\section{The Graphics packages}
There are two graphics packages:
\begin{description}
\item[\package{graphics}] The `standard' graphics package.
\item[\package{graphicx}] The `extended' or `enhanced' graphics
  package. 
\end{description}
The two differ only in the format of optional arguments for the
commands defined. The command names, and the mandatory arguments are
the same for the two packages.

\subsection{Package Options}
As discussed in section~\ref{drivers}, the graphics packages share the
same `driver' options as the \package{color} package. As for colour
you should set up a site-default in a file,
|graphics.cfg|, containing the line (for |dvips|):\\
|\ExecuteOptions{dvips}|

The graphics packages have some other options for controlling how many
of the features to enable:
\begin{description}
\item[draft] suppress all the `special' features. In particular
  graphics files are not included (but they are still read for size
  info) just the filename is printed in a box of the correct size.
\item[final] The opposite of |draft|. Useful to over-ride a global
  |draft| option specified in the |\documentclass| command.
\item[hiderotate] Do not show rotated text (presumably because the
  previewer can not rotate).
\item[hidescale] Do not show scaled text (presumably because the
  previewer can not scale).
\item[hiresbb] Look for size specifications in |%%HiResBoundingBox|
  lines rather than standard |%%BoundingBox| lines.%
  \NEWfeature{1996/10/29}
\end{description}
\subsection{Rotation}

\begin{decl}
\gs |\rotatebox|\arg{angle}\arg{text}\\
\gx |\rotatebox|\oarg{key val list}\arg{angle}\arg{text}
\end{decl}

This puts \emph{text} in a box, like |\mbox|, but rotates the box
through \emph{angle} degrees, \rotatebox{15}{like this}.

The standard version always rotates around the reference point of the
box, but the \package{keyval} version takes the following keys:

\begin{decl}
|origin|=\m{label}\\
|x|=\m{dimen}\\
|y|=\m{dimen}\\
|units|=\m{number}
\end{decl}

So you may specify both |x| and |y|, which give the coordinate of
the centre of rotation relative to the reference point of the box, eg
|[x=2mm, y=5mm]|. Alternatively, for the most common points, one may use
|origin| with a \emph{label} containing one or two of the following:
|lrctbB| (|B| denotes the baseline, as for \package{PSTricks}). For
example, compare a default rotation of $180^\circ$
\ldots\rotatebox{180}{Like This}\ldots\ to the effects gained by using
the |origin| key:\\
|[origin = c]| rotates about the centre of the box,\ldots
         \rotatebox[origin=c]{180}{Like This}\ldots\\
|[origin = tr]| rotates about the top right hand corner\ldots
                   \rotatebox[origin=tr]{180}{Like This}\ldots

The |units| key allows a change from the default units of degrees
anti-clockwise. Give the number of units in one full anti-clockwise
rotation. For example:\\
|[units = -360]| specifies degrees clockwise.\\
|[units= 6.283185]| specifies radians.

\subsection{Scaling}

\subsubsection{Scaling by scale factor}

\begin{decl}
|\scalebox|\arg{h-scale}\oarg{v-scale}\arg{text}
\end{decl}

Again this is basically like |\mbox| but scales the \emph{text}.
If \emph{v-scale} is not specified it defaults to \emph{h-scale}.
If it is specified the text is distorted as the horizontal and
vertical stretches are different, \scalebox{3}[.7]{Like This}.


\begin{decl}
|\reflectbox|\arg{text}
\end{decl}

An abbreviation for |\scalebox{-1}[1]|\arg{text}.

\subsubsection{Scaling to a requested size}

\begin{decl}
|\resizebox|\star\arg{h-length}\arg{v-length}\arg{text}
\end{decl}

 Scale \emph{text} so that the width is \emph{h-length}.
 If |!| is used as either length argument, the other argument is used
 to determine a scale factor that is used in both directions.
 Normally \emph{v-length} refers to the height of the box, but in the
 star form, it refers to the `height +  depth'. 
 As normal for \LaTeXe\ box length arguments, |\height|,
 |\width|, |\totalheight|, |\depth| may be used to refer to the
 original size of the box.

|\resizebox{1in}{\height}{Some text}|: 
\resizebox{1in}{\height}{Some text}

|\resizebox{1in}{!}{Some text}|: 
\resizebox{1in}{!}{Some text}

\subsection{Including Graphics Files}
The functions for graphics inclusion try to give the same user syntax
for including any kind of graphics file that can be understood by the
driver. This relies on the file having an extension that identifies
the file type. The `driver options' will define a collection of file
extensions that the driver can handle, although this list may be
extended using the declarations described below.

If the file's extension is unknown to the driver, the system may try a
default file type. The PostScript driver files set this default to be
|eps| (PostScript), but this behaviour may be customised if other
defaults are required.

\begin{decl}
\gs |\includegraphics|\star\oarg{llx,lly}\oarg{urx,ury}\arg{file}\\
\gx |\includegraphics|\star\oarg{key val list}\arg{file}
\end{decl}
 Include a graphics file.

 If \star\ is present, then the graphic is `clipped' to the size
 specified. If \star\ is omitted, then any part  of the graphic that is
 outside the specified `bounding box' will  over-print the surrounding
 text.

 If the optional arguments are omitted, then the size of the graphic
 will be determined by reading an external file as described below.

\paragraph{\package{graphics} version}
 If \oarg{urx,ury} is present, then it should specify the coordinates
 of the top right corner of the image, as a pair of \TeX\ dimensions.
 If the units are omitted they default to |bp|. So |[1in,1in]| and
 |[72,72]| are equivalent. If only one optional argument appears, the
 lower left corner of the image is assumed to be at |[0,0]|. Otherwise
 \oarg{llx,lly} may be used to specify the coordinates of this point.

\paragraph{\package{graphicx} version}
Here the star form is just for compatibility with the standard
version. It just adds |clip| to the list of keys specified.
(Also, for increased compatibility, if \emph{two} optional arguments are
used, the `standard' version of |\includegraphics| is always used, even
if the \package{graphicx} package is loaded.)

The allowed keys are listed below.
\begin{description}
\item[bb] The argument should be four dimensions, separated by spaces.
  These denote the `Bounding Box' of the printed region within
  the file.
\item[bbllx,bblly,bburx,bbury] Set the bounding box. Mainly for
 compatibility with older packages.
 Specifying |bbllx=a,bblly=b,bburx=c,bbury=d|
 is equivalent to specifying |bb = a b c d|.
\item[natwidth,natheight] Again an alternative to |bb|. 
 |natheight=h,natwidth=w| is equivalent to |bb = 0 0 h w|.
\item[hiresbb]\NEWfeature{1996/10/29}
 Boolean valued key. If set to |true| (just specifying |hiresbb|
 is equivalent to |hiresbb=true|) then \TeX\ will look for
 |%%HiResBoundingBox| lines rather than |%%BoundingBox|. It may be set
 to |false| to overrule a default setting of |true| set by the
 |hiresbb| package option.
\item[viewport]\NEWfeature{1995/06/01}
 The |viewport| key takes four arguments, just like
 |bb|. However in this case the values are taken relative to the
 origin specified by the bounding box in the file. So to `view' the
 1in square in the bottom left hand corner of the area specified by
 the bounding box, use the argument |viewport=0 0 72 72|.
\item[trim]\NEWfeature{1995/06/01}
 Similar to viewport, but here the four lengths specify the
 amount to remove or add to each side. |trim= 1 2 3 4| `crops' the
 picture by 1bp at the left, 2bp at the bottom, 3bp on the right and
 4bp at the top.
\item[angle] Rotation angle.
\item[origin]\NEWfeature{1995/09/28}
 Origin for rotation. See the documentation of |\rotatebox|.
\item[width] Required width. The
  graphic is scaled to this width.
\item[height] Required height. The
  graphic is scaled to this height.
\item[totalheight]\NEWfeature{1995/06/01}
 Specify the total height (height $+$ depth) of the figure.
 This will differ from the `height' if rotation has occurred.
 In particular if the figure has been rotated by $-90^\circ$ 
 then it will have zero height but large depth.
\item[keepaspectratio]\NEWfeature{1995/09/27}
 Boolean valued key like `clip'.
 If set to true then specifying both `width' and `height' (or
 `totalheight') does not distort the figure but scales such that
  neither of the specified dimensions is \emph{exceeded}.
\item[scale] Scale factor.
\item[clip] Either `true' or `false' (or no value, which is equivalent
  to `true'). Clip the graphic to the bounding box.
\item[draft] a boolean valued key, like `clip'. Locally switches to
  draft mode.
\item[type] Specify the graphics type.
\item[ext]  Specify the file extension. This should \emph{only} be
 used in conjunction with |type|.
\item[read] Specify the file extension of the `read file'. This
 should \emph{only} be used in conjunction with |type|. 
\item[command] Specify any command to be applied to the file.  This
 should \emph{only} be used in conjunction with |type|.
\end{description}

For the keys specifying the original size (i.e,, the bounding box,
trim and viewport keys) the units can be omitted, in
which case bp (i.e., PostScript points) are assumed.

The first seven keys specify the original size of the image. This size
needs to be specified in the case that the file can not be read by
\TeX, or it contains an incorrect size `BoundingBox' specification.

|bbllx|\ldots\ |\bbury| are mainly for compatibility for older
packages.\\
|bbllx=a, bblly=b, bburx=c, bbury=d|\\
is equivalent to\\
|bb = a b c d|.

|natheight| and |natwidth| are just shorthands for setting the lower
left coordinate to 0 0 and the upper right coordinate to the specified
width and height.

The next few keys specify any scaling or rotation to be applied to the
image. To get these effects using the standard package, the
|\includegraphics| call must be placed inside the argument of a
|\rotatebox| or |\scalebox| command.

The keys are read left-to-right, so |[angle=90, height=1in]| means
rotate by 90 degrees, and then scale to a height of 1in. 
|[height=1in, angle=90]| would result in a final \emph{width} of 1in.

If the \textsf{calc} package is also loaded the lengths may use 
\textsf{calc} syntax, for instance to specify a width of 2\,cm 
less than the text width: |[width=\textwidth-2cm]|.

\TeX\ leaves the space specified either in the file, or in
the optional arguments. If any part of the image is actually outside
this area, it will by default overprint the surrounding text. 
If the star form is used, or |clip| specified, any part of the image
outside this area will not be printed.

The last four keys suppress the parsing of the filename. If they are
used, the main \emph{file} argument should not have the file
extension. They correspond to the arguments of |\DeclareGraphicsRule|
described below.

To see the effect that the various options have consider the file
|a.ps|. This file contains the bounding box specification
\begin{verbatim}
%%BoundingBox:100 100 172 172
\end{verbatim}
That is, the printed region consists of a one-inch square, 100\,pt in
from the bottom and left hand edges of the paper.

In all the following examples the input will be of the form
\begin{verbatim}
left---\fbox{\includegraphics{a}}---right
\end{verbatim}
With different options supplied to |\includegraphics|.

No optional argument.\\
left---\fbox{\includegraphics{a}}---right

\gs |\scalebox{0.5}{\includegraphics{a}}|\\
\gx |\includegraphics[scale=.5]{a}|\\
left---\fbox{\includegraphics[scale=.5]{a}}---right

\gs |\includegraphics[115,110][135,145]{a}}|\\
\gx |\includegraphics[bb= 115 110 135 145]{a}|\\
left---\fbox{\includegraphics[bb= 115 110 135 145]{a}}---right

\gs |\includegraphics*[115,110][135,145]{a}}|\\
\gx |\includegraphics[bb= 115 110 135 145,clip]{a}|\\
left---\fbox{\includegraphics[bb= 115 110 135 145,clip]{a}}---right

\gs |\scalebox{0.5}{\includegraphics{a}}|
                   and |draft| option.\\
\gx |\includegraphics[scale=.5, draft]{a}|\\
left---\fbox{\includegraphics[scale=.5, draft]{a}}---right

\subsection{Other commands in the \package{graphics} package}

\begin{decl}
|\graphicspath|\arg{dir-list}
\end{decl}
This optional declaration may be used to specify a list of directories
in which to search for graphics files. The format is the same as for
the \LaTeXe\ primitive |\input@path|. A list of directories, each in a
|{}| group (even if there is only one in the list). For example:\\
  |\graphicspath{{eps/}{tiff/}}|\\
 would cause the system to look in the subdirectories |eps| and |tiff|
 of the current directory. This is unix syntax, on a Mac it would be:\\
 |\graphicspath{{:eps:}{:tiff:}}|\\
 Note the differing conventions, an initial |:| is needed on Macintosh
 systems to denote the current folder, whereas on unix an initial |/|
 would denote the top level `root' directory.

 The default setting of this path is
 |\input@path| that is: graphics files will be found wherever \TeX\
 files are found.

\begin{decl}
|\DeclareGraphicsExtensions|\arg{ext-list}
\end{decl}
 \NEWdescription{1994/12/01}
 This specifies the behaviour of the system when no file extension
 is specified in the argument to |\includegraphics|.
 \arg{ext-list} should be a comma separated list of file extensions.
 (White space is ignored between the entries.)
 A file name is produced by appending one extension from the list.
 If a file is found, the system acts as if that extension had been
 specified. If not, the next extension in \emph{ext-list} is tried.


Note that if the extension is not specified in the |\includegraphics|
command, the graphics file must exist at the time \LaTeX\ is run, as
the existence of the file is used to determine which extension from
the list to choose. However if a file extension \emph{is} specified,
e.g.\ |\includegraphics{a.ps}| instead of |\includegraphics{a}|, then
the graphics file need not exist at the time \LaTeX\ is used. (In
particular it may be created on the fly by  the \m{command}
specified in the |\DeclareGraphicsRule| command described below.)
\LaTeX\ does however need to be able to determine the size of the
image so this size must be specified in arguments, or the `read file'
must exist at the time \LaTeX\ is used.

\begin{decl}
|\DeclareGraphicsRule|\arg{ext}\arg{type}\arg{read-file}\arg{command}
\end{decl}
 Any number of these declarations can be made. They determine how the
 system behaves when a file with extension \emph{ext} is specified.
 (The extension may be specified explicitly or, if the argument to
 |\includegraphics| does not have an extension, it may be a default
 extension from the \emph{ext-list} specified with 
 |\DeclareGraphicsExtensions|.)
 
\emph{ext} the file extension for which this rule applies. As a special
case, \emph{ext} may be given as |*| to denote the default behaviour for
all undeclared extensions (see the example below).

\emph{type} is the `type' of file involved. All files of the same type
will be input with the same internal command (which must be defined in
a `driver file'). For example files with extensions |ps|, |eps|,
|ps.gz| may all be classed as type |eps|.

\emph{read-file} determines the extension of the file that should be
read to determine size information. It may be the same as \emph{ext}
but it may be different, for example |.ps.gz| files are not readable
easily by \TeX, so you may want to put the bounding box information in
a separate file with extension  |.ps.bb|. If \emph{read-file} is empty,
|{}|, then the system will not try to locate an external file for size
info, and the size must be specified in the arguments of
|\includegraphics|. If the driver file specifies a procedure for
reading size files for \emph{type}, that will be used, otherwise the 
procedure for reading |eps| files will be used. Thus the size of
bitmap files may be specified in a file with a PostScript style
|%%BoundingBox| line, if no other specific format is available.

As a special case |*| may be used to denote the
same extension as the graphic file. This is mainly of use in
conjunction with using |*| as the extension, as in that case the
particular graphic extension is not known. For example
\begin{verbatim}
 \DeclareGraphicsRule{*}{eps}{*}{}
\end{verbatim}
This would declare a default rule, such that all unknown extensions
would be treated as EPS files, and the graphic file would be read for
a BoundingBox comment.

\emph{command} is usually empty, but if non empty it is used in place
of the filename in the |\special|. Within this argument, |#1| may be
used to denote the filename. Thus using the dvips driver, one may
use\\
|\DeclareGraphicsRule{.ps.gz}{eps}{.ps.bb}{`zcat #1}|\\
the final argument causes dvips to use the |zcat| command to unzip the
file before inserting it into the PostScript output.

Note that \LaTeX\ will find the graphics file by searching along
TEXINPUTS (and possibly other places, as specified with
|\graphicspath|) however it may be that the command you specify
in this argument can not find such files unless they are in the
current directory. On some systems it may be possible to modify
the command so that it will find any files that \LaTeX\ can find.
For example on newer web2c \TeX\ releases on unix, one may modify the
above command so that the last argument is:\\
|{`zcat `kpsewhich -n latex tex #1`}|\\
which incantation causes the |kpsewhich| program to find the
file, by searching along \LaTeX's path, and then pass the full path
name to the |zcat| program so that it can uncompress the file.
Any such uses are very system dependent, and would best be placed in 
a |graphics.cfg| file, thus keeping the document itself portable.

\subsection{Global setting of keys}

Most of the \package{keyval} keys used in the \package{graphicx} package
may also be set using the command |\setkeys| provided by the
\package{keyval} package.

For instance, suppose you wanted all the files to be included in the
current document to be scaled to 75\% of the width of the lines of text,
then one could issue the following command:\\
|\setkeys{Gin}{width=0.75\textwidth}|\\
Here `|Gin|' is the name used for the \package{keyval} keys associated
with `Graphics inclusion'. All following
|\includegraphics| commands (within the same group or environment) will
act as if |[width=0.75\textwidth]| had been specified, in addition to
any other key settings actually given in the optional argument.

Similarly to make all |\rotatebox| arguments take an argument in
radians, one just needs to specify:\\
|\setkeys{Grot}{units=6.28318}|

\subsection{Compatibility between \package{graphics} and
  \package{graphicx}}

For a document author, there are not really any problems of
compatibility between the two packages. You just choose the interface
that you personally prefer, and then use the appropriate package.

For a package or class writer the situation is slightly
different. Suppose that you are writing a letter class that needs to
print a company logo as part of the letterhead.

As the author of the class you may want to give the users the
possibility of using  either interface in their letters (should they
need to include any further graphics into the letter body). 
In this case the class should load the \package{graphics} package (not
\package{graphicx}, as this would commit any users of the class to the
\package{keyval} interface). The logo should be included with
|\includegraphics| either with \emph{no} optional argument (if the
correct size information is in the file) or \emph{both} optional
arguments otherwise. 
Do not use the \emph{one} optional argument form, as the meaning of this
argument would change (and generate errors) if the user were to load
\package{graphicx} as well as your class.

\section{Remaining packages in the graphics bundle}

\subsection{Epsfig}
This is a small package essentially a `wrapper' around the
\package{graphicx} package, defining a command |\psfig| which has the
syntax\\
|\psfig{file=xxx,...}| rather than |\includegraphics[...]{xxx}|.\\
It also has a few more commands to make it slightly more compatible with
the old \LaTeX~2.09 style of the same name.

\subsection{Trig}
The trig package is not intended to be used directly in documents. It
calculates sine, cosine and tangent trigonometric functions. These
are used to calculate the space taken up by a rotated box. This
package is also used by the |fontinst| program which converts
PostScript files to a form usable by \TeX.

As well as being used as a \LaTeX\ package, the macros may be extracted
with the \package{docstrip} options \texttt{plain,package}. In this case
the \LaTeX\ package declarations are omitted from the file, and the
macros may be directly used as part of another macro file (they work
with any format based on plain \TeX.)

\subsection{Keyval}
The \package{keyval} package is intended to be used by other
packages. It provides a generic way of setting `keys' as used by the
\package{graphicx} package, and splitting up the comma separated lists
of \m{key}~=~\m{value} pairs.

Like the \package{trig} package, these macros may be extracted and used
as part of another macro file, based on plain \TeX, as well as the
standard use as a \LaTeX\ package.

By default an undeclared key will generate an error.
If however the option  \texttt{unknownkeysallowed} is used, then
unknown keys will be silently ignored (leaving a message in the log
file). This option is also accepted by the \textsf{graphicx} package.

\subsection{Pstcol}
\package{PSTricks}, by Timothy Van Zandt is an immensely powerful
package that enables a very full featured interface between PostScript
and \TeX. Unfortunately the colour support in \package{PSTricks} is
slightly incompatible with the colour mechanism defined in the
\package{color} package. The \package{pstcol} package is a (hopefully
temporary) package that modifies a very small number of internal
PSTricks functions, to remove this incompatibility. If
\package{pstricks} is loaded via this package, you may use any colours
defined by \package{color} package commands within \package{pstricks}
commands, and vice versa.

\subsection{Lscape}
The \package{lscape} package requires and takes the same options
as the \package{graphics} package. It defines a |landscape| environment
within which page bodies are rotated through 90 degrees. The page head
and foot are not affected, they appear in the standard (portrait)
position.
\end{document}

leshouchesp.tex
%% This document created by Scientific Word (R) Version 3.5

\documentclass[eqseqnum]{kapproc}%
\usepackage{amsmath}
\usepackage[dvips]{graphicx}%
\usepackage{amsfonts}%
\usepackage{amssymb}
%TCIDATA{OutputFilter=latex2.dll}
%TCIDATA{LastRevised=Sunday, February 13, 2005 14:38:34}
%TCIDATA{<META NAME="GraphicsSave" CONTENT="32">}
%TCIDATA{Language=American English}
\upperandlowercase \setcounter{secnumdepth}{1}
\setcounter{tocdepth}{2} \normallatexbib


\begin{document}
\articletitle{Random Matrices and\\ Supersymmetry\\ in Disordered
Systems}
\author{K.B. Efetov}
\affil{Theoretische Physik III, Ruhr-Universit�t Bochum, 44780
Bochum, Germany,\\ and L.D. Landau Institute for Theoretical
Physics, 117940 Moscow, Russia}
\email{efetov@tp3.rub.de}
\chaptitlerunninghead{Random Matrices and Supersymmetry}

\begin{abstract}
It is described how one comes to the Wigner-Dyson random matrix theory (RMT)
starting from a model of a disordered metal. The lectures start with a
historical introduction where basic ideas of the RMT and theory of disordered
metals are reviewed. This part is followed by an introduction into
supermathematics (mathematics operating with both commuting and anticommuting
variables). The main ideas of the supersymmetry method are given and basic
formulae are derived. Both level-level correlations and fluctuations of
amplitudes of wave functions are discussed. It is shown how one can both
obtain known formulae of the RMT and go beyond. In the last part some recent
progress in the further development of the method and possible perspectives
are discussed.

\end{abstract}





\begin{keywords}
Random matrices, disordered systems, supersymmetry, non-linear sigma-model.
\end{keywords}

\section*{Introduction}

\subsection{Wigner-Dyson Theory}

According to basic principles of quantum mechanics the energy spectrum of a
particle in a limited volume is discrete. The precise values of the energy
depend on the boundary conditions and the interactions in system. In many
cases these quantities can be calculated with a certain accuracy. However,
often the interactions are so complicated that calculations for the single
levels become impossible. On the other hand, the complexity of the
interactions can lead to the idea of a statistical description in which
information about separate levels is neglected and only averaged quantities
are studied. Density of states, energy level and wave functions correlations
are quantities that can be studied in the statistical approach. Sometimes, it
is sufficient to study the average of, e.g., the density of states or its
variance. In other cases one may be interested in a full statistical
description that can be achieved calculating distribution functions. Studying
the level statistics is, to some extent, analogous to the statistical study of
the motion of atoms and molecules, which is the subject of statistical physics.

The idea of the statistical description of the energy levels was first
proposed by Wigner \cite{wigner} for study of highly excited nuclear levels in
complex nuclei. In such nuclei a large number of particles interact in an
unknown way and the main assumption was that the interactions were equally
probable. Of course, in order to specify the meaning of the words ``equally
probable'' one had to formulate a statistical hypothesis in terms of a
probability distribution that would play the role of the Gibbs distribution.

This was done in Ref. \cite{wigner} in the following way. Choosing a complete
set of eigenfunctions as a basis, one represents the Hamiltonian $H$ as a
matrix with matrix elements $H_{mn}$. The matrix elements $H_{mn}$ are assumed
random with a certain probability distribution. It is clear that the
distribution should not depend of the basis chosen, which implies an invariant
form of the distribution function. In the language of the random matrices
$H_{mn}$ the corresponding distribution function can contain only $Trf\left(
H\right)  $, where $f$ is a function.

The first statistical theory \cite{wigner} was based on a Gaussian
distribution. According to the Gaussian statistical hypothesis a physical
system having $N$ quantum states has the statistical weight $D\left(
H\right)  $%
\begin{equation}
D\left(  H\right)  =A\exp\left[  -\sum_{m,n=1}^{N}\frac{\left|  H_{mn}\right|
^{2}}{2a^{2}}\right]  =A\exp\left[  \frac{-TrH^{2}}{2a^{2}}\right]  \label{a1}%
\end{equation}
In Eq. (\ref{a1}) the parameter $a$ is a cutoff excluding strong interaction,
$H$ is a random $N\times N$ matrix, and $A$ is a normalization coefficient.

It is important to emphasize that the weight $D\left(  H\right)  $ is rather
arbitrary and other forms for the distribution functions can be suggested. Of
course, the dependence of the mean energy level spacing $\Delta\left(
\varepsilon\right)  $
\begin{equation}
\Delta^{-1}\left(  \varepsilon\right)  =\left\langle tr\delta\left(
\varepsilon-H\right)  \right\rangle _{D} \label{a2}%
\end{equation}
on the energy $\varepsilon$ is different for different
distributions $D\left( H\right)  $. (In Eq. (\ref{a2}) the symbol
$\left\langle ...\right\rangle _{D}$ stands for the averaging with
the distribution $D\left(  H\right)  $). For example, the
distribution function $D\left(  H\right)  $ for the Gaussian
distribution, Eq. (\ref{a1}), has the form of a semicircle (Wigner
semicircle law) (for a review, see, e.g. Ref.\cite{mehta}).

What is more interesting, level correlations described, for example, by the
level-level correlation function $R\left(  \omega\right)  $
\begin{equation}
R\left(  \omega\right)  =\Delta^{2}\left(  \varepsilon\right)  \left\langle
Tr\delta\left(  \varepsilon-H\right)  Tr\delta\left(  \varepsilon
-\omega-H\right)  \right\rangle \label{a3}%
\end{equation}
prove to be universal in the limit $N\rightarrow\infty$ provided the energy
$\omega$ is much smaller than the characteristic scale of the variation of
$\Delta\left(  \varepsilon\right)  $. For the Wigner semicircle law, the
latter condition means that the energy $\varepsilon$ is not close to the
points $\varepsilon_{0}$, $-\varepsilon_{0}$, where the quantity $\Delta
^{-1}\left(  \varepsilon\right)  $ proportional to the average density of
states turns to zero.

In the absence of magnetic interactions violating the time reversal symmetry,
the wave functions and matrix elements $H_{mn}$ in Eq. (\ref{a1}) can be
chosen real. In this case the statistical properties of the systems are
described by real symmetric random matrices. The ensemble of real symmetric
matrices with the Gaussian distribution is often called the \textit{Gaussian
orthogonal ensemble }(GOE).

If the magnetic interactions are present in the system, the time reversal and
spin-rotation symmetry is violated and the wave functions are no longer real.
This means that one should deal with general Hermitian matrices without any
additional symmetry and integrate over the matrix elements $H_{mn}$ using only
the constraint $H_{mn}=\left(  H_{nm}\right)  ^{\ast}$. This system is called
the \textit{Gaussian unitary ensemble }(GUE).

The third possible type of the symmetry arises when the system is
time-reversal invariant but does not have central symmetry. In this case it is
also impossible to make all the matrix elements real. Nevertheless an
additional symmetry exists in this case. According to the Kramers theorem all
levels of the system remain doubly degenerate and every eigenvalue of the
matrix $H$ must appear twice. Matrices consisting of real quaternions $H_{mn}$
of the form%
\[
\left(
\begin{array}
[c]{cc}%
p_{mn} & q_{mn}\\
-q_{mn}^{\ast} & p_{mn}^{\ast}%
\end{array}
\right)
\]
and satisfying the condition $H_{mn}=\left(  H_{nm}\right)  ^{+}$ have this
property. The corresponding ensemble is called the \textit{Gaussian symplectic
ensemble }(GSE).

Somewhat different distribution functions were introduced later by Dyson
\cite{dyson} who suggested characterizing the system not by its Hamiltonian
but by an unitary $N\times N$ matrix $S$ whose elements give the transition
probabilities between states, where, again, $N$ is the number of the levels.
This matrix is related to the Hamiltonian $H$ of the system in a complicated
way that is not specified in the theory. According to the Dyson hypothesis the
correlation properties of $n$ successive energy levels of the system $\left(
n\ll N\right)  $ are statistically equivalent to those of $n$ successive
angles provided all the unitary matrices $S$ have equal probabilities. Again,
depending on the symmetry, one can distinguish among the three different
ensembles. The corresponding ensembles are called \textit{Circular ensembles.}

As concerns the complex nuclei, the orthogonal ensembles are most relevant for
their description because in order to change the level statistics one needs,
e.g. huge magnetic fields that hardly exist. However, the other two ensembles
have been under intensive discussions for problems of mesoscopic physics (for
a review, see \cite{ebook}). Moreover, it has been realized that one might
formulate additional ensembles of e.g. chiral matrices relevant for studying
properties of models for QCD (for a review, see the lecture by Jac
Verbaarschot\cite{verbaar}). It has been proven later that in total $10$
different symmetry classes exist \cite{az}. Most of the new ensembles may be
relevant to different disordered mesoscopic systems due the presence of, e.g.,
superconductivity or additional symmetries of the lattice.

I do not plan to discuss in these lectures the non-standard symmetry classes
and restrict myself by the Wigner-Dyson (WD) statistics. It is relevant to say
that calculation of the level-level correlation function, Eq. (\ref{a3}),
starting from the Gaussian or Circular ensembles is not a simple task. The
conventional method of the evaluation is using orthogonal
polynomials\cite{mehta}. The procedure is not difficult for the unitary
ensembles but one has to put a considerable effort to perform the calculations
for the orthogonal and symplectic ones. As it has been mentioned, the final
results are universal in the limit $N\rightarrow\infty$ and can be written for
the orthogonal, unitary and symplectic ensembles in the form
\begin{equation}
R_{orth}\left(  \omega\right)  =1-\frac{\sin^{2}x}{x^{2}}-\frac{d}{dx}\left(
\frac{\sin x}{x}\right)  \int_{1}^{\infty}\frac{\sin xt}{t}dt \label{a4}%
\end{equation}%
\begin{equation}
R_{unit}\left(  \omega\right)  =1-\frac{\sin^{2}x}{x^{2}} \label{a5}%
\end{equation}%
\begin{equation}
R_{sympl}\left(  \omega\right)  =1-\frac{\sin^{2}x}{x^{2}}+\frac{d}{dx}\left(
\frac{\sin x}{x}\right)  \int_{0}^{1}\frac{\sin xt}{t}dt \label{a6}%
\end{equation}
where $x=\pi\omega/\Delta,$ and $\Delta$ is the mean level spacing.

The functions $R\left(  \omega\right)  $, Eqs. (\ref{a4}, \ref{a5}, \ref{a6}),
tend to $1$ in the limit $\omega\rightarrow\infty$, which means that the
correlations are lost in this limit. In the opposite limit $x\rightarrow0$
they turn to zero as $x^{\beta},$ where $\beta=1,2,3$ for the orthogonal,
unitary and symplectic ensembles, respectively. This means that the
probability of finding a level at the distance $\omega$ from another level
decays at small $\omega$. The effect is know as ``level repulsion''. It is
important that Eqs. (\ref{a4}-\ref{a6}) describe the level-level correlation
function, Eq. (\ref{a3}), for both the Gaussian and Circular ensembles.

\subsection{Small disordered particles}

Nowadays the relevance of the random matrix theory (RMT) to mesoscopic physics
is almost evident and it is the starting point of many works on transport in
quantum dots, electromagnetic response of metallic grains, etc. However, it
took quite a long time before the ideas of the RMT penetrated from nuclear to
condensed matter physics.

There were several reasons for this slow development. First, until the end of
60's of the last century most of the objects studied in condensed matter
physics were macroscopic and the discreteness of the energy levels could be
neglected. Therefore the question about the level statistics was not so
interesting. Second, from the theoretical point of view it was not clear at
all how one could come to the Wigner-Dyson level statistics starting from the
Schr\"{o}dinger equation. It was clear that making perturbation theory in
interaction or disorder did not lead to the anything that would resemble Eqs.
(\ref{a4}-\ref{a6}).

As soon as experimentalists started investigation of granular materials (which
happened in 60's), a theory that would describe small metal systems became
nevessary. Such materials consist of small metal particles (grains) with the
diameter down to $10-100$\AA. These grains can be covered by an insulator and
therefore be well isolated from each other. A schematic view of the pattern
can be found in Fig.1
%TCIMACRO{\FRAME{ftbpF}{1.5376in}{1.5376in}{0pt}{}{}{fig1.eps}%
%{\special{ language "Scientific Word";  type "GRAPHIC";
%maintain-aspect-ratio TRUE;  display "USEDEF";  valid_file "F";
%width 1.5376in;  height 1.5376in;  depth 0pt;  original-width 3.9401in;
%original-height 3.9401in;  cropleft "0";  croptop "1";  cropright "1";
%cropbottom "0";  filename 'Fig1.eps';file-properties "XNPEU";}}}%
%BeginExpansion
\begin{figure}
[ptb]
\begin{center}
\includegraphics[
height=1.5376in,
width=1.5376in
]%
{Fig1.eps}%
\end{center}
\caption[]{
    Structure of a granular metal
}
\end{figure}
%EndExpansion

It is clear that one can speak now about discrete levels and study their
statistics. Of course, one needs low temperatures in order to prevent
inelastic processes smearing the levels but this is not so difficult
(temperatures $<1K$ can be sufficient).

In practice, the form of the grains can be not very regular, they can contain
defects and impurities and therefore the energy spectrum strongly fluctuates
from grain to grain. All this true even if one neglects the electron-electron
interaction. So, one naturally comes to the idea to describe the levels statistically.

The first work on the application of the RMT to small metallic grains was done
by Gorkov and Eliashberg (GE) \cite{ge}. These authors studied the
electromagnetic response of the system of the grains and therefore they needed
an information about the level-level correlation in a single grain. As the RMT
is purely phenomenological and nothing is assumed about the origin of the
randomness, this theory was taken by GE to describe the correlations. Starting
from the explicit form of the level-level correlation function $R\left(
\omega\right)  $, Eqs. (\ref{a4}-\ref{a6}), they calculated the desired
physical quantity.

GE identified correctly physical situations when the three symmetry classes
might be used. In the absence of any magnetic and spin orbit interactions they
suggested to use the orthogonal ensemble. If a magnetic field is applied or
there are magnetic impurities in the grains, the unitary ensemble should be
applicable. If there are no magnetic interactions but spin-orbital impurities
are present, the grains should be described by the symplectic ensemble.

Being the first application of the RMT in solid state physics, the
paper\cite{ge} remained the only application during the next $17$ years. This
is not surprising because using calculational schemes existed in that time no
indication in non-trivial level correlations could be seen. Let us discuss
this point in more details.

Studying a disordered system and neglecting electron-electron interactions one
can start with the following Hamiltonian%
\begin{equation}
H=\varepsilon\left(  \mathbf{\hat{p}}\right)  +U\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)
\label{a8}%
\end{equation}
where $\varepsilon\left(  \mathbf{\hat{p}}\right)  $ is the operator of the
kinetic energy and calculate the Green function $G_{\varepsilon}=\left(
\varepsilon-H\right)  ^{-1}$ performing an expansion in the disorder potential
$U\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  $. Usually, it is assumed that the $U\left(
\mathbf{r}\right)  $ is random and its fluctuations are Gaussian with
\begin{equation}
\left\langle U\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  \right\rangle =0\text{, }\left\langle
U\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  U\left(  \mathbf{r}^{\prime}\right)  \right\rangle
=\frac{1}{2\pi\nu\tau}\delta\left(  \mathbf{r-r}^{\prime}\right)  \label{a9}%
\end{equation}
where $\nu$ is the density of states and $\tau$ is the mean scattering time.

Making the perturbation theory in the random potential $U\left(
\mathbf{r}\right)  $ and averaging over this potential can be done using the
``cross technique'' \cite{agd}. Only diagrams without intersections of the
impurity lines are important in the standard approximation of the weak
disorder. For the one particle Green function the typical diagrams are
represented in Fig.2.%
%TCIMACRO{\FRAME{ftbpF}{2.3575in}{1.7694in}{0pt}{}{}{fig2.eps}%
%{\special{ language "Scientific Word";  type "GRAPHIC";
%maintain-aspect-ratio TRUE;  display "USEDEF";  valid_file "F";
%width 2.3575in;  height 1.7694in;  depth 0pt;  original-width 10.0024in;
%original-height 7.4936in;  cropleft "0";  croptop "1";  cropright "1";
%cropbottom "0";  filename 'Fig2.eps';file-properties "XNPEU";}}}%
%BeginExpansion
\begin{figure}
[ptb]
\begin{center}
\includegraphics[
height=1.7694in,
width=2.3575in
]%
{Fig2.eps}%
\end{center}
\caption[]{
  Typical diagrams for the Green function in a disordered metal
}
\end{figure}
%EndExpansion

As a result, one obtains for the averaged Green function $\left\langle
G\right\rangle $ the following expression%
\begin{equation}
G=\frac{1}{\varepsilon-\varepsilon\left(  \mathbf{p}\right)  \pm i/2\tau}
\label{a10}%
\end{equation}
where ``$+"$ corresponds to the retarded and ``$-"$ to the advanced Green functions.

Standard calculations based on a summation of ``ladder diagrams'' lead in this
case to the classical Drude formula for, e.g., the conductivity $\sigma\left(
\omega\right)  $
\begin{equation}
\sigma\left(  \omega\right)  =\frac{\sigma_{0}}{1-i\omega\tau},\text{ }%
\sigma_{0}=2e^{2}\nu D_{0} \label{a7}%
\end{equation}
where $D_{0}=v_{0}^{2}\tau/3$ is the classical diffusion coefficient, $\omega$
is the frequency and $e$ is the electron charge.

So long as the grain size remained larger than the atomic distances, no
deviations from this formula could be found and therefore the question about
the applicability of the RMT remained open. It is relevant to mention works by
Kubo performed in approximately the same time. In Ref. \cite{kubo1}he argued
that even very small irregularities (with size of the order of atomic
distances) of the shape of the metallic grains must lead to lifting of all
degeneracies of eigenstates that are present in ideally spherical particles.
This lead him to the conclusion that the mean energy level spacing $\Delta$ is
inversely proportional to the volume $V$ of the particle
\begin{equation}
\Delta=\left(  \nu V\right)  ^{-1} \label{b1}%
\end{equation}
where $\nu$ is density of states at the Fermi surface of the metal. Later Kubo
suggested \cite{kubo2} that the spacing distribution had to follow the Poisson
law. The latter differs essentially from the Wigner-Dyson RMT by the absence
of the level repulsion. The second work by Kubo, Ref.\cite{kubo2}, was
published several years after the work by Gorkov and Eliashberg, Ref.
\cite{ge}, and this shows that the applicability of the Wigner-Dyson
statistics to the small metal particles was far from being established in that time.

The situation started to change only at the end of 70's with the new
developments in the theory of Anderson localization. In the
publication\cite{aalr} a new scaling idea was put forward for description of
disordered samples of an arbitrary dimensionality. The most unusual was a
prediction that two dimensional initially metallic samples could not remain
metals in the presence of an arbitrary weak disorder and had to acquire
insulating properties. Again, using Eq. (\ref{a7}) it was not clear why
something had to happen in two dimension (the localization in one-dimensional
chains had been proven before and it was clear that the ladder diagrams
summation leading to Eq. (\ref{a7}) was not sufficient for that case).

Trying to understand how something unusual could happen in two dimensions
Gorkov, Larkin and Khmelnitskii \cite{glk} investigated more complicated
diagrams and found that a certain class of diagrams could lead to a divergence
in any dimensionality $d\leqslant2$. These are ``fan'' diagrams with the
maximal number of crossings. They are represented in Fig. 3
%TCIMACRO{\FRAME{ftbpF}{2.3506in}{1.7642in}{0pt}{}{}{fig3.eps}%
%{\special{ language "Scientific Word";  type "GRAPHIC";
%maintain-aspect-ratio TRUE;  display "USEDEF";  valid_file "F";
%width 2.3506in;  height 1.7642in;  depth 0pt;  original-width 10.0024in;
%original-height 7.4936in;  cropleft "0";  croptop "1";  cropright "1";
%cropbottom "0";  filename 'Fig3.eps';file-properties "XNPEU";}}}%
%BeginExpansion
\begin{figure}
[ptb]
\begin{center}
\includegraphics[
height=1.7642in,
width=2.3506in
]%
{Fig3.eps}%
\end{center}
\caption[]{Cooperon: a singular correction to conductivity

}
\end{figure}
%EndExpansion
and their sum is a new effective mode that is usually called ``cooperon''.
This mode has a form of a diffusion propagator and its contribution to the
conductivity can be written in the form%
\begin{equation}
\sigma\left(  \omega\right)  =\sigma_{0}\left(  1-\frac{1}{\pi\nu}\int\frac
{1}{D_{0}\mathbf{k}^{2}-i\omega}\frac{d^{d}\mathbf{k}}{\left(  2\pi\right)
^{d}}\right)  \label{a11}%
\end{equation}
It is clear from Eq. (\ref{a11}) that in the limit of low frequencies
$\omega\rightarrow0$ the second term in the brackets in Eq. (\ref{a11})
diverges in any dimension $d\leqslant2.$ This means that in a disordered film
the quantum correction to the classical conductivity diverges and this signals
(but, of course, does not prove) the possibility of the localization.

The scaling theory of the localization and the discovery of the new diffusion
modes was revolutionary in the theory of disordered systems but how can these
findings be related to the Wigner-Dyson theory?

Actually, Eq. (\ref{a11}) is the key to understanding that there can be
something beyond the classical Eq. (\ref{a7}) in small metal particles. One
needs only realizing that the case of small metal grains corresponds to the
zero dimensionality of the integral in Eq. (\ref{a11}). Due to the finite size
the values of the momentum $\mathbf{k}$ are quantized such that $k_{a}=2\pi
n_{a}/L_{a}$, where $n_{a}=0,$ $\pm1,$ $\pm2,$ $\pm3......$ , $a=\left(
x,y,z\right)  $, and $L_{a}$ is the size of the grain in the $a$ -direction.

At low frequencies $\omega\ll D_{0}/L^{2}$ the most important contribution in
the integral in Eq. (\ref{a11}) comes from the zero harmonics with
$\mathbf{k}=0$ and one can see that this contribution strongly diverges when
$\omega\rightarrow0$. Moreover, the quantum correction is proportional to
$\Delta/\omega$, where $\Delta$ is given by Eq. (\ref{b1}) and this is what
one can expect from Eqs. (\ref{a4}-\ref{a6}).

So, Eq. (\ref{a11}) really signals that something nontrivial can happen in
metal grains and the WD theory is not excluded. The diffusion modes play a
prominent role and it seems, at first glance, that one should merely write
proper diagrams and sum their contribution. However, even if this were
possible this would hardly correspond to Eq. (\ref{a4}-\ref{a6}). The problem
is that the expansion in terms of $\Delta/\omega$ cannot take into account the
oscillating part in Eqs. (\ref{a4}-\ref{a6}) even in principle. Summing the
diagrams one can hope to reproduce only non-oscillating asymptotics of these
equations. This means that another approach has to be developed.

The possibility to demonstrate that the energy level and wave functions
statistics can really be described by the RMT came first with the development
of the supersymmetry approach \cite{efetov1,ereview}. This method is based on
a representation of Green functions of a disordered metal in terms of an
integral over both commuting and anticommuting variables. Singling out
excitations with the lowest energy (diffusion modes) one can reduce
calculations to a supermatrix non-linear model. The supersymmetry method
allowed to prove for the first time that the level-level correlation function
for disordered particles is really described by Eqs. (\ref{a4}-\ref{a6}).
Later, using the supersymmetry technique Verbaarschot, Weidenm\"{u}ller and
Zirnbauer \cite{vwz} have derived Eqs. (\ref{a4}-\ref{a6}) starting directly
from the Gaussian ensembles, Eq. (\ref{a1}).

When deriving the non-linear $\sigma$-model for metallic particles it was very
important that they contained disorder. However, it is not the necessary
condition. Several years later Bohigas, Gianonni and Schmidt \cite{bgs}
conjectured that the RMT should describe correctly spectral properties of
quantum systems which are chaotic in their classical limit. In particular, the
Wigner-Dyson statistics had to be observed in clean metal particles (quantum
billiards) provided their shape was such that classical motion would be
chaotic. Their hypothesis was made on the basis of extensive numerics. For a
review of the subsequent activity in these fields the book \cite{suptrace} is
a good reference.

Historically, the description of disordered systems with a non-linear $\sigma
$-model has been suggested by Wegner \cite{wegner} using the replica method
and integration over conventional complex variables. In the first work there
were problems with convergence of functional integrals and therefore the
replica approach was further developed in the publications \cite{elk} and
\cite{sw}. The $\sigma$-model of Ref. \cite{sw} was obtained by the
integration over conventional variables and, as a result, the group of the
matrices $Q$ was non-compact. In contrast, the starting point of Ref.
\cite{elk} was a representation of Green functions in terms of integrals over
anticommuting (Grassmann) variables and this lead to a compact group of the
matrices $Q$.

Although both the replica and supersymmetry approach are equivalent when doing
the perturbation theory in the diffusion modes, the latter method is much more
efficient for non-perturbative calculations like the study of the level-level
correlations. This had become clear shortly after the works \cite{elk,sw} were
finished and this drawback of the replica approach motivated the development
of the supersymmetry one. It should be noticed that recently the oscillating
behavior of the level-level correlation function $R\left(  \omega\right)  $
has been obtained \cite{km,yl,kanzieper} using the compact replica $\sigma
$-model of Ref. \cite{elk}. However, the procedures used in these references
are considerably more complicated than the calculations by the supersymmetry
method and the limit of low frequencies $\omega\lesssim\Delta$ is still hardly achievable.

It is fair to say that the replica approach allows including electron-electron
interactions in a comparatively easy way \cite{finkelstein,fin1} and this has
been the main motivation in the attempts \cite{km,yl,kanzieper} to obtain
non-perturbative results within the replica technique. At the same time, it
was believed for a long time that an inclusion of the electron-electron
interaction into the supersymmetry scheme was impossible. However, this is not
quite so and, at least, not very strong interaction can be incorporated in the
supermatrix $\sigma$-model \cite{schwiete}.

It follows from this discussion that the supersymmetry approach is better
suitable for making connections with the RMT and therefore the present
lectures contain discussions based on this method only. It is possible neither
review here all works made in this direction nor present all details of the
calculations. For a more detailed information see the book \cite{ebook} and
more recent reviews \cite{fyodorov,gmw,mirlin,ast,asz}. It is relevant to
mention here that the word \textit{supersymmetry }has appeared in the
condensed matter physics in the publication by Parisi and Sourlas \cite{ps},
who discovered a complex symmetry in a model describing ferromagnets in a
random magnetic field. They used a concept of superspace including both
commuting and anticommuting variables.

Two other related directions of the use of the RMT are reviewed at this school
by Boris Altshuler (Quantum Chaos) and Jac Verbaarschot (QCD).

In the next sections I want to present the main ideas of the supersymmetry
approach and show how it can be used for both the level correlations and wave
functions statistics. It will be shown how to obtain the Wigner-Dyson
statistics and how to go beyond it. A new development concerning a
generalization of the supersymmetric $\sigma$-model to more complicated
situations will be outlined in the last section.

\section{Supersymmetry method.}

\subsection{Supermathematics}

The supersymmetry method is based on the use of the so called Grassmann
variables $\chi_{i}$, $i=1,$ $2,...,$ $n$ (the elements of the Grassmann
algebra) that are introduced in a completely formal way. These are abstract
objects but in many cases abstract mathematical constructions drastically
influence the development of physics. For example, nobody can dispute the
usefulness of complex numbers for physics, but what is the physical meaning of
$\sqrt{-1}$? Here I want to remind the reader basic formulae concerning
definitions and operations with objects containing combinations of the
Grassmann variables and conventional numbers (supermathematics).

The Grassmann variables are some mathematical objects obeying the following
anticommutation rules \cite{berezin}
\begin{equation}
\left\{  \chi_{i},\chi_{j}\right\}  =\chi_{i}\chi_{j}+\chi_{j}\chi_{i}=0
\label{c1}%
\end{equation}
for any $1\leq i,$ $j\leq n.$

The anticommutation rules, Eq. (\ref{c1}) hold in particular for $i=j$ and we
see that the square of an arbitrary variable $\chi_{i}$ is zero%
\begin{equation}
\chi_{i}^{2}=0 \label{c2}%
\end{equation}
For any anticommuting variable $\chi$ one can introduce its ``complex
conjugate) $\chi^{\ast}$. It is assumed by the definition that $\left(
\chi^{\ast}\right)  ^{\ast}=-\chi$, such that the ``square of the modulus is
``real''%
\begin{equation}
\left(  \chi_{i}^{\ast}\chi_{i}\right)  ^{\ast}=-\chi_{i}\chi_{i}^{\ast}%
=\chi_{i}^{\ast}\chi_{i} \label{c3}%
\end{equation}

The anticommuting variables $\chi_{i}$, Eq. (\ref{c1}-\ref{c3}), remained not
very useful until Berezin introduced integrals over these variables. The
integrals are nothing more than formal symbols introduced as follows
\begin{equation}
\int d\chi_{i}=\int d\chi_{i}^{\ast}=0,\text{ }\int\chi_{i}d\chi_{i}=\int
\chi_{i}^{\ast}d\chi_{i}^{\ast}=1 \label{c4}%
\end{equation}
It is implied that the ``differentials'' $d\chi_{i}$, $d\chi_{i}^{\ast}$
anticommute with each other and with the variables $\chi_{i},$ $\chi_{i}%
^{\ast}$%
\begin{align}
\left\{  d\chi_{i},d\chi_{j}\right\}   &  =\left\{  d\chi_{i},d\chi_{j}^{\ast
}\right\}  =\left\{  d\chi_{i}^{\ast},d\chi_{j}^{\ast}\right\}  =0\label{c5}\\
\left\{  d\chi_{i},\chi_{j}\right\}   &  =\left\{  d\chi_{i},\chi_{j}^{\ast
}\right\}  =\left\{  d\chi_{i}^{\ast},\chi_{j}\right\}  =\left\{  d\chi
_{i}^{\ast},\chi_{j}^{\ast}\right\}  =0\nonumber
\end{align}
The definition, Eq. (\ref{c4}), is sufficient for introducing integrals of an
arbitrary function. If such a functions depends only on one variable $\chi
_{i}$ it must be linear in $\chi_{i}$ because already $\chi_{i}^{2}=0.$
Assuming that the integral of a sum of two functions equals the sum of the
integrals we calculate the integral of the sum with Eq. (\ref{c4}). The
repeated integrals are implied by integrals over several variables. This
enables us to calculate the integral of a function of an arbitrary number of variables.

The most important for the development of the supersymmetry method are
Gaussian integrals. The direct integration shows that the following relation
is fulfilled%
\begin{equation}
I=\int\exp\left(  -\chi^{+}A\chi\right)  \prod_{i=1}^{n}d\chi_{i}^{\ast}%
d\chi_{i}=DetA \label{c6}%
\end{equation}
where $A$ is an $n\times n$ Hermitian matrix and%
\begin{equation}
\chi=\left(
\begin{array}
[c]{c}%
\chi_{1}\\
\chi_{2}\\
.\\
.\\
\chi_{n}%
\end{array}
\right)  \text{, }\chi^{+}=\left(
\begin{array}
[c]{ccccc}%
\chi_{1}^{\ast} & \chi_{2}^{\ast} & . & . & \chi_{n}^{\ast}%
\end{array}
\right)  \label{c7}%
\end{equation}
Eq. (\ref{c6}) differs from the corresponding equation for the commuting
variables by giving $\det A$ instead $\left(  \det A\right)  ^{-1}.$ This
remarkable difference is the basis of the supersymmetry method presented in
these lectures. In addition to Eq. (\ref{c6}) one can write one more useful
integral%
\begin{equation}
I_{2}=\frac{\int\chi_{i}\chi_{k}^{\ast}\exp\left(  -\chi^{+}A\chi\right)
\prod_{l=1}^{n}d\chi_{l}^{\ast}d\chi_{l}}{\int\exp\left(  -\chi^{+}%
A\chi\right)  \prod_{l=1}^{n}d\chi_{l}^{\ast}d\chi_{l}}=\left(  A^{-1}\right)
_{ik} \label{c8}%
\end{equation}
In contrast to the integral $I,$ Eq. (\ref{c6}), the integral $I_{2},$ Eq.
(\ref{c8}), is completely similar to the corresponding integral over
conventional numbers. Eq. (\ref{c8}) can be proven by the differentiation of
$\ln I$ in $A_{ki}.$

The next step is the introduction of supervectors and supermatrices. An $n+m$
component supervector is introduced as
\begin{equation}
\Phi=\left(
\begin{array}
[c]{c}%
\chi\\
S
\end{array}
\right)  \label{c9}%
\end{equation}
where the $n$- component vector $\chi$ is defined in Eq. (\ref{c7}). The
$m$-component vector $S$ has a similar form%
\begin{equation}
\left(
\begin{array}
[c]{c}%
S_{1}\\
S_{2}\\
.\\
.\\
S_{m}%
\end{array}
\right)  \label{c10}%
\end{equation}
but its components are conventional complex numbers.

In analogy with conventional vectors one can introduce the Hermitian
conjugation
\begin{equation}
\Phi^{+}=\left(  \Phi^{T}\right)  ^{\ast} \label{c11}%
\end{equation}
and the scalar product%
\begin{equation}
\Phi^{i+}\Phi^{j}=\sum_{\alpha=1}^{n}\chi_{\alpha}^{i\ast}\chi_{\alpha}%
^{j}+\sum_{\alpha=1}^{m}S_{\alpha}^{i\ast}S_{\alpha}^{j} \label{c12}%
\end{equation}
A linear transformation $F$ in the space of the supervectors converts a
supervector $\Phi$ into another supervector $\tilde{\Phi}$%
\begin{equation}
\tilde{\Phi}=F\Phi\label{c13}%
\end{equation}
Of course, the supervector $\tilde{\Phi}$ must have the same structure, Eq.
(\ref{c9}), as the supervector $\Phi.$ This imposes a restriction on the
structure of the supermatrix $F$ corresponding to the linear transformation
$F:$ it has to be of the form%
\begin{equation}
F=\left(
\begin{array}
[c]{cc}%
a & \sigma\\
\rho & b
\end{array}
\right)  \label{c14}%
\end{equation}
In Eq. (\ref{c14}) $a$ and $b$ are $n\times n$ and $m\times m$ matrices
containing only commuting variables, $\sigma$ and $\rho$ are $n\times m$ and
$m\times n$ matrices consisting of anticommuting ones. Matrices having the
structure, Eq. (\ref{c14}) can be called supermatrices.

Two supermatrices $F$ and $G$ of the rank $\left(  m+n\right)  \times\left(
n+m\right)  $ are assumed to multiply according to the conventional rules%
\begin{equation}
\left(  FG\right)  _{ik}=\sum_{l=1}^{m+n}F_{il}G_{lk} \label{c15}%
\end{equation}
and one can see that $FG$ is a supermatrix of the same form. In order to
define the supertranspose $F^{T}$ of the supermatrix $F$ one should use the
notion of the scalar product of two supervectors, Eq. (\ref{c12}). Again, by
analogy with the conventional definition the supermatrix $F^{T}$ is introduced
as%
\begin{equation}
\Phi_{1}^{T}F^{T}\Phi_{2}=\left(  F\Phi_{1}\right)  ^{T}\Phi_{2} \label{c16}%
\end{equation}
The transpose of a conventional matrix is obtained by transposing its indexes.
This is not as simple for the supermatrices. Writing out the scalar product on
both sides of Eq. (\ref{c16}) explicitly and using the anticommutation
relation, Eq. (\ref{c1}), one can see that the supermatrix $F^{T}$ is equal to%
\begin{equation}
F^{T}=\left(
\begin{array}
[c]{cc}%
a^{T} & -\rho^{T}\\
\sigma^{T} & b^{T}%
\end{array}
\right)  \label{c17}%
\end{equation}
where $a^{T},$ $b^{T},$ $\sigma^{T},$ and $\rho^{T}$ stand for the
conventional transposition of the matrices $a,$ $b,$ $\sigma,$ and $\rho$.

Using the scalar product, Eq. (\ref{c16}) one obtains immediately%
\begin{equation}
\left(  F_{1}F_{2}\right)  ^{T}=F_{2}^{T}F_{1}^{T} \label{c18}%
\end{equation}
The Hermitian conjugate $F^{+}$ of the matrix $F$ can be defined in a standard
way%
\begin{equation}
F^{+}=\left(  F^{T}\right)  ^{\ast} \label{c19}%
\end{equation}
Combining Eqs. (\ref{c3}, \ref{c18}, \ref{c19}) one can obtain%
\begin{equation}
\left(  F_{1}F_{2}\right)  ^{+}=F_{2}^{+}F_{1}^{+}\text{ and }\left(
F^{+}\right)  ^{+}=F \label{c20}%
\end{equation}
The latter equality shows that the operation of the Hermitian conjugation is
inverse to itself. The same is not generally true for the transposition%
\begin{equation}
\left(  F^{T}\right)  ^{T}\neq F \label{c21}%
\end{equation}
A very important operation in the theory of conventional matrices is taking
the trace of a matrix. If one takes the trace of a product of several matrices
it is invariant under cyclic permutations of the matrices. However, due to the
presence of anticommuting elements a proper operation for the supermatrices
should be defined in a different way. The supertrace $STrF$ of matrix of the
form, Eq.(\ref{c14}) is defined as
\begin{equation}
STrF=Tra-Trb \label{c22}%
\end{equation}
where the symbol $Tr$ stands for the conventional trace.

Although somewhat strange, the definition, Eq. (\ref{c22}) is very useful
because it is this operation that provides the invariance under the cyclic
permutations. We obtain for arbitrary supermatrices $F_{i}$ of the form, Eq.
(\ref{c14})%
\begin{equation}
STrF_{1}F_{2}=STrF_{2}F_{1} \label{c23}%
\end{equation}
and%
\begin{equation}
STr\left(  F_{1}F_{2}...F_{n}\right)  =STr\left(  F_{n}F_{1}F_{2}%
...F_{n-1}\right)  \label{c24}%
\end{equation}
In addition to the supertrace it is convenient to introduce a superdeterminant
of the supermatrix $F$%
\begin{equation}
\ln SDetF=STr\ln F \label{c25}%
\end{equation}
The superdeterminant $SDetF$ can also be written as%
\begin{equation}
SDetF=Det\left(  a-\sigma b^{-1}\rho\right)  Detb^{-1} \label{c26}%
\end{equation}
The connection between the superdeterminant and supertrace enables us to prove
immediately the multipliticity of the superdeterminant%
\begin{equation}
SDet\left(  F_{1}F_{2}\right)  =\left(  SDetF_{1}\right)  \left(
SDetF_{2}\right)  \label{c27}%
\end{equation}
The rules of the operations with the supervectors and supermatrices are very
convenient because they are similar to those of conventional linear algebra.
In fact, one can manipulate superobjects in exactly the same way as
conventional objects. This simplifies calculations with quantities containing
both types of variables considerably.

Now we can write Gaussian integrals over supervectors that generalize the
integrals over conventional complex numbers or Grassmann variable. A direct
calculation shows that%
\begin{equation}
I^{s}=\int\exp\left(  -\Phi^{+}F\Phi\right)  d\Phi^{\ast}d\Phi=SDetF,
\label{c28}%
\end{equation}%

\[
d\Phi^{\ast}d\Phi=\pi^{-m}\prod_{i=1}^{n}d\chi_{i}^{\ast}d\chi_{i}\prod
_{k=1}^{m}dS_{i}^{\ast}dS_{i}%
\]
and
\begin{equation}
I_{2}^{s}=\frac{\int\Phi_{i}\Phi_{k}^{\ast}\exp\left(  -\Phi^{+}F\Phi\right)
d\Phi^{\ast}d\Phi}{\int\exp\left(  -\Phi^{+}F\Phi\right)  d\Phi^{\ast}d\Phi
}=\left(  F^{-1}\right)  _{ik} \label{c29}%
\end{equation}

The formulae written in this subsection give complete information about
integrals over the Grassmann variables, supervectors, and supermatrices. This
information will be directly used for constructing the supersymmetry method.

\subsection{Physical quantities as integrals over supervectors. Averaging over disorder.}

Eq. (\ref{c29}) enables us to express physical quantities in terms of
functional integrals over supervectors. The form of the integrals that will be
obtained is such that averaging over disorder can be performed the beginning
of all calculations.

I start with the Schr\"{o}dinger equation for electrons without any
electron-electron interactions but in a presence of an external potential
containing both regular and irregular parts. The regular part can describe
potential walls and other features of the system whereas the irregular part
$H_{1}$ of the Hamiltonian stands for disorder. The Schr\"{o}dinger equation
takes the form%
\begin{equation}
H\phi_{k}=\varepsilon_{k}\phi_{k},\text{ }H=H_{0}+H_{1}\text{, }\left\langle
H_{1}\right\rangle =0 \label{c30}%
\end{equation}
where $\phi_{k}$ and $\varepsilon_{k}$ are eigenfunctions and eigenvalues,
respectively. The angular brackets $\left\langle ...\right\rangle $ stand for
the averaging over disorder.

The most important physical quantities can be expressed in terms of retarded
$G_{\varepsilon}^{R}$ and advanced $G_{\varepsilon}^{A}$ Green functions of
the Schr\"{o}dinger equation. Using the spectral expansion the Green functions
$G_{\varepsilon}^{R,A}$ can be written in the form
\begin{equation}
G_{\varepsilon}^{R,A}\left(  \mathbf{r,r}^{\prime}\right)  =\sum_{k}\frac
{\phi_{k}\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  \phi_{k}^{\ast}\left(  \mathbf{r}^{\prime
}\right)  }{\varepsilon-\varepsilon_{k}\pm i\delta}=\sum_{k}G_{\varepsilon
k}^{R,A}\phi_{k}\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  \phi_{k}^{\ast}\left(
\mathbf{r}^{\prime}\right)  \label{c31}%
\end{equation}
These functions satisfy the equation%
\begin{equation}
\left(  \varepsilon-H\right)  G_{\varepsilon}^{R,A}\left(  \mathbf{r,r}%
^{\prime}\right)  =\delta\left(  \mathbf{r-r}^{\prime}\right)  \label{c31a}%
\end{equation}

The average density of states $\rho\left(  \varepsilon\right)  $ (this
quantity is proportional to $\Delta^{-1}$, Eq. (\ref{a2})) can be written as%
\begin{align}
\left\langle \rho\left(  \varepsilon,\mathbf{r}\right)  \right\rangle  &
=\left\langle \sum_{k}\phi_{k}^{\ast}\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  \phi
_{k}\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  \delta\left(  \varepsilon-\varepsilon
_{k}\right)  \right\rangle \label{c32}\\
&  =\frac{1}{\pi}\left\langle \operatorname{Im}G_{\varepsilon}^{A}\left(
\mathbf{r,r}\right)  \right\rangle
\end{align}
whereas the level-level correlation function $R\left(  \omega\right)  $ takes
the form%
\begin{equation}
R\left(  \omega\right)  =\left(  \frac{\Delta}{\pi}\right)  ^{2}\left\langle
\sum_{k,m}\operatorname{Im}G_{k,\varepsilon-\omega}^{A}\operatorname{Im}%
G_{m,\varepsilon}^{A}\right\rangle \label{c33}%
\end{equation}

We see from Eqs. (\ref{c32}, \ref{c33}) that, as soon as we are able to
average the Green functions or their products over the disorder, the
quantities of interest are found. However, this cannot be done directly using
Eqs. (\ref{c32}, \ref{c33}) and we need another representation for the Green
functions. Of course, one can do perturbation theory in the disorder potential
but, as it has been already discussed, such an approach can hardly help in
obtaining the Wigner-Dyson statistics.

What will be done now is writing the Green functions in a form that would be
suitable for averaging over the disorder in the very beginning. This can be
conveniently done with the integrals over the supervectors. I want to present
here the main scheme only. All necessary details can be found in the book
\cite{ebook}. As the main interest is to calculate the level-level correlation
function $R\left(  \omega\right)  ,$ Eq. (\ref{c33}), all formulae will be
written for this case. Calculating the density of states, Eq. (\ref{c32}), is
a simpler and less interesting task.

Let us introduce $8$-component supervectors $\psi$ consisting of $4$-component
supervectors $\psi^{1}$ and $\psi^{2}$ such that
\begin{equation}
\psi^{m}=\left(
\begin{array}
[c]{c}%
\theta^{m}\\
v^{m}%
\end{array}
\right)  ,\text{ }\theta^{m}=\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\left(
\begin{array}
[c]{c}%
\chi^{m\ast}\\
\chi^{m}%
\end{array}
\right)  ,\text{ }v^{m}=\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\left(
\begin{array}
[c]{c}%
S^{m\ast}\\
S^{m}%
\end{array}
\right)  , \label{c34}%
\end{equation}
$m=1,2.$

For the supervectors $\psi$ of the form of Eq. (\ref{c34}) one can define, in
addition to transposition and Hermitian conjugation, the operation of the
``charge conjugation''%
\begin{equation}
\bar{\psi}=\left(  C\psi\right)  ^{T},\text{ }\bar{\psi}^{m}=\left(
\begin{array}
[c]{cc}%
\bar{\theta}^{m}, & v^{m}%
\end{array}
\right)  \label{c35}%
\end{equation}
In Eq. (\ref{c35}), $T$ stands for transposition, and $C$ is the supermatrix
of the form%
\[
C^{mn}=\Lambda^{mn}\left(
\begin{array}
[c]{cc}%
c_{1} & 0\\
0 & c_{2}%
\end{array}
\right)
\]
where $\Lambda$ is the diagonal supermatrix%
\begin{equation}
\Lambda=\left(
\begin{array}
[c]{cc}%
\mathbf{1} & 0\\
0 & -\mathbf{1}%
\end{array}
\right)  \label{c36}%
\end{equation}
with $\mathbf{1}$ the unity $4\times4$ unity matrix.

The matrices $c_{1}$ and $c_{2}$ have the form%
\begin{equation}
c_{1}=\left(
\begin{array}
[c]{cc}%
0 & -1\\
1 & 0
\end{array}
\right)  ,\text{ }c_{2}=\left(
\begin{array}
[c]{cc}%
0 & 1\\
1 & 0
\end{array}
\right)  \label{c37}%
\end{equation}
The function $R\left(  \omega\right)  $ is determined by products $G^{A}G^{R},
$ $G^{R}G^{R}$ and $G^{A}G^{A}.$ The last two products are not interesting
because the average of their products is equal for weak disorder to the
product of their average. When calculating these quantities the diffusion
modes discussed in the Introduction do not appear. Therefore let us
concentrate on the calculation of the product $G^{A}G^{R}.$ Using Eqs.
\ref{c28}, \ref{c29}) we can write this quantity as%
\begin{equation}
G_{\varepsilon-\omega}^{A}\left(  \mathbf{r,r}\right)  G_{\varepsilon}%
^{R}\left(  \mathbf{r}^{\prime},\mathbf{r}^{\prime}\right)  =\left(
\frac{\Delta}{\pi}\right)  ^{2}\int\psi^{1}\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)
\bar{\psi}^{1}\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  \psi^{2}\left(  \mathbf{r}^{\prime
}\right)  \bar{\psi}^{2}\left(  \mathbf{r}^{\prime}\right)  \exp\left(
-L\right)  D\psi\label{c38}%
\end{equation}
where the Lagrangian $L$ has the form%
\begin{equation}
L=i\int\bar{\psi}\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  \left(  -\tilde{H}_{0}-U\left(
\mathbf{r}\right)  -\frac{1}{2}\left(  \omega+i\delta\right)  \Lambda\right)
\psi\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  d\mathbf{r} \label{c39}%
\end{equation}
where $U\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  $ the impurity potential. The operator
$\tilde{H}_{0}$ equals%
\begin{equation}
\tilde{H}_{0}=\varepsilon\left(  -i\nabla_{r}\right)  -\varepsilon
+\frac{\omega}{2} \label{c40}%
\end{equation}
where $\varepsilon\left(  -i\nabla_{r}\right)  $ is the spectrum.

I would like to draw attention at this point that the weight denominator is
absent in Eq. (\ref{c38}), which contrasts the analogous integrals, Eqs.
(\ref{c8},\ref{c29}). Actually, this is a consequence of the fact that $F$ in
Eq. (\ref{c29}) is taken as unity in the space of the $2\times2$ supermatrices
when writing Eq. (\ref{c38}). In other words, the weight denominator is absent
due to the difference of the results of the Gaussian integration over the
anticommuting variables $\chi,$ Eq. (\ref{c6}), (one obtains $DetA$) and the
corresponding formula for the integration over conventional numbers that gives
$\left(  DetA\right)  ^{-1}$.

The possibility to write the Green function in the form of Eq. (\ref{c38})
without the weight denominator is the reason why the integration over the
supervectors is used. As the weight denominator is absent one can immediately
average over impurities in Eq. (\ref{c38}).

Let us assume for simplicity that the distribution of the random potential
$U\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  $ in Eq. (\ref{c39}) is specified by Eq.
(\ref{a9})$.$ Then, the averaging over the random potential is simple and one
obtains again Eq. (\ref{c38}) but now the Lagrangian $L$ should be written as%
\begin{equation}
L=\int\left[  -i\bar{\psi}\tilde{H}_{0}\psi+\frac{1}{4\pi\nu\tau}\left(
\bar{\psi}\psi\right)  ^{2}-\frac{i\left(  \omega+i\delta\right)  }{2}%
\bar{\psi}\Lambda\psi\right]  d\mathbf{r} \label{c41}%
\end{equation}
Eq. (\ref{c41}) shows that we have reduced the initial disordered problem to a
regular model with an $\psi^{4}$ interaction. Of course, it does not help to
solve it exactly but now we can use approximations well developed in theory of
interacting particles.

The Lagrangian $L$ in Eq. (\ref{c41}) is similar to those studied in field
theory. Let us remark that at $\omega=0$ the Lagrangian is invariant under
rotations of the supervectors in the superspace because it depends on the
square of ``length'' only. The frequency $\omega$ violates this symmetry and,
if one uses an analogy with spin models, plays the role of an ``external
field''. The violation of supersymmetry by the frequency is due to the fact
that Eq. (\ref{c41}) is written for the product $G^{R}G^{A}$ (the presence of
the matrix $\Lambda$ is a direct consequence of this). The symmetry would not
be violated in the corresponding integrals for $\left\langle G^{R}%
G^{R}\right\rangle $ and $\left\langle G^{A}G^{A}\right\rangle .$ The
averaging of the simpler Lagrangian corresponding to the density of states
(one averaged Green function) results also in a model with the interaction
$\psi^{4},$ but the supersymmetry in this case is not violated. The diffusion
modes discussed previously exist only as a result of the violation of the
supersymmetry (Goldstone modes).

\subsection{Spontaneous breaking of the symmetry and Goldstone modes.
Non-linear $\sigma$-model.}

It is clearly not possible to calculate any correlation function with the
Lagrangian $L,$ Eq. (\ref{c41}), exactly (except for the case of the
one-dimensional chain or the Bethe lattice, where one can write recurrence
equations. Further calculations will be performed in the limit of large mean
free times $\tau,$ which correspond to a weak interaction in the Lagrangian
$L.$ However, the use of the standard perturbation theory as we have seen is
impossible even in this limit because of the existence of the diffusion modes
and so one should try to use non-perturbative approaches.

One of the standard approaches used for such a type of theories is the mean
field approximation. According to this scheme one simplifies the $\psi^{4}$
interaction replacing pairs $\psi\psi$ by their averages. For the interaction
$\psi^{4}$ there can be six different pairings, which can be written as
follows%
\begin{equation}
L_{int}=\frac{1}{4\pi\nu\tau}\int\left(  \bar{\psi}\psi\right)  ^{2}%
d\mathbf{r}\rightarrow L_{1}+L_{2}+L_{3}, \label{c42}%
\end{equation}%
\[
L_{1}=\frac{1}{4\pi\nu\tau}\sum_{\alpha,\beta}\int2\left\langle \bar{\psi
}_{\alpha}\psi_{\alpha}\right\rangle _{eff}\bar{\psi}_{\beta}\psi_{\beta
}d\mathbf{r,}%
\]%
\[
L_{2}=\frac{1}{4\pi\nu\tau}\sum_{\alpha,\beta}\int2\bar{\psi}_{\alpha
}\left\langle \psi_{\alpha}\bar{\psi}_{\beta}\right\rangle _{eff}\psi_{\beta
}d\mathbf{r,}%
\]%
\[
L_{3}=\frac{1}{4\pi\nu\tau}\sum_{\alpha,\beta}\int\left(  \left\langle
\bar{\psi}_{\alpha}\bar{\psi}_{\beta}\right\rangle _{eff}\psi_{\beta}%
\psi_{\alpha}+\bar{\psi}_{\alpha}\bar{\psi}_{\beta}\left\langle \psi_{\beta
}\psi_{\alpha}\right\rangle \right)  d\mathbf{r}%
\]
In Eqs.(\ref{c42}), the symbol
\[
\left\langle ...\right\rangle _{eff}=\int\left(  ...\right)  \exp\left(
-L_{eff}\right)  D\psi
\]
stands for the functional averaging with the effective Lagrangian
$L_{eff}=L_{0}+L_{1}+L_{2}+L_{3},$ where $L_{0}$ is the quadratic part of the
Lagrangian $L$ in Eq. (\ref{c41}), and $\alpha$ and $\beta$ stand for the
components of the supervectors $\bar{\psi}$ and $\psi.$

In fact the terms in $L_{2}$ and $L_{3}$ are equal to each other. The average
$\left\langle \bar{\psi}_{\alpha}\psi_{\alpha}\right\rangle $ renormalizes the
energy $\varepsilon$ and is not important. The averages in $L_{2}$ and $L_{3}$
can be both commuting and anticommuting variables, depending on the subscripts
$\alpha$ and $\beta.$ The final Lagrangian $L_{eff}$ takes the form%
\begin{equation}
L_{eff}=\int\left[  -i\bar{\psi}\left(  \tilde{H}+\frac{1}{2}\left(
\omega+i\delta\right)  \Lambda+\frac{iQ}{2\tau}\right)  \psi d\mathbf{r}%
\right]  \label{c43}%
\end{equation}
with the $8\times8$ supermatrix $Q$ satisfying the following self-consistency
equation%
\begin{equation}
Q=\frac{2}{\pi\nu}\left\langle \psi\bar{\psi}\right\rangle _{eff} \label{c44}%
\end{equation}
Calculating the Gaussian integral in Eq. (\ref{c44}) with the help of
Eq.(\ref{c29}) we obtain%
\begin{equation}
Q=\frac{1}{\pi\nu}\int g_{0}\left(  \mathbf{p}\right)  \frac{d^{d}\mathbf{p}%
}{\left(  2\pi\right)  ^{d}} \label{c45}%
\end{equation}%
\begin{equation}
g_{0}\left(  \mathbf{p}\right)  =i\left(  \varepsilon\left(  \mathbf{p}%
\right)  +\frac{\omega+i\delta}{2}-\varepsilon+\frac{1}{2}\left(
\omega+i\delta\right)  \Lambda+\frac{iQ}{2\tau}\right)  ^{-1} \label{c46}%
\end{equation}
The integral over the momenta $\mathbf{p}$ in Eq. (\ref{c46}) has both a real
and an imaginary part. As concerns the imaginary part the main contribution
comes from the region $\left|  \varepsilon\left(  \mathbf{p}\right)
\mathbf{-}\varepsilon\right|  \gg\tau^{-1},\omega$ and, therefore, is
proportional to the unit matrix $\mathbf{1.}$ This contribution leads to a
small renormalization of the energy $\varepsilon.$ Assuming that this energy
has already been renormalized we can forget about the imaginary part of $Q$
and concentrate on the real part. The main contribution to the real part of
Eq. (\ref{c46}) comes from the region $\left|  \varepsilon\left(
\mathbf{p}\right)  -\varepsilon\right|  \sim\tau^{-1}\ll\varepsilon.$
Introducing the variable $\xi=\varepsilon\left(  \mathbf{p}\right)
-\varepsilon$ we can rewrite Eq. (\ref{c46}) in the form
\begin{equation}
Q=\frac{i}{\pi}\int_{-\infty}^{\infty}\left(  \xi+\frac{1}{2}\left(
\omega+i\delta\right)  \Lambda+\frac{iQ}{2\tau}\right)  ^{-1}d\xi\label{c47}%
\end{equation}
Eq. (\ref{c47}) determines the contribution to the real part of $Q$ only and
has at $\omega\neq0$ one evident solution%
\begin{equation}
Q=\Lambda,\text{ }\omega\neq0 \label{c48}%
\end{equation}
However, putting $\omega=0$ we see that any $Q$ of the form
\begin{equation}
Q=V\Lambda\bar{V} \label{c49}%
\end{equation}
where $V$ is an arbitrary unitary supermatrix, $V\bar{V}=1,$ satisfies Eq.
(\ref{c47}). Here the symbol of conjugation $``-"$ for an arbitrary matrix $A$
means the following
\begin{equation}
\bar{A}=CA^{T}C^{T} \label{c49a}%
\end{equation}
with $C$ from Eqs. (\ref{c35}, \ref{c37}). The supermatrix $Q$ is self
conjugate, $Q=\bar{Q}.$

The degeneracy of the ground state, Eq. (\ref{c49}), leads to the existence of
the low-lying Goldstone modes, and their contribution to physical quantities
should be taken into account properly. These Goldstone modes are just the
diffusion modes discussed in the Introduction. In the language of spin models
the degeneracy of the solution, Eq. (\ref{c49}) is equivalent to the
degeneracy due to an arbitrary spin direction.

Substituting the mean field solution, Eq. (\ref{c49}), into the effective
Lagrangian into Eq. (\ref{c43}) we obtain zero, which shows that this
approximation is not sufficient. In order to describe a contribution of the
diffusion modes we have to take into account slow variations of the
supermatrix $Q$ in space. This can be done assuming that the supermatrix $V$
is a slow function of the coordinates $\mathbf{r}$ and expanding in the
gradients of $V$ (or, equivalently, $Q$).

As a result of the expansion in the gradients and small frequencies one can
obtain a functional $F\left[  Q\right]  $ describing slow variations of the
supermatrix $Q$ in space%
\begin{equation}
F\left[  Q\right]  =\frac{\pi\nu}{8}STr\int\left[  D_{0}\left(  \nabla
Q\right)  ^{2}+2i\left(  \omega+i\delta\right)  \Lambda Q\right]  d\mathbf{r}
\label{c50}%
\end{equation}
where $D_{0}$ is the classical diffusion coefficient, Eq. (\ref{a8}), and the
supermatrix $Q$ is described by Eq. (\ref{c49}). The free energy functional,
Eq. (\ref{c50}), has the form of a non-linear $\sigma$-model.

In order to calculate, e.g. the level-level correlation function $R\left(
\omega\right)  ,$ Eq. (\ref{c33}), one should express it in terms of a
functional integral over the supermatrix $Q.$ As a result, this function takes
the form%
\begin{equation}
R\left(  \omega\right)  =\frac{1}{2}-\frac{1}{2V^{2}}\operatorname{Re}\int
Q_{11}^{11}\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  Q_{11}^{22}\left(  \mathbf{r}^{\prime
}\right)  \exp\left(  -F\left[  Q\right]  \right)  DQd\mathbf{r}%
d\mathbf{r}^{\prime} \label{c52}%
\end{equation}
where $V$ is the volume of the system. In Eq. (\ref{c52}) the superscripts of
$Q$ enumerate ``retarded-advanced blocks'' , the subscripts relate to the
matrix elements within these blocks.

Eqs. (\ref{c50}, \ref{c52}) show that the calculation of physical quantities
for disordered systems can be reduced to study of a supermatrix non-linear
$\sigma$-model. There is a variety of physical problems that can be solved by
considering this model in different dimensionalities. To some extent, the
problem of the level statistics in a limited volume is the simplest one
because it corresponds to the zero-dimensional $\sigma$-model (no dependence
of $Q$ on the coordinates).

Adding magnetic or spin orbit interactions results in additional ``external
fields'' partially breaking the symmetry. If these interactions are not very
weak they simply cut some degrees of freedom. As a result, one comes again to
Eq. (\ref{c50}) but with a reduced symmetry of the supermatrix $Q.$

There can be three different types of the symmetries:

1. In the absence of both magnetic and spin-orbital interactions the system is
invariant under time reversal and spatial inversion. It will be called
``orthogonal'' because, as we will see, one comes in small particles to the
Wigner-Dyson statistic for the orthogonal ensemble.

2. In the presence of magnetic interactions the time reversal symmetry is
violated and this will be called unitary ensemble.

3. In the absence of magnetic interactions but in the presence of spin-orbital
ones, one obtains the symplectic ensemble.

These three ensembles lead to quite different results in different situations
and each of them should be considered separately.

\subsection{Level statistics in a limited volume.}

Eq. (\ref{c49}) specifies a general form for the $8\times8$ supermatrix $Q.$
In other words, it obeys the constraint
\begin{equation}
Q^{2}=1 \label{c53}%
\end{equation}

However, this constraint is not sufficient to determine unambiguously the
precise structure of $Q$ because Eq. (\ref{c53}) could correspond both to
rotations on a sphere and on a hyperboloid. It turns out that the symmetry of
the supermatrix $Q$ is more complex than those corresponding to these two
possibilities. The supermatrix $Q$ consists of two parts: one describing
rotations on the sphere and the other on the hyperboloid, such that the group
of rotations of $Q$ is a mixture of compact and non-compact groups of
rotations \cite{ebook}. These two parts are glued by anticommuting elements.
We can describe the explicit form of the supermatrix $Q$ writing it in the
form%
\begin{equation}
Q=UQ_{0}\bar{U}, \label{c54}%
\end{equation}
where
\begin{equation}
U=\left(
\begin{array}
[c]{cc}%
u & 0\\
0 & v
\end{array}
\right)  \label{c55}%
\end{equation}
and $\bar{u}u=1,$ $v\bar{v}=1.$ All Grassmann variables are included in the
$4\times4$ supermatrices $u$ and $v.$ These matrices contain also some phases.
Their form is simple and not very important for our discussion. More details
can be found in Ref. \cite{ebook}.

The form of $Q_{0}$ is more interesting and can be written as%
\begin{equation}
Q_{0}=\left(
\begin{array}
[c]{cc}%
\cos\hat{\theta} & i\sin\hat{\theta}\\
-i\sin\hat{\theta} & -\cos\hat{\theta}%
\end{array}
\right)  ,\text{ }\hat{\theta}=\left(
\begin{array}
[c]{cc}%
\hat{\theta}_{11} & 0\\
0 & \hat{\theta}_{22}%
\end{array}
\right)  \label{c56}%
\end{equation}
The $2\times2$ matrices are different for different classes of the symmetry.

We see that the symmetry of $Q_{0}$ corresponds to a group rotations on both
the sphere and the hyperboloid. The explicit form of the matrices $\hat
{\theta}_{11}$ and $\hat{\theta}_{22}$ can be expressed as follows%
\begin{equation}
\hat{\theta}_{11}=\left(
\begin{array}
[c]{cc}%
\theta & 0\\
0 & \theta
\end{array}
\right)  ,\text{ }\hat{\theta}_{22}=i\left(
\begin{array}
[c]{cc}%
\theta_{1} & \theta_{2}\\
\theta_{2} & \theta_{1}%
\end{array}
\right)  \label{c57}%
\end{equation}
with $0<\theta<\pi,$ $\theta_{1}>0,$ $\theta_{2}>0$ for the orthogonal
ensemble,%
\begin{equation}
\hat{\theta}_{11}=\left(
\begin{array}
[c]{cc}%
\theta & 0\\
0 & \theta
\end{array}
\right)  ,\text{ }\hat{\theta}_{22}=i\left(
\begin{array}
[c]{cc}%
\theta_{1} & 0\\
0 & \theta_{1}%
\end{array}
\right)  \label{c58}%
\end{equation}
with $0<\theta<\pi,$ $\theta_{1}>0$ for the unitary ensemble, and%
\begin{equation}
\hat{\theta}_{11}=\left(
\begin{array}
[c]{cc}%
\theta_{1} & \theta_{2}\\
\theta_{2} & \theta_{1}%
\end{array}
\right)  ,\text{ }\hat{\theta}_{22}=i\left(
\begin{array}
[c]{cc}%
\theta & 0\\
0 & \theta
\end{array}
\right)  \label{c59}%
\end{equation}
for the symplectic one.

Eqs. (\ref{c50},\ref{c52}, \ref{c56}-\ref{c59}) specify the non-linear
supermatrix $\sigma$-model. What remains to do for the level-level correlation
function, Eq. (\ref{c52}), is to calculate the functional integral over $Q.$
Many of the physical quantities can also be expressed in a form of a
correlation function of the supermatrices $Q$ with the free energy functional
$F\left[  Q\right]  ,$ Eq. (\ref{c50}).

Let us consider now the level-level correlation function in a limited volume.
The functional integral, Eqs. (\ref{c50}, \ref{c52}) can be considerably
simplified in the limit of small frequencies. In a finite volume one can
expand the supermatrix $Q$ in Fourier series. Then, it is not difficult to
understand from Eq. (\ref{c50}) that for $\omega\ll D_{0}/L^{2},$ where $L$ is
the sample size, only the zero space harmonics is essential. In this case one
can integrate over the supermatrices $Q$ not varying in space and the integral
for the function $R\left(  \omega\right)  $, Eq. (\ref{c52}), becomes just a
definite integral over several variables. This integral takes the following
form%
\begin{equation}
R\left(  \omega\right)  =\frac{1}{2}-\frac{1}{2}\operatorname{Re}\int
Q_{11}^{11}Q_{11}^{22}\exp\left(  -F_{0}\left[  Q\right]  \right)  dQ
\label{d1}%
\end{equation}
where $F_{0}\left[  Q\right]  $ takes the form%
\begin{equation}
F_{0}\left[  Q\right]  =\frac{i\pi\left(  \omega+i\delta\right)  }{4\Delta
}STr\left(  \Lambda Q\right)  \label{d2}%
\end{equation}
One can say that Eqs. (\ref{d1}, \ref{d2}) determine a zero dimensional
non-linear $\sigma$-model. In general, it is clear that the dimensionality of
the $\sigma$-model is determined at not very high temperatures by the geometry
of the sample. For example, the one dimensional $\sigma$-model describes a
long wire of a finite thickness.

In order to calculate the integral over $Q$ in Eq. (\ref{d1}) it is very
convenient to use Eqs. (\ref{c56}, \ref{c59}). We see immediately that the
supermatrix $U,$ Eq. (\ref{c55}), drops out from $F_{0}\left[  Q\right]  $
entering the pre-exponential in Eq. (\ref{d1}) only. This allows us to
integrate first over the elements of $U,$ and reduce the integral to the
variables $\hat{\theta}_{11},$ $\hat{\theta}_{22}$ only. The integration over
the Grassmann variables is, according to Eq. (\ref{c4}), a very simple task.
Actually, one has to calculate also Jacobians arising when changing from the
integration over $Q$ to the integration over the ``eigenvalues'' $\lambda,$
$\lambda_{1},$ $\lambda_{2}.$ As a result, one comes to the following
integrals for all three ensembles%
\begin{equation}
R_{orth}\left(  \omega\right)  =1+\operatorname{Re}\int_{1}^{\infty}\int
_{1}^{\infty}\int_{-1}^{1}\frac{\left(  \lambda_{1}\lambda_{2}-\lambda\right)
^{2}\left(  1-\lambda^{2}\right)  }{\left(  \lambda_{1}^{2}+\lambda_{2}%
^{2}+\lambda^{2}-2\lambda\lambda_{1}\lambda_{2}-1\right)  ^{2}} \label{d3}%
\end{equation}%
\[
\times\exp\left[  i\left(  x+i\delta\right)  \left(  \lambda_{1}\lambda
_{2}-\lambda\right)  \right]  d\lambda_{1}d\lambda_{2}d\lambda
\]%

\begin{equation}
R_{unit}\left(  \omega\right)  =1+\frac{1}{2}\operatorname{Re}\int_{1}%
^{\infty}\int_{-1}^{1}\exp\left[  i\left(  x+i\delta\right)  \left(
\lambda_{1}-\lambda\right)  \right]  d\lambda d\lambda_{1} \label{d4}%
\end{equation}%
\begin{equation}
R_{sympl}\left(  \omega\right)  =1+\operatorname{Re}\int_{1}^{\infty}\int
_{0}^{1}\int_{-1}^{1}\frac{\left(  \lambda-\lambda_{1}\lambda_{2}\right)
^{2}\left(  \lambda^{2}-1\right)  }{\left(  \lambda^{2}+\lambda_{1}%
^{2}+\lambda_{2}^{2}-2\lambda_{1}\lambda_{2}\lambda-1\right)  ^{2}} \label{d5}%
\end{equation}%
\[
\times\exp\left[  i\left(  x+i\delta\right)  \left(  \lambda-\lambda
_{1}\lambda_{2}\right)  \right]  d\lambda_{1}d\lambda_{2}d\lambda
\]
We see that the integrals over the supermatrix $Q$ can be reduced to integrals
over the ``eigenvalues'' $\lambda,$ $\lambda_{1},$ $\lambda_{2}.$ Depending on
the ensemble one obtains twofold or threefold integrals. Calculation of such
integrals is a much simpler task than calculation of integrals over a large
number $N$ of variables encountered in RMT\cite{mehta}. Although the reduction
to the integrals over the eigenvalues has been carried out for the level-level
correlation function only, the corresponding manipulations for studing other
physical quantities are the same. The only thing that remains to be done when
calculating different physical quantities is to write a proper pre-exponential
and carry out integration over the elements of supermatrices $u$ and $v$
entering the pre-exponential only. Then one obtains integrals over the
variables $\lambda,$ $\lambda_{1},$ $\lambda_{2}$ analogous to those in Eqs.
(\ref{d3}, \ref{d4}, \ref{d5}).

The integration over $\lambda$ and $\lambda_{1}$ in Eq. (\ref{d4}) for the
unitary ensemble is simple. At first glance, the integrals for the orthogonal
and symplectic ensembles look terrifying. However, they can be calculated by
Fourier transforming the integrals from the frequencies $\omega$ to the real
time $t.$ As a result, one comes to the Wigner-Dyson formulae, Eqs.
(\ref{a4}-\ref{a6}), which demonstrates that the level-level correlation
function for a small metal particle is really the same as that given by the
RMT. This is how one proves the relevance of the RMT for disordered systems
\cite{efetov1}. Actually, the model of the disordered metal was the first
microscopic model for which the Wigner-Dyson statistics had been proven.

Of course, this is possible for not very high frequencies $\omega\ll
D_{0}/L^{2}.$ In the opposite limit $\omega\gg D_{0}/L^{2},$ the situation is
no longer zero dimensional but one can do perturbation theory in diffusion
modes. This calculation was done in Ref. \cite{altshk}.

One can also come to the zero dimensional $\sigma$-model starting from the
Gaussian distribution for the random matrices, Eq. (\ref{a1}), in the limit of
large $N$. This was done in the review, Ref. \cite{vwz}. Therefore, the
supersymmetry method can be considered as an alternative to the method of the
orthogonal polynomials\cite{mehta} in RMT.

Using the non-linear $\sigma$-model, Eq. (\ref{c50}), one can consider thick
disordered wires. This corresponds to the one dimensional $\sigma$-model. In
this case one can use a transfer matrix technique that allows to reduce
calculation of a one dimensional functional integral to solving of an
effective ``Schr\"{o}dinger equation''. The exact solution found for this
model\cite{el} proves localization of all states (vanishing of the
conductivity) for any arbitrarily weak disorder. In the language of random
matrices this quasi-one-dimensional model corresponds to a model of random
banded matrices\cite{fm}.

The exact solution can also be found for a model with disordered grains
connected in a such a way that they constitute a Bethe lattice. For this
model, using recursion relations one can write a non-linear integral
equation\cite{eb}. It was demonstrated that within the model on the Bethe
lattice one could have a metal-insulator transition with a very unusual
critical behavior. The model on the Bethe lattice has been shown to be
equivalent to models of certain sparse random matrices \cite{mf}. Sparse
matrices are relevant for description of diluted spin models, some
combinatorial optimization problems\cite{mp} and other interesting systems.

Properties of two dimensional disordered metals can be studied using a
renormalization group scheme \cite{wegner,elk,sw,efetov1,ereview}

\section{Wave functions fluctuations in a finite volume. Multifractality.}

\subsection{General definitions.}

In this Section statistics of wave functions is discussed. Investigation of
wave functions is complimentary to study of energy levels. In the language of
random matrices, energy levels correspond to eigenvalues of the matrices
whereas the wave functions relate to eigenvectors.

Study of wave functions has become popular in condensed matter physics not
long ago with the development of mesoscopic physics. One can study, e.g.,
electron tunneling through so called quantum dots, which are actually small
quantum wells. At low temperatures one can reach a resonance tunnelling regime
when the electron tunnel via one resonance level. In this case the tunnelling
amplitude is very sensitive to the wave function of the resonance state.

Wave functions can also be measured in optical and acoustic resonators where
they are electromagnetic or sound waves, respectively.

We start with the standard Schr\"{o}dinger equation
\begin{equation}
H\phi_{\alpha}\left(  r\right)  =\varepsilon_{\alpha}\phi_{\alpha}\left(
r\right)  \label{e1}%
\end{equation}
that determines the eigenenergies $\varepsilon_{\alpha}$ and eigenfunctions
$\phi_{\alpha}\left(  r\right)  .$

We assume that a finite volume $V$ is considered, such that the spectrum of
the energies $\varepsilon_{\alpha}$ is discrete.

The full statistics of the wave functions $\phi_{\alpha}\left(  r\right)  $ at
a given point $r$ can be described by the following distribution function $f$%
\begin{equation}
f\left(  t\right)  =\Delta\left\langle \sum_{\alpha}\delta\left(  t-\left|
\phi_{\alpha}\left(  r\right)  \right|  ^{2}\right)  \delta\left(
\varepsilon-\varepsilon_{\alpha}\right)  \right\rangle \label{e2}%
\end{equation}
The function $f\left(  t\right)  ,$ Eq. (\ref{e2}), gives the probability that
the square of the absolute value of the wave function (intensity) at the point
$r$ and energy $\varepsilon$ is equal to $t.$ The distribution function
$f\left(  t\right)  $ and the wave functions $\phi_{\alpha}\left(  r\right)  $
are assumed to be properly normalized such that
\begin{equation}
t_{0}=1,\text{ }t_{1}=V^{-1} \label{e3}%
\end{equation}
where $t_{n}\left(  V\right)  $ are coefficients of the so called inverse
participation ratio%
\begin{equation}
t_{n}=\int_{0}^{\infty}t^{n}f\left(  t\right)  dt=\Delta\left\langle
\sum_{\alpha}\left|  \phi_{\alpha}\left(  r\right)  \right|  ^{2n}%
\delta\left(  \varepsilon-\varepsilon_{\alpha}\right)  \right\rangle
\label{e4}%
\end{equation}

These coefficients indicate very sensitively the degree of localization of
states through their dependence $t_{n}\left(  V\right)  $ on the volume of the
system. In a pure metal or a ballistic chaotic box where the wave functions
extend over the whole system one has%
\begin{equation}
t_{n}\varpropto V^{-n} \label{e5}%
\end{equation}
If disorder makes the localization length $L_{c},$ at which the typical wave
functions decay, is much shorter than the sample size $L\sim V^{1/d},$ the
coefficients $t_{n}$ are insensitive to $L.$ However, a very interesting
information about the development of localization can be gained through an
analysis of $t_{n}\left(  V\right)  $ for small samples with $L<L_{c}.$

As soon as the localization length $L_{c}$ exceeds the sample size, any length
scale disappears and, in the language of the coefficients $t_{n},$ this is
described as
\begin{equation}
Vt_{n}\varpropto L^{-\tau\left(  n\right)  },\text{ }\tau\left(  n\right)
=\left(  n-1\right)  d^{\ast}\left(  n\right)  \label{e6}%
\end{equation}
where $d^{\ast}\left(  n\right)  $ may differ from the physical dimension $d$
of the system and be a function of $n.$ This function gives the values of the
\textit{fractal dimensions }$d^{\ast}\left(  n\right)  $\textit{\ }for
each\textit{\ }$n.$\textit{\ }

If the behavior of the wave function is described by Eq. (\ref{e5}), the
fractal dimension $d^{\ast}$ coincides with the physical dimension $d.$ We
will see that the fractal dimension of a system obeying the RMT coincides with
the physical dimension. In such a situation, although the amplitude
fluctuations are possible, they are not very strong.

Once we assume that the envelope of a typical wave function at a length scale
shorter than $L_{c}$ obeys a power law $\phi\left(  r\right)  \varpropto
r^{-\mu}$ with a single fixed exponent $\mu<d/2,$ the set of the coefficients
$t_{n}$ reveals $d^{\ast}=d-2\mu$ different from $d$ but the same for all
$n>d/\left(  2\mu\right)  .$ This is when one speaks of fractal behavior with
the \textit{fractal dimension} $d^{\ast}.$

If $d^{\ast}\left(  n\right)  $ is not a constant, that signals a more
sophisticated structure of the wave functions. They can be imagined as
splashes of multiply interfering waves at different scales and with various
amplitudes, and possibly, self-similarity characterized by a relation between
the amplitude $t$ of the local splash of the wave function and the exponent
$\mu\left(  t\right)  $ of the envelope of its extended power law tail.

We will see below that the multifractality of the wave functions of two
dimensional weakly disordered conductors is the most general property of these
systems as soon as the sample size $L$ does not exceed the localization length
$L_{c}$ \cite{fe}.

\subsection{Porter-Thomas distribution.}

Before starting more complicated calculations I would like to present here
what is known about the distribution of wave functions from nuclear physics
(see, e.g. Refs. \cite{porter,brody}) where it was studied for description of
level width fluctuations in neutron scattering. The wave function fluctuations
are obtained there again from the RMT.

To start the calculation one should choose and arbitrary basis of
eigenfunctions $\rho_{m}\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  $ and expand the function
$\phi_{n}\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  $ in this basis%
\begin{equation}
\phi_{n}\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  =V^{-1/2}\sum_{m=1}^{\infty}a_{nm}\rho
_{m}\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  \label{e7}%
\end{equation}
where $V$ is the volume. It is convenient to truncate the basis to a finite
$N$-dimensional set and take the limit $N\rightarrow\infty$, as is usually
done in the RMT. The main statistical hypothesis is that all coefficients
$a_{mn}$ are uniformly distributed. The only restriction on the coefficients
$\left\{  a_{mn}\right\}  $ is imposed by normalization of the wave functions,
and the probability density $P\left(  \left\{  a_{mn}\right\}  \right)  $ can
be written as
\begin{equation}
\tilde{P}\left(  \left\{  a_{mn}\right\}  \right)  =\frac{2}{\Omega_{N}}%
\delta\left(  \sum_{m=1}^{N}\left|  a_{mn}\right|  ^{2}-1\right)  \label{e8}%
\end{equation}
where $\Omega_{n}$ is the solid angle in $N$ dimensions. Because of the
truncation of the basis the condition of completeness of the basis $\left\{
\rho_{m}\right\}  $ should be written in the form%
\begin{equation}
\sum_{m=1}^{\infty}\rho_{m}^{2}\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  \equiv\left|
\vec{\eta}\right|  ^{2}=N \label{e9}%
\end{equation}
where $\vec{\eta}$ is an $N$-dimensional vector with components $\left\{
\rho_{m}\right\}  .$ The distribution function of the intensities $W\left(
v\right)  $ at the point $\mathbf{r}$\textbf{\ }is introduced as
\begin{equation}
W\left(  v\right)  =\frac{2}{\Omega_{N}}\int\delta\left(  v-\left|  \vec
{a}\vec{\eta}\right|  ^{2}\right)  \delta\left(  \left|  \vec{a}\right|
^{2}-1\right)  d\vec{a} \label{e10}%
\end{equation}
where the vector $\vec{a}$ is an $N$-dimensional vector with components
$\left\{  a_{mn}\right\}  .$ The distribution function $W\left(  v\right)  ,$
Eq. (\ref{e10}) is defined in such a way that%
\begin{equation}
\int W\left(  v\right)  dv=1 \label{e11}%
\end{equation}
In the unitary ensemble, one should integrate over complex vectors $\vec{a}.$
Integrating first over the component of the vector $\vec{a}$ parallel to the
vector $\vec{\eta}$ and using Eq. (\ref{e9}) one obtains%
\begin{equation}
W\left(  v\right)  =\frac{2\pi}{N\Omega_{N}}\int\delta\left(  \left|  \vec
{a}_{\perp}\right|  ^{2}-\left(  1-\frac{v}{N}\right)  \right)  d\vec{a}
\label{e12}%
\end{equation}
where $\vec{a}_{\perp}$ is the component perpendicular to $\vec{\eta}.$ The
remaining integration in Eq. (\ref{e12}) can be carried out easily. Taking the
limit $N\rightarrow\infty$ one obtains for the unitary ensemble a simple
formula%
\begin{equation}
W\left(  v\right)  =\exp\left(  -v\right)  \label{e13}%
\end{equation}
Computing the integral in Eq. (\ref{e10}) for real vectors $\vec{a}$ and
$\vec{\eta}$ one can obtain the distribution function for the orthogonal
ensemble%
\begin{equation}
W\left(  v\right)  =\frac{1}{\sqrt{2\pi v}}\exp\left(  -\frac{v}{2}\right)
\label{e14}%
\end{equation}
The functions $W\left(  v\right)  $, Eqs. (\ref{e13},\ref{e14}) satisfy the
normalization conditions, Eq. (\ref{e11}). The distribution functions
$W\left(  v\right)  $ are universal and do not depend on details of models for
disorder. The amplitudes $v$ are related to $t$ from the previous section as
$v=Vt.$ The functions $W$ and $f$ are related to each other accordingly. Eqs.
(\ref{e13}, \ref{e14}) are usually referred to as the Porter-Thomas distribution.

\subsection{Non-linear $\sigma$-model and the statistics of wave functions.}

Now we concentrate on the calculation of the distribution function $f\left(
t\right)  ,$ Eq. (\ref{e2}). At first glance, this task does not seem easy. In
the previous section we were able to reduce the level-level correlation
function to a functional integral over $8\times8$ supermatrices $Q.$ It became
possible because the level-level correlation function $R\left(  \omega\right)
,$ Eq. (\ref{a3}), could be expressed in terms of the product of two Green
functions, Eq. (\ref{c33}). Actually, the size $8\times8$ of the supermatrices
is determined by the fact that only two Green functions are needed.

So, in order to calculate the distribution function $f\left(  t\right)  ,$ Eq.
(\ref{e2}), we have to make two necessary steps:

1. To express Eq. (\ref{e2}) in terms of the Green functions.

2. To express products of the Green functions in terms of an integral over
supervectors $\psi$. If we really want to make explicit calculations the
supervectors $\psi$ should not have too many components.

It turns out that both the steps are possible and the necessary number of the
components of the supervector $\psi$ is just $8$ for the orthogonal ensemble
and $4$ for the unitary one.

The step $1$ is done introducing Green functions $G_{\varepsilon\gamma}^{R,A}$
for a system with smeared levels%
\begin{equation}
G_{\varepsilon,\gamma}^{R,A}\left(  \mathbf{r,r}^{\prime}\right)
=\sum_{\alpha}\frac{\phi_{\alpha}\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  \phi_{\alpha
}^{\ast}\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  }{\varepsilon-\varepsilon_{\alpha}\pm
\frac{i\gamma}{2}} \label{e15}%
\end{equation}
Then, Eq. (\ref{e2}) can be written as
\begin{equation}
f\left(  t\right)  =\Delta\left\langle \lim_{\gamma\rightarrow0}\sum_{\alpha
}\delta\left(  t-\frac{i\gamma}{2}G_{\varepsilon\gamma}^{R}\left(
\mathbf{r,r}\right)  \right)  \delta\left(  \varepsilon-\varepsilon_{\alpha
}\right)  \right\rangle \label{e16}%
\end{equation}%

\[
=\frac{\Delta}{2\pi}\lim_{\gamma\rightarrow0}\lim_{\beta\rightarrow
0}\left\langle \int\delta\left(  t-\frac{i\gamma}{2}G_{\varepsilon\gamma}%
^{R}\left(  \mathbf{r,r}\right)  \right)  \left(  G_{\varepsilon\beta}%
^{A}\left(  \mathbf{r}^{\prime},\mathbf{r}^{\prime}\right)  -G_{\varepsilon
\beta}^{R}\left(  \mathbf{r}^{\prime},\mathbf{r}^{\prime}\right)  \right)
\right\rangle d\mathbf{r}^{\prime}%
\]
In Eq. (\ref{e16}) one should first take the limit $\beta\rightarrow0$ and
then $\gamma\rightarrow0.$ Since the distribution function $f\left(  t\right)
$ is represented in terms of a function of only two Green functions at two
points $\mathbf{r}$ and $\mathbf{r\prime}$ one can express it in terms of an
integral over $8$-component supervectors $\psi$ using the Wick theorem. The
corresponding Lagrangian is the same as the one for the level-level
correlation function, Eq. (\ref{c41}), provided one replaces the frequency
$\omega$ by the level width $\gamma.$

The derivation of the corresponding $\sigma$-model is standard and one comes
to the following expression for the distribution function $f\left(  t\right)
$%
\begin{align}
f\left(  t\right)   &  =\lim_{\gamma\rightarrow0}\int\int STr\left(  \pi
_{b}^{\left(  1\right)  }Q\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  \right)  \delta\left(
t-\frac{\pi\nu\gamma}{4}STr\left(  \pi_{b}^{\left(  2\right)  }Q\left(
\mathbf{r}_{o}\right)  \right)  \right) \label{e17}\\
&  \times\left(  -F\left[  Q\right]  \right)  DQ\frac{d\mathbf{r}}%
{4V}\nonumber
\end{align}
where the free energy functional $F\left[  Q\right]  $ has the form%
\begin{equation}
F=\frac{\pi\nu}{8}\int STr\left[  D_{0}\left(  \nabla Q\right)  ^{2}%
-\gamma\Lambda Q\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  \right]  \label{e18}%
\end{equation}
and $\mathbf{r}_{o}$ is the ``observation point''. When the system can be
described by the zero dimensional $\sigma$- model the distribution function
$f\left(  t\right)  $ does not depend on $\mathbf{r}_{o}.$ However, beyond the
$0D$ approximation, this function can also be a function of the coordinates.
The matrices $\pi_{b}^{\left(  1,2\right)  }$ in Eq. (\ref{e17}) select from
the supermatrix $Q$ its boson-boson sector and have the form%
\begin{equation}
\pi_{b}^{\left(  1\right)  }=\left(
\begin{array}
[c]{cc}%
\pi_{b} & 0\\
0 & 0
\end{array}
\right)  ,\text{ }\pi_{b}^{\left(  2\right)  }=\left(
\begin{array}
[c]{cc}%
0 & 0\\
0 & \pi_{b}%
\end{array}
\right)  ,\text{ }\pi_{b}=\left(
\begin{array}
[c]{cc}%
0 & 0\\
0 & 1
\end{array}
\right)  \label{e19}%
\end{equation}
As we have discussed previously, the $\sigma$-model is noncompact, Eqs.
(\ref{c56}-\ref{c59}). Therefore, in order to avoid divergent integrals over
the variables $\hat{\theta}_{22},$ we must calculate the integrals keeping
$\gamma$ finite. The limit $\gamma\rightarrow0$ can be taken only at the end
of the calculations. However, it is not very convenient to keep an additional
free parameter, and it is better to get rid of the parameter $\gamma$ at an
earlier stage. This can be done by integrating over the zero space harmonics
of $Q$ in the very beginning of the calculations.

To carry out this procedure one should represent the supermatrix $Q\left(
\mathbf{r}\right)  $ in the form of Eq. (\ref{c49}) and change the variables
of integration $V\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  $ to $\tilde{V}\left(
\mathbf{r}\right)  $ as $V\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  =V\left(  \mathbf{r}%
_{o}\right)  \tilde{V}\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  .$ This leads to
supermatrices $\tilde{Q}:$ $Q\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  =V\left(
\mathbf{r}_{o}\right)  \tilde{Q}\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  \bar{V}\left(
\mathbf{r}_{o}\right)  .$ In terms of the new variables $\tilde{V}\left(
\mathbf{r}\right)  $ and $\tilde{Q}\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  $ the gradient
term in Eq. (\ref{e18}) preserves its form, but now the condition
\begin{equation}
V\left(  \mathbf{r}_{o}\right)  =1,\text{ }\tilde{Q}\left(  \mathbf{r}%
_{o}\right)  =\Lambda\label{e20}%
\end{equation}
has to be fulfilled. Changing the variables of the integration for all points
$\mathbf{r\neq r}_{o}$ from $Q\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  $ to $\tilde
{Q}\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  $ one obtains a new free energy functional that
does not contain $V\left(  \mathbf{r}_{o}\right)  $ or $Q\left(
\mathbf{r}_{o}\right)  .$ These variables enter only the pre-exponential and
the term with $\gamma$, and, hence, the integral over $V\left(  \mathbf{r}%
_{o}\right)  $ can be computed without making approximations. The result of
the integration contains only the variables $\tilde{Q}\left(  \mathbf{r}%
\right)  $ with the boundary condition, Eq. (\ref{e20}). This means that the
reduced $\sigma$-model obtained in this way operates only with relative
variations of the field $Q$ with respect to its value at the observation point.

The limit $\gamma\rightarrow0$ simplifies the computation because the main
contribution to the integral over the variable $\theta_{1o}$ entering the
parametrization, Eqs. (\ref{c56}-\ref{c59}), is from $\cosh\theta_{1o}%
\sim1/\gamma$ (for simplicity we are considering the unitary ensemble but the
final results are similar for all ensembles). After standard manipulations one
can express the distribution function $f\left(  t\right)  $ in the form%
\begin{equation}
f\left(  t\right)  =\frac{1}{V}\frac{d^{2}\Phi\left(  t\right)  }{dt^{2}%
},\text{ }\Phi\left(  t\right)  =\int_{\tilde{Q}\left(  \mathbf{r}_{o}\right)
=\Lambda}\exp\left(  -\tilde{F}\left[  \tilde{Q},t\right]  \right)  D\tilde
{Q}\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  \label{e21}%
\end{equation}
where the free energy $\tilde{F}\left[  Q,t\right]  $ has the following form
\begin{equation}
\tilde{F}\left[  Q,t\right]  =\frac{1}{8}\int STr\left[  \pi\nu D_{0}\left(
\nabla\tilde{Q}\right)  ^{2}-2t\Lambda\Pi\tilde{Q}\right]  d\mathbf{r}
\label{e22}%
\end{equation}
The matrix $\Pi$ selects from $\tilde{Q}$ its noncompact ``boson-boson'' sector.

If $t$ is not very large one can take into account the zero space harmonics of
$Q$ only. Taking into account Eq. (\ref{e20}) we can just put everywhere
$Q=\Lambda,$ which leads us immediately to the Porter-Thomas distribution, Eq.
(\ref{e13}) (and Eq. (\ref{e14}) for the orthogonal ensemble).

Nonetheless, this would be only an approximate procedure because the value
$\tilde{Q}\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  =\Lambda$ does not correspond to the
minimum of the functional $\tilde{F}$ when $t\neq0.$ An equation for the
minimum can be found by taking into account the noncompact variable
$\theta_{1}$ under the condition at the boundary and at the observation point%
\begin{equation}
\mathbf{n\nabla}\theta_{1}=0,\text{ }\theta_{1}\left(  \mathbf{r}_{o}\right)
=0 \label{e23}%
\end{equation}
where $\mathbf{n}$ is the unit vector at the boundary and perpendicular to it.

Using Eq. (\ref{e23}) one writes the equation for the extremum solution
$\theta_{t}$ in the form%
\begin{equation}
\Delta_{\mathbf{r}}\theta_{t}=-\frac{t}{\pi\nu D_{0}}\exp\left(  -\theta
_{t}\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  \right)  \label{e24}%
\end{equation}
where $\Delta_{\mathbf{r}}$ is the Laplacian. The solution $\theta_{t}\left(
\mathbf{r}\right)  $ of Eq. (\ref{e24}) has to be substituted into the energy
functional $\tilde{F},$ Eq. (\ref{e22}), which takes the form%
\begin{equation}
F_{t}=\frac{1}{2}\int\left[  \pi\nu D_{0}\left(  \nabla\theta_{t}\right)
^{2}+2t\exp\left(  -\theta_{t}\right)  \right]  d\mathbf{r} \label{e25}%
\end{equation}
It is remarkable that Eq. (\ref{e24}) for the non-trivial vacuum of the
reduced $\sigma$-model in two dimensions is exactly the Liouville equation
known in the conformal theory of $2D$ quantum gravity \cite{polyakov,seiberg}.
Within this model one has to calculate the functional integral over all
$\theta$ with the free energy functional determined by Eq. (\ref{e25}).
Although this can lead to helpful analogies \cite{tsvelik}, results that might
be anticipated in this way can be used only as intermediate asymptotics.

Eq. (\ref{e24}) for the minimum looks very similar to a saddle point equation
derived in Ref. \cite{mkh} when considering the problem of long-living current
relaxation. However, the non-linear term is different, which leads to
different solutions.

The most interesting is the solution of Eq. (\ref{e24}) in two dimensions
where it can be found exactly. However, the exact solution is somewhat
cumbersome and I write here its asymptotics at distances $r$ much smaller than
the sample size $L$ (but exceeding the mean free path $l$)
\begin{equation}
\exp\left(  -\theta_{t}\right)  \approx\left(  l/r\right)  ^{2\mu} \label{e26}%
\end{equation}
where $\mu$ is a parameter depending on disorder.

With the same accuracy, the free energy of the vacuum state can be
approximated by%
\begin{equation}
F_{t}\approx4\pi^{2}\nu D_{0}\left\{  \mu+\mu^{2}\ln\left(  L/l\right)
\right\}  \label{e27}%
\end{equation}
The parameter $\mu$ can be determined from the following equation%
\begin{equation}
\mu\approx\frac{z\left(  T\right)  }{2\ln\left(  L/l\right)  },\text{ where
}ze^{z}=T\equiv\frac{tV\ln\left(  L/l\right)  }{2\pi^{2}\nu D_{0}} \label{e28}%
\end{equation}

In principle, Eqs. (\ref{e26}-\ref{e28}) determine the distribution function
$f\left(  t\right)  $ for arbitrary $t$ ($\mu$ must remain small, though).
However, analytical expressions can be written only in the limiting cases
$T\ll1$ and $T\gg1.$ In these limits, the distribution function $f\left(
t\right)  ,$ Eq. (\ref{e2}), can be written as\cite{fe}
\begin{equation}
f\left(  t\right)  =AV\left\{
\begin{array}
[c]{cc}%
\exp\left(  -Vt\left[  1-\frac{T}{2}+...\right]  \right)  , & T\ll1\\
\exp\left(  -\frac{\pi^{2}\nu D_{0}}{\ln\left(  L/l\right)  }\ln^{2}T\right)
, & T\gg1
\end{array}
\right.  \label{e29}%
\end{equation}
where $A$ is a normalization constant.

We see from Eq. (\ref{e29}) that at small values of the amplitudes, such that
$T\ll1,$ the distribution function $f\left(  t\right)  $ agrees with the
Porter-Thomas distribution, Eq. (\ref{e13}), thus proving the latter for
disordered systems. In this limit one can make expansion in $T$\cite{fmir}.

At large $t$ ($T\gg1$) the function $f\left(  t\right)  $ has log-normal
asymptotics that is strikingly similar to the asymptotics of the distribution
function of the local density of states or conductances discovered by
Altshuler, Kravtsov and Lerner \cite{akl} who came to this result considering
renormalization of terms high gradients in the $\sigma$-model. Even the
numerical coefficients in the exponentials are the same, although, of course,
the logarithms contain different variables. It appears that the log-normal
form is really universal. The slower decay of the distribution function
$f\left(  t\right)  $ at large $t$ is due to localization effect.
Unfortunately, until now it is not clear how the growth of the high gradient
terms is related to the existence of the non-trivial vacuum considered in this Section.

As concerns the coefficients of the inverse participation ratio $t_{n}$, Eq.
(\ref{e4}), they show the multifractal behavior, Eq. (\ref{e6}). Using Eqs.
(\ref{e24},\ref{e28}) one comes to the following expression for the fractal
dimension $d^{\ast}\left(  n\right)  $%
\begin{equation}
d^{\ast}\left(  n\right)  =2-n\left(  4\pi^{2}\nu D_{0}\right)  ^{-1}
\label{e30}%
\end{equation}
We see that even for a weak disorder the fractal dimension $d^{\ast}\left(
n\right)  $ strongly deviates from $2.$ Of course, it cannot become negative
and this determines the region of the applicability of Eq. (\ref{e30}).

\section{Recent and possible future developments.}

In the preceding sections it was demonstrated how one can come to the random
matrix theory starting from a model of a disordered metallic particle. This
became possible using the supersymmetry method. Actually, to the best of my
knowledge, the model of a disordered metal was the first microscopic model for
which the Wigner-Dyson statistics was confirmed.

Starting from the first works \cite{ge,efetov1} where the relevance of the
Wigner-Dyson theory to the disordered systems was suggested and proven, a huge
number of problems have been attacked using these ideas. Calculations were
performed either assuming that RMT was applicable for the description of small
particles (they are often called ``quantum dots'') and using methods of the
RMT \cite{mehta} or making direct computation starting from a disordered metal
and applying the non-linear supermatrix $\sigma$-model. Reviewing all these
application within several lectures is impossible even though several related
topics are considered in this volume by Boris Altshuler and Jac Verbaarschot.
At this point I can only refer again to recent reviews
\cite{ebook,az,suptrace,fyodorov,gmw,mirlin,ast,asz,been} and apologize in
case if some references are missing here.

The selection of topics of the present lectures was motivated mainly by the
desire to give a feeling of how to calculate within the supersymmetry method
both level and wave function correlations. We have seen that one could obtain
results that agreed in a certain region of parameters with the predictions of
the RMT and, at the same time, go beyond the RMT.

Essential conditions for the derivation of the $\sigma$-model were the absence
of the electron-electron interaction and a sufficiently high concentration of
impurities. For the problem of the level statistics, the latter condition
corresponds to the case when the mean free path $l$ is much smaller than the
sample size. In other words, an electron can scatter many times on the
impurities in the bulk before it reaches a boundary of the sample.

At the same time, the RMT was initially suggested for description of complex
nuclei, where disorder is absent but interactions are strong. A natural
question that can be asked is: Can one prove the relevance of the RMT for
clean or/and interacting systems? Clearly, the supermatrix $\sigma$-model
discussed in the previous sections is not applicable in these situations and
one needs a generalization of this method.

It seems that really new ideas are necessary in order to achieve this goal.
Nevertheless, first steps towards constructing more general schemes have been
done and I want to present here the main ideas of the new approaches.

\subsection{Supersymmetry with interaction.}

From the beginning of the use of the supersymmetry method it was clear that
the method could be applicable for non-interacting particles only. The method
is based on the result of the Gaussian integration, Eq. (\ref{c6}), that gives
$DetA$ instead of the usual $\left(  DetA\right)  ^{-1}.$ Introducing an
interaction results in non-quadratic terms in the Lagrangian. Therefore the
trick with writing Green functions in terms of a Gaussian integral without a
weight denominator does not work anymore. This is the reason why, in contrast
to the replica approach where a proper $\sigma$-model has been derived long
ago \cite{finkelstein,fin1}, introducing an interaction into the supersymmetry
scheme was believed to be impossible.

To some extent, it is true and it is not clear how to include the interaction
into the supersymmetry exactly. However, a weak interaction can really be
included without considerable difficulties \cite{schwiete}. The initial
electron model with the interaction is not supersymmetric and cannot be made
supersymmetric by a transformation. This is why one cannot get rid off the
weight denominator.

The main idea of Ref. \cite{schwiete} is to replace approximately the initial
electron model by an effective supersymmetric model. This is possible for any
disorder in the limit of a weak interaction. The effective model takes into
account the most important (Hartree-Fock type) diagrams for any fixed
configuration of impurities. Then, the derivation of the proper $\sigma$-model
is quite standard.

The resulting non-linear $\sigma$-model resembles very much the replica model
of Finkelstein\cite{finkelstein,fin1} but contains supermatrices and does not
have replica indices. The supermatrices $Q$ contain, in addition to those for
the non-interacting systems, indices for Matsubara frequencies. One should
also write properly spin indices. As a result, the supermatrix non-linear
$\sigma$-model for electron systems with interaction takes the form (unitary
ensemble)%
\begin{align}
F  &  =\frac{\pi\nu}{4}\int d\mathbf{r}\;\mathrm{Str}\big[D(\nabla
Q)^{2}-4EQ]\nonumber\\
&  +\frac{\pi\nu}{4}\int d\mathbf{r}\;\big[\Gamma_{2}Q\gamma_{2}Q-\Gamma
_{1}Q\gamma_{1}Q\big] \label{eq:ssigmamodel1}%
\end{align}
where $\gamma_{1}$ and $\gamma_{2}$ are certain operators acting on the
supermatrices $Q,$ and $\Gamma_{1}$ and $\Gamma_{2}$ are scattering amplitudes
characterizing the interaction (they are different from those obtained for the
replica $\sigma$-model \cite{finkelstein,fin1}. As usual, one has the
constraint $Q^{2}=1$ but now the product of two supermatrices includes
summation also summation over the Matsubara frequencies.

Using the sigma-model Eq. (\ref{eq:ssigmamodel1}) renormalization group
equations of Refs. (\cite{finkelstein,fin1}) have been reproduced in the first
order in the interaction constants and there is a hope to use this model for
non-perturbative calculations.

\subsection{Method of quasiclassical Green functions.}

Although the interaction is included in Eq. (\ref{eq:ssigmamodel1}), it is
written for systems with considerably high concentration of short range
impurities. Studying problems for clean systems or systems with a long range
disorder one needs a different scheme. Statistical properties of clean chaotic
systems are covered in this school by Boris Altshuler and I do not review them
here. Instead, I want to concentrate on calculational schemes.

The saddle point equation (\ref{c47}) is not a good approximation for clean
systems and systems with long range disorder and we cannot follow the same way
as the one used for diffusive models. The method that I want to present now is
based on using quasiclassical Green functions.

Introducing an $8\times8$ matrix function $G\left(  \mathbf{r,r}^{\prime
}\right)  $ as%

\begin{equation}
G(\mathbf{r},\mathbf{r}{^{\prime}})=2\langle\psi(\mathbf{r}){\bar{\psi}%
}(\mathbf{r}{^{\prime}})\rangle_{\psi} \label{f1}%
\end{equation}
we can write in a standard way the following equation for this function
\begin{equation}
\left[  H_{0\mathbf{r}}+U\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  +\Lambda\frac
{\omega+i\delta}{2}+iJ\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  \right]  G\left(
\mathbf{r,r}^{\prime}\right)  =i\delta\left(  \mathbf{r-r}^{\prime}\right)
\label{eqgreenfunc}%
\end{equation}
where the subscript $\mathbf{r}$ of $H_{0\mathbf{r}}$ means that the operator
acts on $\mathbf{r.}$ The notations are the same as in Eqs. (\ref{c39},
\ref{c40}), and $J\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  $ is a source term that allows to
extract more complicated correlation functions.

Conjugating Eq.(\ref{eqgreenfunc})we obtain another equation for the matrix
$G(\mathbf{r},\mathbf{r}^{\prime})$ with the operator $H_{0\mathbf{r}^{\prime
}}$ acting on its second variable%

\begin{equation}
G(\mathbf{r};\mathbf{r}{^{\prime}})\left[  H_{0\mathbf{r}^{\prime}}+U\left(
\mathbf{r}^{\prime}\right)  +\Lambda\frac{\omega+i\delta}{2}+iJ(\mathbf{r}%
{^{\prime}})\right]  =i\delta(\mathbf{r}-\mathbf{r}{^{\prime}})
\label{conjeqgreenfunc}%
\end{equation}

Until now no approximations have been done and Eqs. (\ref{eqgreenfunc},
\ref{conjeqgreenfunc}) are exact. Now we can use the assumption that the
potential $U\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  $ changes slowly on the wavelength
$\lambda_{F}$. If the mean free path $l$ for the scattering on the random
potential exceeds $\lambda_{F}$ the Green function varies as a function of
$\mathbf{r-r}^{\prime}$ at distances of the order of $\lambda_{F}$ but, at the
same time, is a slow function of $\left(  \mathbf{r+r}^{\prime}\right)  /2$.
The Fourier transform $G_{\mathbf{p}}\left(  \left(  \mathbf{r+r}^{\prime
}\right)  /2\right)  $ of $G$ $\left(  \mathbf{r,r}^{\prime}\right)  $
respective to $\mathbf{r-r}^{\prime}$ has a sharp maximum near the Fermi
surface. In order to cancel large terms we subtract Eq. (\ref{conjeqgreenfunc}%
) from Eq. (\ref{eqgreenfunc}). Using the assumption that the potential
$U\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  $ is smooth and expanding it in gradients we
obtain in the lowest order%

\begin{equation}
\left[  -\frac{i\mathbf{p\nabla}_{\mathbf{R}}}{m}+i\mathbf{\nabla}%
_{\mathbf{R}}U(\mathbf{R})\frac{\partial}{\partial\mathbf{p}}\right]
G_{\mathbf{p}}(\mathbf{R})+\frac{\omega+i\delta}{2}[\Lambda,G_{\mathbf{p}%
}(\mathbf{R})]+i[J(\mathbf{R}),G_{\mathbf{p}}(\mathbf{R})]=0 \label{f2}%
\end{equation}
where \ $\mathbf{R}=\left(  \mathbf{r}+\mathbf{r}{^{\prime}}\right)  /2$ and
$\left[  ,\right]  $ stands for the commutator. When deriving Eq. (\ref{f2}),
not only the potential $U\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  $ but also the function
$J\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  $ was assumed to be smooth.

The dependence of the Green function $G_{\mathbf{p}}\left(  \mathbf{R}\right)
$ on $\mathbf{|p|}$ is more sharp than on other variables. In order to avoid
this sharp dependence we integrate Eq. (\ref{f2}) over $|\mathbf{p|}$. Of
course, this procedure makes a sense for very large samples when the level
discreteness can be neglected.

The most interesting contribution in the integral over $|\mathbf{p|}$ comes
from the vicinity of the Fermi-surface. A contribution given by momenta
considerably different from $p_{F}$ is proportional to the unity matrix an
drops out from Eq. (\ref{f2}).

Introducing the function $g_{\mathbf{n}}\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  $
\begin{equation}
g_{\mathbf{n}}\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  =\frac{1}{\pi}\int G_{p\mathbf{n}%
}\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  d\xi\text{, \ }\xi=\frac{p^{2}-p_{F}^{2}}{2m}
\label{klassaver}%
\end{equation}
where $\mathbf{n}$ is a unite vector pointing a direction on the Fermi
surface, we obtain the final quasiclassical equation

{\large
\begin{equation}
\left(  v_{F}\mathbf{n\nabla}-p_{F}^{-1}\mathbf{\nabla}_{\mathbf{r}}U\left(
\mathbf{r}\right)  \mathbf{\partial}_{\mathbf{n}}\right)  g_{\mathbf{n}%
}\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  +\frac{i\left(  \omega+i\delta\right)  }%
{2}[\Lambda,g_{\mathbf{n}}\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  ]-[J,g_{\mathbf{n}}]=0
\label{f2a}%
\end{equation}
} where
\[
\mathbf{\partial}_{\mathbf{n}}=\mathbf{\nabla}_{\mathbf{n}}-\mathbf{n,}\text{
}{\nabla}_{\mathbf{n}}=-[\mathbf{n\times\lbrack n\times}\frac{\partial
}{\partial\mathbf{n}}]]
\]

Eq. (\ref{f2a}) should be complemented by a boundary condition at the surface
of the sample. Considering a closed sample we assume that the current across
the border is equal to zero. This leads the boundary condition at the surface
\begin{equation}
\left.  g_{\mathbf{n}_{\perp}}\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  \right|
_{surface}=\left.  g_{-\mathbf{n}_{\perp}}\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  \right|
_{surface} \label{f3}%
\end{equation}
where $\mathbf{n}_{\perp}$ is the component of the vector $\mathbf{n}$
perpendicular to the surface.

Eq. (\ref{f2a}) is similar to an Eilenberger equation written long ago in
superconductivity theory \cite{eilen}. As in the theory of superconductivity,
the solution for the Eq.(\ref{f2a}) satisfies the condition $g_{\mathbf{n}%
}^{2}(\mathbf{r})=\hat{1}.$ Eq. (\ref{f2a}) is written for a non-averaged
potential $U\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  $ and it is valid also in the absence
of the long range potential.

The quasiclassical equation, Eq. (\ref{f2a}), has been written first by
Muzykantskii and Khmelnitskii, Ref. \cite{mk} who guessed a functional for
which Eq. (\ref{f2a}) is just a condition for an extremum. Then, they
proceeded to work with this functional without estimating fluctuations near
this minimum.

It came later as a surprise that, actually, one could write the proper
solution of Eq. (\ref{f2a}) in terms of a functional integral over
supermatrices exactly\cite{kogan}. The \textit{exact} solution for Eq.
(\ref{f2a}) can be written as%

\begin{align}
&  g_{\mathbf{n}}(\mathbf{r})=Z^{-1}[J]\int_{Q_{\mathbf{n}}^{2}=1}%
Q_{\mathbf{n}}(\mathbf{r})\exp\left(  -\frac{\pi\nu}{2}\Phi_{J}[Q_{\mathbf{n}%
}(\mathbf{r})]\right)  DQ_{\mathbf{n}},\nonumber\\
&  \Phi\lbrack Q_{\mathbf{n}}(\mathbf{r})]=Str\int d\mathbf{r}d\mathbf{n[}%
\Lambda{\bar{T}}_{\mathbf{n}}(\mathbf{r})(v_{F}\mathbf{n\nabla}_{\mathbf{r}%
}\nonumber\\
&  -p_{F}^{-1}\mathbf{\nabla}_{\mathbf{r}}U(\mathbf{r})\mathbf{\nabla
}_{\mathbf{n}})T_{\mathbf{n}}(\mathbf{r})+\left(  \frac{i\left(
\omega+i\delta\right)  }{2}\Lambda-J(\mathbf{r})\right)  Q_{\mathbf{n}%
}(\mathbf{r})],\label{sigmaaverage}\\
&  Q_{\mathbf{n}}(\mathbf{r})=T_{\mathbf{n}}(\mathbf{r})\Lambda{\bar{T}%
}_{\mathbf{n}}(\mathbf{r}),\text{ \ }{\bar{T}}_{\mathbf{n}}(\mathbf{r}%
)T_{\mathbf{n}}\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  =1\nonumber
\end{align}
In Eq. (\ref{sigmaaverage}), the partition function $Z[J\left(  \mathbf{r}%
\right)  ]$ is
\begin{equation}
Z[J]=\int_{Q_{\mathbf{n}}^{2}=1}\exp\left(  -\frac{\pi\nu}{2}\Phi\lbrack
Q_{\mathbf{n}}(\mathbf{r})]\right)  DQ_{\mathbf{n}} \label{integ}%
\end{equation}
and the integration is performed over the self-conjugate supermatrices
$Q_{\mathbf{n}}=\bar{Q}_{\mathbf{n}}\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  $ satisfying
the following relation
\begin{equation}
Q_{\mathbf{n}}^{2}\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  =1 \label{f4}%
\end{equation}
We see that the quasiclassical Green function $g_{\mathbf{n}}\left(  r\right)
$ can be written in the form of a functional integral over supermatrices
$Q_{\mathbf{n}}\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  $ depending both on the coordinates
$\mathbf{r}$ and the direction of the momentum $\mathbf{n}$ and satisfying the
constraint, Eq. (\ref{f4}). The first term in the free energy functional is
written in terms of the supermatrices $T_{\mathbf{n}}$ rather than
$Q_{\mathbf{n.}}.$ However, it can be written in a form of a
Wess-Zumino-Novikov-Witten term containing the supermatrices $Q$
only\cite{mk}. Writing this term one should introduce an additional coordinate
varying at the interval $\left[  0,1\right]  .$

The model described by the functional $\Phi$, Eqs. (\ref{sigmaaverage}), is
usually referred to as a ``ballistic $\sigma$-model''. The partition function
$Z\left[  J\right]  ,$ Eq. (\ref{integ}), is unity at $J=0$ due to the
supersymmetry and this allows us to average (if necessary) over the smooth
potential $U\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  $.

The method of quasiclassical Green functions suggested here for a static
external potential does not seem to be restricted by the non-interacting case.
There are indications that it can be generalized to describe clean interacting
systems. Of course, in this case one should write the quasiclassical equations
in time representation because the interaction mixes states with different
energies. Study of interacting systems with this method may be a very
interesting direction of research.

As concerns attempts to prove the Wigner-Dyson statistics for clean
non-interacting systems one can try to start with the functional $\Phi,$ Eq.
(\ref{sigmaaverage}). At first glance, we should simply restrict ourselves
with the integration over $Q$ depending neither on the coordinates, nor on the
momenta. Then, the functional $\Phi$ would contain only the last term and we
would have the zero dimensional $\sigma$-model, which leads immediately to the
WD statistics.

However, a very important question is whether one averages over the potential
$U\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  $ or puts $U\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  =0$ and
averages over the spectrum. In the former case one gets after averaging over
$U\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  $ an additional term in functional $\Phi$
quadratic in gradients. This term leads eventually to a suppression of
non-zero harmonics and one can really obtain the zero-dimensional $\sigma
$-model (see \cite{kogan} and references therein).

The situation with $U\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  =0$ and averaging over the
energy is more interesting. Everything depends on whether the system is
classically integrable or chaotic. It is just the situation for which the
authors of Ref. \cite{bgs} made their hypothesis.

It turns out that within the model with the functional $\Phi$, Eq.
(\ref{sigmaaverage}), and $U\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  =0$ one cannot come to
the zero-dimensional $\sigma$-model. There is a common consensus that a
``regularizer'' (see e.g. \cite{aos}) containing something like square of
gradients in coordinates or momenta is necessary in the correct ballistic
$\sigma$-model. Aleiner and Larkin \cite{al} argued that in order to come to
the zero dimensional $\sigma$-model one had to take into account diffraction,
which is clearly absent in the ballistic $\sigma$-model, Eq.
(\ref{sigmaaverage}). They did not manage to include the diffraction in their
calculational scheme microscopically and mimiced it by introducing artificial
quantum impurities that would correspond to the potential $U\left(
\mathbf{r}\right)  $ in Eq. (\ref{sigmaaverage}). This allowed them to come to
the zero dimensional $\sigma$-model, confirm the WD statistics and calculate
corrections to it. It is worth emphasizing that the effective potential
$U\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  $ was very weak such that the computation was
done in the ballistic regime.

As concerns the real physical diffraction, it cannot be directly included in
the $\sigma$-model using the quasiclassical scheme and a more sophisticated
approach is necessary.

\subsection{Beyond the quasiclassics}

We have seen that the solution of the equations for the Green functions, Eqs.
(\ref{eqgreenfunc}, \ref{conjeqgreenfunc}), can be written in the
quasiclassical approximation in terms of the functional integral over
$8\times8$ supermatrices $Q_{\mathbf{n}}\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  .$ For
certain problems this approximation is not sufficient and the natural question
is: can we do better than that and find a solution for the Green functions in
terms of a functional integral over supermatrices valid at all distances
including those of the order of the electron wavelength $\lambda_{F}$ ?

This attempt has been undertaken recently in Ref. \cite{superbos}, where an
integral of such a type was suggested for a solution of Eq. (\ref{eqgreenfunc}%
). The idea is rather close to the one known in field theory where it is
called bosonization\cite{boson}. The final expressions obtained in Ref.
(\cite{boson}) are rather complicated and this method, to the best of my
knowledge, has not evolved into an efficient calculational tool.

However, the supersymmetric form of the Green functions considered here seems
to promise more and the derivation is rather simple. I follow here a simpler
derivation of Ref. \cite{kogan1}.

What I want to show now is that the Green function, Eq. (\ref{eqgreenfunc}),
can be represented exactly as an integral over supermatrices $Q\left(
\mathbf{r,r}^{\prime}\right)  $ depending on two coordinates $\mathbf{r}$ and
$\mathbf{r\prime}$
\begin{equation}
G(\mathbf{r},\mathbf{r^{\prime}})=Z^{-1}[J]\int Q(\mathbf{r},\mathbf{r^{\prime
}})\exp\bigl(-\Phi\lbrack Q]\bigr)DQ \label{f5}%
\end{equation}
where $Z[J]$ is a new partition function
\begin{equation}
Z[J]=\int\exp\bigl(-\Phi\lbrack Q]\bigr)DQ \label{f6}%
\end{equation}
and the functional $\Phi\lbrack Q]$ has the form
\begin{align}
\Phi\lbrack Q]=\frac{i}{2}\mathrm{Str}\int &  \left(  H_{0\mathbf{r}}+U\left(
\mathbf{r}\right)  +\frac{\omega+i\delta}{2}\Lambda\right) \nonumber\\
&  \times\delta(\mathbf{r}-\mathbf{r^{\prime}})Q(\mathbf{r},\mathbf{r^{\prime
}})d\mathbf{r}d\mathbf{r^{\prime}} \label{f7}%
\end{align}%
\[
+\frac{1}{2}\mathrm{Str}\ln Q-\frac{1}{2}\mathrm{Str}\int J(\mathbf{r}%
,\mathbf{r^{\prime}})Q(\mathbf{r^{\prime}},\mathbf{r})d\mathbf{r}%
d\mathbf{r^{\prime}}%
\]
where $J\left(  \mathbf{r,r}^{\prime}\right)  $ is a source term. The
structure of the supermatrix $Q(\mathbf{r},\mathbf{r^{\prime}})$ in the
integral Eq.(\ref{f5}) should be the same as that of the Green function
$G(\mathbf{r},\mathbf{r^{\prime}})$, i.e. be the same as of the product
$\psi(\mathbf{r})\bar{\psi}(\mathbf{r^{\prime}})$. In particular, this means
that $Q(\mathbf{r},\mathbf{r^{\prime}})$ is self-conjugated
\begin{equation}
\bar{Q}(\mathbf{r},\mathbf{r^{\prime}})\equiv C\;Q^{T}(\mathbf{r^{\prime}%
},\mathbf{r})C^{T}=Q(\mathbf{r},\mathbf{r^{\prime}}) \label{f8}%
\end{equation}
In order to prove Eq.(\ref{f5}) we write the following identity
\begin{align}
&  -2iZ^{-1}[J]\int\biggl[\int\frac{\delta\exp\left(  -\frac{1}{2}%
\mathrm{Str\ln Q}\right)  }{\delta Q(\mathbf{r^{\prime\prime}},\mathbf{r}%
)}Q(\mathbf{r^{\prime\prime}},\mathbf{r^{\prime}})d\mathbf{r^{\prime\prime}%
}\biggr]\times\nonumber\\
&  \exp\left(  -\frac{i}{2}\mathrm{Str}\left[  \hat{H}_{0\mathbf{r}}%
+\frac{\omega+i\delta}{2}\Lambda+iJ\right]  Q\right)  DQ=\nonumber
\end{align}%
\begin{equation}
=i\delta(\mathbf{r}-\mathbf{r^{\prime}}), \label{f9}%
\end{equation}
and integrate over $Q$ by parts. The derivative $\delta/\delta Q$ should act
now on both $Q$ and the exponential. At this point, the supersymmetry plays a
crucial role. Differentiating first the supermatrix $Q$ we obtain the
supermatrix product $\left(  \delta/\delta Q\right)  Q.$ As the number of the
anticommuting variables in the sum over the matrix elements is equal to the
number of the boson ones and the derivatives have the opposite signs, this
matrix product vanishes. Differentiating the exponential only we come to the
following equation
\begin{align}
&  Z^{-1}[J]\int d\mathbf{r^{\prime\prime}}\left(  \hat{H}_{0\mathbf{r}%
}+U\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  \frac{\omega+i\delta}{2}\Lambda+iJ\right)
(\mathbf{r},\mathbf{r^{\prime\prime}})\times\nonumber\\
&  \int Q(\mathbf{r^{\prime\prime}},\mathbf{r^{\prime}})\exp\bigl(-\Phi\lbrack
Q]\bigr)DQ=i\delta(\mathbf{r}-\mathbf{r^{\prime}}) \label{f10}%
\end{align}
Eq. (\ref{f10}) proves immediately that the integral Eq.(\ref{f5}) does
satisfy Eq.(\ref{eqgreenfunc}) and we have really the alternative
representation of the Green function in terms of an integral over the
supermatrices $Q$.

Making the Fourier transform $Q\left(  \mathbf{r}^{\prime}\mathbf{,r}%
^{\prime\prime}\right)  $ in the difference $\mathbf{r}^{\prime}%
\mathbf{-r}^{\prime\prime}$ (Wigner transformation) one can express the
functional $\Phi\left[  Q\right]  $ in terms of the variables $Q_{\mathbf{p}%
}\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  ,$ where $\mathbf{p}$ is the momentum and
$\mathbf{r}$ is the center of mass $\left(  \mathbf{r}^{\prime}+\mathbf{r}%
^{\prime\prime}\right)  /2.$ Then the free energy functional $\Phi$, Eq.
(\ref{f7}) can be written as
\begin{equation}
\Phi\lbrack Q]=\frac{i}{2}\int\mathrm{Str}\,\left[  \mathcal{H}_{J}%
(\mathbf{x})\ast Q(\mathbf{x})-i\ln Q(\mathbf{x})\right]  d\mathbf{x}
\label{f11}%
\end{equation}
where $\mathbf{x=}\left(  \mathbf{r,p}\right)  $ is the coordinate in the
phase space,
\begin{equation}
\mathcal{H}_{J}(\mathbf{x})=H_{0}\left(  \mathbf{p}\right)  +U\left(
\mathbf{r}\right)  +\frac{\omega+i\delta}{2}+iJ\left(  \mathbf{p,r}\right)
\label{f12}%
\end{equation}
is classical Hamilton function.

The product $\ast$ of two matrices $A\left(  \mathbf{x}\right)  $ and
$B\left(  \mathbf{x}\right)  $ is defined by Moyal formula%

\[
A(\mathbf{x})\ast B(\mathbf{x})=A(\mathbf{x})\mbox{e}^{\frac{i}{2}\left(
\overset{\leftarrow}{\nabla}_{\mathbf{r}}\overset{\rightarrow}{\nabla
}_{\mathbf{p}}-\overset{\rightarrow}{\nabla}_{\mathbf{r}}\overset{\leftarrow
}{\nabla}_{\mathbf{p}}\right)  }B(\mathbf{x}).
\]
The scheme of calculations using the Wigner representations and the star
product ``$\ast$'' is known as Weyl symbol calculus \cite{weyl}. This method
is convenient for quasiclassical expansions.

If the potential $U\left(  \mathbf{r}\right)  $ is smooth, one can simplify
Eq. (\ref{f11}) and come again to Eq. (\ref{sigmaaverage}). This procedure is
described in Ref. \cite{superbos}. The functional $\Phi,$ Eq. (\ref{f11}) has
a form of the Lagrangian of a non-commutative field theory \cite{weyl}. The
method suggested here can naturally be called ``superbosonization''.

At the end I have to warn that Eqs. (\ref{f5}-\ref{f7}, \ref{f11}) are not
complete yet because nothing has been said about the contour of integration
over the supermatrices $Q$. This was not very important in Refs.
(\cite{superbos,kogan1}) where a saddle point approximation was used. However,
generally, this question requires a more careful study and this is a subject
of a current work. In case if the difficulties are overcome, the
superbosonization can become very useful in the theory of random matrices for
more general models than the one described by the conventional Eq. (\ref{a1}).

\section{\textit{Summary}}

In these lectures I tried to achieve two goals:

1. The random matrix theory is to a large extent a phenomenological theory.
Therefore, it is very important to have examples when it can be obtained
starting from a microscopic model. The model of the disordered metals
considered here is the first one for which the relevance of the RMT has been
proven. The proof became possible with the help of the supermatrix non-linear
$\sigma$-model first derived for other purposes.

2. Having presented the derivation of the $\sigma$-model I demonstrated how
one obtains the Wigner-Dyson statistics from its zero-dimensional version.
However, in many situations the supersymmetry method allows to go beyond the
Wigner-Dyson model and obtain completely different results like the log-normal
distribution of the amplitudes of the wave functions of Section 2. Of course,
as soon as one has a Hamiltonian one comes to random matrices. However,
generally it is not clear how to write the distribution function for these
matrices in each particular situation and the supersymmetry method can play an
important role for investigation of microscopic models.

I wanted by no means to oppose the RMT and the supersymmetry method to each
other. They can be considered as complimentary methods, although with a
considerable overlap. We see at this school that the random matrices find more
and more applications in many fields of physics, which is an exciting
development. I believe, in many cases the supersymmetry technique can also be
useful in these new applications and one should keep in mind a possibility of
using this scheme.%

\begin{acknowledgments}
This work was supported by the Transregio 12 "Symmetries and Universality in
Mesoscopic Systems" of German Research Society".
\end{acknowledgments}

\begin{thebibliography}{9}                                                                                                %

\bibitem {wigner}E.P. Wigner, Ann. Math. \textbf{53}, 36 (1951)

\bibitem {mehta}L.M. Mehta,\textit{\ Random Matrices, }Academic Press, San
Diego (1991)

\bibitem {dyson}F.J. Dyson, J. Math. Phys. \textbf{3}, 140, 157, 166 (1962)

\bibitem {ebook}K.B. Efetov, \textit{Supersymmetry in Disorder and Chaos,
}Cambridge University Press, New York (1997)

\bibitem {verbaar}J.J.M. Verbaarschot (this volume)

\bibitem {az}A. Altland, and M.R. Zirnbauer, Phys. Rev. B \textbf{55}, 1142 (1997)

\bibitem {ge}L.P. Gorkov and G.M. Eliashberg, Zh. Eksp. Teor. Fiz. \textbf{48,
}1407 (1965) (Sov. Phys. JETP \textbf{21}, 940 (1965))

\bibitem {agd}A.A. Abrikosov, L.P. Gorkov, and I.E. Dzyaloshinskii,
\textit{Methods of Quantum Field Theory in Statistical Physics, }Prentice
Hall, New York (1963)\textit{\ }

\bibitem {kubo1}R. Kubo, J. Phys. Soc. Jpn. \textbf{17}, 975 (1962)

\bibitem {kubo2}R. Kubo, in \textit{Polarization, Matiere et Rayonnement,
}livre jubile en l'honneur du Professeur A. Kastler, Presses Universitaires de
France, Paris, p.325 (1969)

\bibitem {aalr}E. Abrahams, P.W. Anderson, D.C. Licciardello, and T.V.
Ramakrishnan, Phys. Rev. Lett. \textbf{42}, 673 (1979)

\bibitem {glk}L.P. Gorkov, A.I. Larkin, and D.E. Khmelnitskii, Pis'ma Zh.
Eksp. Teor. Fiz. \textbf{30, }248 (1979) (Sov. Phys. JETP Lett. \textbf{30},
228 (1979))

\bibitem {efetov1}K.B. Efetov, Zh. Eksp. Teor. Fiz. \textbf{82}, 872 (1982)
(Sov. Phys. JETP \textbf{55, }514 (1982); J. Phys. C \textbf{15}, L909 (1982);
Zh. Eksp. Teor. Fiz. \textbf{83}, 833 (Sov. Phys. JETP \textbf{56}, 467 (1982)

\bibitem {ereview}K.B. Efetov, Adv. Phys. \textbf{32}, 53 (1983)

\bibitem {vwz}J.J.M. Verbaarschot, H.A. Weidenm\"{u}ller, and M.R. Zirnbauer,
Phys. Rep. \textbf{129}, 367 (1985)

\bibitem {bgs}O. Bohigas, M.J. Gianonni and C. Schmidt, Phys. Rev. Lett.
\textbf{52}, 1 (1984); J. Physique Lett. \textbf{45}, L1615 (1984)

\bibitem {suptrace}\textit{Supersymmetry and Trace Formula, (}edited
by\textit{\ }J.P. Keating, D.E. Khmelnitskii, and I.V. Lerner), NATO\ ASI
Series B: Physics Vol. \textbf{370}, Kluwer Academic, New York (1999)

\bibitem {wegner}F. Wegner, Z. Phys. B \textbf{35}, 207(1979)

\bibitem {elk}K.B. Efetov, A.I. Larkin, D.E. Khemelnitskii, Zh. Eksp. Teor.
Fiz. \textbf{79}, 1120 (1980) (Sov. Phys. JETP, \textbf{52}, 568 (1980))

\bibitem {sw}L. Sch\"{a}fer and F. Wegner, Z. Phys. B \textbf{38}, 113 (1980)

\bibitem {km}A. Kamenev and M. Mezard, J. Phys. A: Math. Gen. \textbf{32},
4373 (1999)

\bibitem {yl}I.V. Yurkevich and I.V. Lerner, Phys. Rev. B \textbf{60}, 3955 (1999)

\bibitem {kanzieper}E. Kanzieper, Phys. Rev. Lett. \textbf{89}, 250201 (2002)

\bibitem {finkelstein}A.M. Finkel'stein, Zh. Eksp. Teor. Fiz. \textbf{84}, 168
(1983) (Sov. Phys. JETP \textbf{57}, 97 (1983))

\bibitem {fin1}A.M. Finkel'stein, in \textit{Electron Liquid in Disordered
Conductors, }edited by I.M. Khalatnikov, Soviet Scientific Reviews, Vol. 14
(Harwood, London, 1990)

\bibitem {schwiete}G. Schwiete and K.B. Efetov, Phys. Rev. B, 2005 (in press), cond-mat/0409546

\bibitem {fyodorov}Y.V. Fyodorov, H.J. Sommers, J. Math. Phys. \textbf{38},
1918 (1997)

\bibitem {gmw}T. Guhr, A. Muller-Groeling, H.A.Weidenmuller, Phys. Rep.
\textbf{299}, 190 (1998)

\bibitem {mirlin}A.D. Mirlin, Phys. Rep. \textbf{326}, 259 (2000)

\bibitem {ast}A. Altland, B.D. Simons, D. Taras-Semchuk, Adv. Phys.
\textbf{49}, 321 (2000)

\bibitem {asz}A. Altland, B.D. Simons, M.R. Zirnbauer, Phys. Rep.
\textbf{359}, 283 (2002)

\bibitem {ps}G. Parisi and N. Sourlas, Pys. Rev. Lett. \textbf{43}, 744 (1979)

\bibitem {berezin}Dokl. Akad. Nauk SSSR, \textbf{137}, 31 (1961);
\textit{Metod vtorichnogo kvantovaniya,} (\textit{The method of Second
Quantization), }Nauka (1965)\textit{; Introduction to Superanalysis, }MPAP,
Vol. 9 D. Reidel, Dordrecht (1987)

\bibitem {altshk}B.L. Altshuler and B.I. Shklovskii Zh. Eksp. Teor. Fiz.
\textbf{91}, 220 (1986) (Sov. Phys. JETP \textbf{64}, 127 (1986)

\bibitem {el}K.B. Efetov and A.I. Larkin, Zh. Eksp. Teor. Fiz. \textbf{85},
764 (1983) (Sov. Phys. JETP, \textbf{58}, 444 (1983)

\bibitem {fm}Y.V. Fyodorov and A.D. Mirlin, Phys. Rev. Lett. \textbf{67}, 2405 (1991)

\bibitem {eb}{K.B. Efetov, }Zh. Eksp. Teor. Fiz. \textbf{88}, 1032-1052
(1985); (Sov. Phys. JETP. \textbf{61}, 606-617, 1985)\newline

\bibitem {mf}A.D. Mirlin and Y.V. Fyodorov, J. Phys. A \textbf{24}, 2273 (1991)

\bibitem {mp}M. Mezard and G. Parisi, J. Phys. (Paris) \textbf{47}, 1285
(1985); Europhys. Lett. \textbf{3}, 1067 (1987)

\bibitem {fe}V.I. Falko and K.B. Efetov, Europhys. Lett. \textbf{32}, 627
(1995); Phys. Rev. B\textbf{52}, 17413 (1995)

\bibitem {porter}C.E. Porter, \textit{Statistical Theories of
Spectra:\ Fluctuations, }Academic Press, New York (1965)

\bibitem {brody}T.A. Brody, J. Flores, J.B. French, P.A. Mello, A. Panday, and
S.S.M. Wong, Rev. Mod. Phys. \textbf{53}, 385 (1981)

\bibitem {polyakov}A.M. Polyakov, Phys. Lett. \textbf{103B }207, 211 (1981)

\bibitem {seiberg}N. Seiberg, Prog. Theor. Phys. \textbf{102 }Supl., 319 (1990)

\bibitem {tsvelik}A. Tsvelik, C. Mudry, and Y. Kogan, Phys. Rev. Lett,
\textbf{77, }707 (1996)

\bibitem {mkh}B.A. Muzykantskii and D.E. Khmelnitskii, Phys. Rev. B
\textbf{51}, 5480 (1995)

\bibitem {fmir}Y.V. Fyodorov and A.D. Mirlin, JETP Lett. \textbf{60}, 790 (1994)

\bibitem {akl}B.L. Altshuler, V.E. Kravtsov, and I.V. Lerner, Pis'ma Zh. Eksp.
Teor. Fiz. \textbf{43}, 342 (1986) (Sov. Phys. JETP Lett. \textbf{43, }441
(1986)); Zh. Eksp. Teor. Fiz. \textbf{91}, 2276 (1986) (Sov. Phys. JETP
\textbf{64}, 1352 (1986)); Phys. Lett. A \textbf{134, }488 (1989)

\bibitem {been}C.W.J. Beenakker, Rev. Mod. Phys. \textbf{69}, 733 (1997)

\bibitem {eilen}G. Eilenberger, Z. Phys. \textbf{214}, 195 (1968)

\bibitem {mk}B. A. Muzykantskii and D. E. Khmelnitskii, Pis'ma Zh. Eksp. Theo.
Fiz. \textbf{62} 68 (1995) [JETP Lett. \textbf{62} 76 (1995)]; (also see in
Ref. \cite{suptrace}).

\bibitem {kogan}K. B. Efetov, V. R. Kogan, Phys. Rev. B \textbf{67}, 245312 (2003)

\bibitem {aos}A. Altland, C.R. Offer, and B.D. Simons in \cite{suptrace}.

\bibitem {al}I.L. Aleiner and A.I. Larkin, Phys. Rev. B\textbf{54}, 14423
(1996); Phys. Rev. E \textbf{55} (2): R1243 (1997)

\bibitem {superbos}K. B. Efetov, G. Schwiete, K. Takahashi, Phys. Rev. Lett.
\textbf{92}, 026807 (2004)

\bibitem {boson}P.B. Wiegmann, Nucl. Phys. B \textbf{323}, 311 (1989); S.R.
Das, A. Dhar, G. Mandal, and S.R. Wadia, Mod. Phys. Lett. A \textbf{7}, 71
(1992); A. Dhar, G. Mandal, and S.R. Wadia, \textit{ibid.} \textbf{7}, 3129
(1992); D.V. Khveshchenko, Phys. Rev. B \textbf{49}, 16893 (1994);
\textit{ibid.} \textbf{52}, 4833 (1995).

\bibitem {kogan1}K. B. Efetov, V. R. Kogan, Rev. B \textbf{70}, 195326 (2004)

\bibitem {weyl}S.W. Mc Donald, Phys. Rep. \textbf{158}, 337 (1988)
\end{thebibliography}
\end{document}

chapbib.bbl
%% Aug. 11, 1997 version

\begin{thebibliography}{10}

\bibitem{AbadiCarSecond}
M.~Abadi and L.~Cardelli.
\newblock A theory of primitive objects: Second-order systems.
\newblock {\em Science of Computer Programming}, 25(2-3):81--116, December
  1995.
\newblock A preliminary version appeared in the 1994 Proc. of European
  Symposium on Programming.

\bibitem{ArnoldGosling}
K.~Arnold and J.~Gosling.
\newblock {\em The Java Programming Language}.
\newblock Addison Wesley, 1996.


\bibitem{CardelliDot}
L.~Cardelli and X.~Leroy.
\newblock {\em Abstract types and the dot notation}, pages 479--504.
\newblock IFIP State of the Art Reports. North Holland, March 1990.
\newblock Also appeared as {SRC} {R}esearch {R}eport 56.

\bibitem{CookThesis}
W.R. Cook.
\newblock {\em A Denotational Semantics of Inheritance}.
\newblock PhD thesis, Brown University, 1989.

\bibitem{DiBlasioFisher}
P.~DiBlasio and K.~Fisher.
\newblock A concurrent object calculus.
\newblock In {\em CONCUR '96 Proc.}, pages 655--670, Pisa, 1996. Springer LNCS
  1119.


\bibitem{GoldbergR}
A.~Goldberg and D.~Robson.
\newblock {\em Smalltalk--80: The Language and its Implementation}.
\newblock Addison Wesley, 1983.

\bibitem{GunterMitch}
C.A. Gunter and J.C. Mitchell, editors.
\newblock {\em Theoretical Aspects of Object-Oriented Programming}.
\newblock MIT Press, Cambridge, MA, 1994.


\bibitem{Liskclu}
B.~Liskov et~al.
\newblock {\em {CLU} Reference Manual}.
\newblock Springer LNCS 114, Berlin, 1981.

\bibitem{LiskovS}
B.~Liskov, A.~Snyder, R.~Atkinson, and C.~Schaffert.
\newblock Abstraction mechanisms in {CLU}.
\newblock {\em Comm. ACM}, 20:564--576, 1977.

\bibitem{BMeyerEiffel}
B.~Meyer.
\newblock {\em Eiffel: The Language}.
\newblock Prentice-Hall, 1992.

\bibitem{mth90}
R.~Milner, M.~Tofte, and R.~Harper.
\newblock {\em The Definition of {Standard ML}}.
\newblock MIT Press, 1990.
\end{thebibliography}



procsamp.bbl
\begin{thebibliography}{}

\bibitem[Barrett and Morton, 1984]{bm84xxx}
Barrett, J.~W. and Morton, K.~W. (1984).
\newblock Approximate symmetrization and {P}etrov-{G}alerkin methods for
  diffusion-convection problems.
\newblock {\em Comput. Methods Appl. Mech. Engrg.}, 45:97--122.

\bibitem[Chui and Wang, ]{cw:cardspline}
Chui, C.~K. and Wang, J.~Z.
\newblock A cardinal spline approach to wavelets.
\newblock {\em Proc. Amer. Math. Soc.}
\newblock to appear.

\bibitem[Daubechies, 1990]{id:signal}
Daubechies, I. (1990).
\newblock The wavelet transform, time-frequency localization and signal
  analysis.
\newblock {\em IEEE Trans. Inform. Theory}, 36:961--1005.

\bibitem[Doolan et~al., 1980]{dms80}
Doolan, E.~P., Miller, J. J.~H., and Schilders, W. H.~A. (1980).
\newblock {\em Uniform Numerical Methods for Problems with Initial and Boundary
  Layers}.
\newblock Boole Press, Dublin.

\bibitem[Garc\'{\i}a-Archilla and Mackenzie, 1991]{gm91}
Garc\'{\i}a-Archilla, B. and Mackenzie, J.~A. (1991).
\newblock Analysis of a supraconvergent cell vertex finite volume method for
  one-dimensional convection-diffusion problems.
\newblock Technical Report NA91/13, Oxford University Computing Laboratory, 11
  Keble Road, Oxford, OX1 3QD.
\newblock submitted for publication.

\bibitem[Heinrich et~al., 1977]{hhmz77}
Heinrich, J.~C., Huyakorn, P.~S., Mitchell, A.~R., and Zienkiewicz, O.~C.
  (1977).
\newblock An upwind finite element scheme for two-dimensional convective
  transport equations.
\newblock {\em Internat. J. Numer. Methods Engrg.}, 11:131--143.


\bibitem[Jameson et~al., 1981]{jst81}
Jameson, A., Schmidt, W., and Turkel, E. (1981).
\newblock Numerical solutions of the {E}uler equations by finite volume methods
  using {R}unge-{K}utta time stepping.
\newblock AIAA Paper No. 81-1259.

\bibitem[Kellogg and Tsan, 1978]{kt78}
Kellogg, R.~B. and Tsan, A. (1978).
\newblock Analysis of some difference approximations for a singular
  perturbation problem without turning points.
\newblock {\em Math. Comp.}, 32:1025--1039.

\bibitem[von Neumann, 1955]{vn:mfqm}
von Neumann, J. (1932, 1949, and 1955).
\newblock {\em Mathematical Foundations of Quantum Mechanics}.
\newblock Princeton University Press.

\end{thebibliography}
